This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project
to make the world's books discoverable online.
It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover.
Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the
publisher to a library and finally to you.
Usage guidelines
Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying.
We also ask that you:
+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for
personal, non-commercial purposes.
+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help.
+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it.
+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe.
About Google Book Search
Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web
at http : //books . google . com/|
/?,/,
/ /
3 J /s-/
<=?./?
HARVARD
COLLEGE
LIBRARY
Digitized by
Google
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Digitized by VjOOQLC
._ 7 ^
34^» t / •-•>
o
v(
^
7%e
BOOK V.
^ashtAbhyayi^
' f"
PANINI.
parts xvn— XX
S. C. VASU.
$6 Vt,'
Price Rs 3.
Digitized by VjOOQLC
j a a X-itfti^"/? ir^X *- ~3t5rj> 2 - /<
SJfhrarg
THE BEQUEST OP
PROFESSOR OP SANSKRIT
1880-19*6
>F SANSKRIT.
* * From what
Iould I have given for
Pftnini's Sfttras and
inishing your work.
February \ 1892. — • *
* Public shows clearly
p as exact and pithy
it claim a high place
krit Grammar. The
ellent .
d April, 1893.—* *
bubt, than to get hold
[e standard work of
ke this valuable work
of ancient India in
June, 1893.—* * *
md executed, doing
my opinion, very
OPINI
'Prof A
I have se<
such a wor
the Comm;
Prof el
• The ft
that the a*
as possibl*
amongst t|
paper, prii)
Profex
• Nothin
of a trusts
Sanskrit 1
known to 1
this counti
Profei
The worH
Credit to Xiic tntnamvvi «.»•>- ^^ v ^.w..^^. — — ^. .— — _~, -_ — j ~ t F - — ^
valuable undertaking, as it does to give the European student of the native
grammar more help than he can find anywhere else. It ought to have a good
sale in Europe (and correspondingly in America).
Professor V. Fausbdl, Copenhagen, ijthfune, 1893. — * • * It appears to
me to be a splendid production of Indian industry and scholarship, and I value
it particularly on account of the extracts from the Kasika.
Professor Dr. R. Pischcl, Hlale (Saafe), 27th May, 1893.— • # # I have
gone through it and find it an extremely valuable and useful book, all the more
so, as there are very few Sanskrit scholars in Europe who understand PAnini.
Pandit Lalchandra Vidyabhaskar, M. R. A. S. (London), Guru to H. H.
the Maharaja of fodhpur.
U«lc**rNirj HttqiftcHIJ-H^tlP qiM^«htf)4)Jk9iqRHt: II ^ II .
HT%5f^R^^TH^H^ffeT ro%^P^nrra: »rf<Tf%yn% 11 v ii
^ mwia«i wmifti^^MM^ mMHimMq J>m^nMRt< t
Digitized by
Google
OPINIONS OF THE PRESS.
The Indian Union, (Allaliabad), 26th November,^ i8pi. — * * * The original .
Text and Commentaries, carefully edited with English notes and explanations*
bespeak of much diligence, care and ability ; and those of the English-reading
public who have a taste for Sanskrit cannot be too thankful to Babu Sris
Chandra for offering them so easy an access to the intricate regions reigned
over by that Master Grammariari. '"■•*' *• • We recommend this book to all
English-knowing lovers of the Sanskrit Language. *.
The Tribune, (Lalwre), pth December \ 1891*— ?V * * The translator has
spared no pains in preparing a translation which may place P&nini's celebrated
work within the comprehension of people not deeply read in Sanskrit . The
paper, printing and the general get-up of the book before us are admirable,
and considering the size of the book (it is estimated to extend 2000 pages)
the price appears to be extremely moderate. * ■ - ^
The Amrita Bazar Patrika, (Calcutta), 18th December, i8pr.— m * • Judging
from the first part before us, we must say that Babu Sris Chandra has suc-
ceeded well in the difficult work of translation, which seems to us to be at.
once lucid, full and exact. It is no exaggeration to say that Babu Sris Chandra's
translation, when completed, will claim a prominent place among similar works
by European Sanskrit Scholars. , .
The Hope, (Calcutta), 20th December, iSpi.—* * * The get-up of the
publication is of a superior order, and the contents display considerable ' pains-
taking on the part of the translator. - -•■ -
The Arya Patrika, (Lahore), 22nd December, i8pi. — * * * The talented
Babu has rendered a great service to the cause of Sanskrit literature by produ-
cing the sort of translation he is engaged upon. * * * His effort is most
laudable and deserves every encouragement
Karnatak Patra, (DJiarwar), yth February, i8p2. — * * * Mr. Vasu gives
ample proof of his competency to undertake the work which is not an easy task
even to learned Sanskritists.
The Punjab Times, (Rawalpindi), 17th February, i8p2.—* * , • Babu
Sris Chandra is well-known for his scholarly attainments. He has done the
translation in a lucid and clear English. We can strongly recommend it to those
who wish to study Sanskrit Grammar through the medium of English.
The Mandalay Herald, 31st. December, i8pi. — * * * Students and readers
of classic language of India are much indebted to the learned Pandit for his
translation of this scientific work on the grammar and philology of the Sanskrit
language.
The Arya Darpan, (Shahjahanpur,) February^ 1892. — * • * Such a work
has been a desideratum. It is well got up, and praiseworthy. We wish it every
success.
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
.IndL 3Wi
OPINIONS OF DISTINGUISHED PROFESSORS OF SANSKRIT.
Professor Max Mtiller, Oxford, pth February 1892. — * • * From what
I have seen of it, it will be a very useful work. What should I have given for
such a work forty years ago when I puzzled my head over P&nini's Stitras and
the Commentaries. * * * I hope you may succeed in finishing your work.
Professor Gopalji S. Desai, Rajkot in Kathiawar, 20th February, 1892. — * *
* The first part that has already been out before the Public shows clearly
that the author has spared no pains to make the translation as exact and pithy
as possible. The work when completed will no doubt claim a high place
amongst the best works by European scholars on Sanskrit Grammar. The
paper, printing and the general get-up of the book are excellent
Professor T. Jolly, Ph. D., Wiirsburg, (Germany), 23rd April, 1893. — * *
# Nothing could have been more gratifying to me, no doubt, than to get hold
of a trustworthy translation of P&nini's Asht&dhy&yi, the standard" work of
Sanskrit literature, and I shall gladly do my best to make this valuable work
known to lovers and students of die immortal literature of ancient India in
this country.
Professor W. D. Whitney, New Haven, U. S. A^ iph June, 1893.— • * *
The work seems to me to be very well planned and executed, doing
credit to the translator and publisher. It is also, in my opinion, very
valuable undertaking, as it does to give the European student of the native
grammar more help than he can find anywhere else. It ought to have a good
sale in Europe (and correspondingly in America).
Professor V. Fausbol, Copenhagen, 15th June, 1893. — # # * It appears to
me to be a splendid production of Indian industry and scholarship, and I value
it particularly on account of the extracts from the Kasika.
Professor Dr. R. Pischel, Hlale (Saale), 27th May, 1893.— * # # I have
gone through it and find it an extremely valuable and useful book, all the more
so, as there are very few Sanskrit scholars in Europe who understand P&nini.
Pandit Lalchandra Vidyabliaskar, M. R. A. S. (London), Guru to H. H.
the Maharaja of Jodhpur.
prc?flr**ft fs«T5* ft^nr *&&* uHi«iHiiwiJwi'iRft,5>tPif t
um^<*H*i wiift<H|44<<fl*u: ^U41chchra<hfoqiqft» gp M H
«lft4<i»lf**fi'dfi3ft4ft Wqt»3ftl««iiPiMHWjftp II \ M
iy^^^M^< uuf^^T^^^»^H<i4<^cri^^MRt'i t
wraifi^urue^d' Mq\vi ^^T^H^\A\ yffn *r Rut i
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
OPINIONS OF THE PRESS.
The Indian Union, ( Allahabad), 26th November, iSpi. — * • * The original
Text and Commentaries, carefully edited with English notes and explanations*
bespeak of much diligence, care and ability ; and those of the English-reading
public who have a taste for Sanskrit cannot be too thankful to Babu Sris
Chandra for offering them so easy ah access to the intricate regions reigned
over by that Master Grammariatl. *' • * We recommend this book to all
English-knowing lovers of the Sanskrit Language.
The Tribune, (Lahore), pth December* j8pr~—* • * The translator has
spared no pains in preparing a translation which may place P&nini's celebrated
work within the comprehension of people not deeply read in Sanskrit The
paper, printing and the general get-up of the book before us are admirable,
and considering the size of the book (it is estimated to extend 2000 pages)
the price appears to be extremely moderate* '
The Amrita Bazar Patrika, (Calcutta), iSth December, i8pi. — * * * Judging
from the first part before us, we must say that Babu Sris Chandra has suc-
ceeded well in the difficult work of translation, which seems to us to be at
once lucid, full and exact. It is no exaggeration to say that Babu Sris Chandra's
translation, when completed, will claim a prominent place among similar works
by European Sanskrit Scholars.
The Hope, (Calcutta), 20th December, i8pi.—* * * The get-up of the
publication is of a superior order, and the contents display considerable pains-
taking on the part of the translator. -
The Arya Patrika, (Lahore), 22nd December, i8pr. — * * * The talented
Babu has rendered a great service to the cause of Sanskrit literature by produ-
cing the sort of translation he is engaged upon. * * * His effort is most
laudable and deserves every encouragement
Kamatak Patra, (Dharwar), yth February, 1892. — * * * Mr. Vasu gives
ample proof of his competency to undertake the work which is not an easy task
even to learned Sanskritists.
Tlu Punjab Times, (Rawalpindi), iph February, i8p2.—* • * Babu
Sris Chandra is well-known for his scholarly attainments. He has done the
translation in a lucid and clear English. We can strongly recommend it to those
who wish to study Sanskrit Grammar through the medium of English.
The Mandalay Herald, 31st. December, i8pi. — • • • Students and readers
of classic language of India are much indebted to the learned Pandit for his
translation of this scientific work on the grammar and philology of the Sanskrit
language.
The Arya Darpan, (Shahjahanpur,) February, i8p2. — * • • Such a work
has been a desideratum. It is well got up, and praiseworthy. We wish it every
success.
V^OOQie
Digitized by VjOOQ
Opinions of the Press (continued).
The Allahabad Review, January] i8p2.—* • • The translator has done
his work conscientiously and faithfully. The translation of such a work ^ into
English, therefore, cannot but be a great boon to all students of the science
of language and of Sanskrit literature in special The translator deserves the
help of the Government and the Chiefs of India.
The Maharatta (Poona), 4th July, iSpj.—* • • If we may judge from
the first part which lies before us, it will prove'a very valuable help to the stu-
dent of P&nini. * • So far as it goes it is creditably performed, and there-
fore deserves patronage from all students of Sanskrit and the Education
Department.
Indian Mirror (Calcutta), lyth March, iSpf. — • * • The manner in
which the publication is being pushed through, speaks volumes in favour of the
learning and patriotism of its editor, Babu Sris Chandra Vasu. The whole
» work when completed will be an invaluable guide to the study of Sanskrit litera-
ture and especially to the English speaking students of the Sanskrit language.
Lucifer (London), March i8p6. — * * • We are pleased to find
that the translation is clear and easy and the extracts from the KcLshika are not
only very numerous but also valuable. The large number of references to the pre-
ceding sQtras for the formation of ' padas ' will save much time and trouble,
and obviate a difficulty which discourages many from the study of PAnini.
Indeed the English translation of the grammar could rightly be called " PAnini
Made Easy." • * * It can be recommended as of great impor-
tance, not only to all who wish to have a general knowledge of P&nini but also
to the few who desire to master the great grammar thoroughly and enjoy all
its benefits. _ • .
RATES OP SUBSCRIPTION
I Payable in advance, for the complete work, including postage.
\ Indian .. ... ~ Rs. SO O O
Foreign - £ 2 O O
Payable by instalments, per volume, excluding postage.
Indian .- Rs. 8 O O
Foreign _ £ O 6 O
Payable at the end of publication, for the complete work, excluding postage.
Indian ~. ... _ Rs. 80 O O
Foreign ~ ... ~ £ 8 O- O
All communications to be addressed to
SINDHU CHARAN BASU,
i Publisher of Pan ini,
Benares Cantonment,
i N.-W. P., India.
i
I The Tara Printing Worka, Benares.
\
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
BOOK V.
THE
« '. t
THE ASHTADHYAYI OF PANINL
TRANSLATED INTO ENGLISH.
BY
SRISA CHANDRA VASU, B. A.,
Provincial Civil Service, N. W. P.
Published by Sindhu Charan Bose,
at the Panitti Office,
1897..
(All Right* kt$tmdj
'*.'
t
I
<
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
.' f
I;
.; .\ .: i i i
A"
HARVARD
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY
• ->
(!
I'
\
A
Digitized by VjOOQLC
TO
...... r
jjmftie ^ir JSo'lm <$dj}*, ft, <f , <$,
CHIEF JUSTICE OF THE NORTH-WESTERN POVINCES,
THIS WORK
is,
WITH HIS LORDSHIP'S PERMISSION,
AND IN RESPECTFUL APPRECIATION OF HIS LORDSHIP'S
SERVICES TO THE CAUSE OF ADMINISTRATION OF
' JUSTICE AND OF EDUCATION
IN
THESE PROVINCES. /
g)*H;sttfe
BY HIS LORDSHIP'S HUMBLE SERVANT
i THE TRANSLATOR
Digitized by VjOOQiC
'■
J
I
7
/
i ;. v , / i:
I ? .. 1 YIIt<
>
\
Digitized by VjOOQLC
BOOK FIFTH
Chapter Firs*
sn$ *fidi^ : ii t > <*u& u sen?, starac, $: tt
i. From this one forward to c tcna-kritam* V* 1»
37, the aflBx ^hha* bears rule.
The affix & has the various senses taught in these thirty-seven sfltras
V. i. i. to 37. Thus in the Sfltra cf&f^r 'suitable for that*, V. 1. 5. the word *
must be read to complete the sense. Thus q cS^U f^^l =» *s=ftqfr ^555, «h<4)i| l£*i
ST3ft4hl : , sr^ctffa: 11 The limitation of the jurisdiction of 9 has been indicated in
the sfltra with regard to the meaning of the affix, and not with regard to the
affix. As an affix, & has no force beyond SOtra 17, the affix *n being the
ruling affix thereafter.
2. The affix 'yat* comes after a pr&tipadika ending
with ^ ( long or short ), and after the words nr and the rest*
the senses of the affix being those tanght upto Sfltra V. 1. 37.
The senses of PrAk-kritiya affixes are three viz, those taught in sfltras
V. I. S, V. 1. 12, and V. 1. 16. This n^ debars fy II Thus tif¥ f^T-^Tf +**J
-ST^ (VI. 4. 146, VI. 1. 79). As $155* *n& 'wood', 'fit for a stake' ft^s* OTlfcpit
So also «hH<J4<4«JM greraff 'earth' lit 'fit for a water-pot'.
So also after inrft words, e. g. irapi 'suitable for cows', tftcqqt 'suitable
for offering*.
offering'
The words *rirj: meaning 'a kind of leather', and ^5: 'a kind of fftt
ing\ and sr^: 'a kind of food', all end in * and are governed by this sfttra,
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
9$t **w [Bk. V.Gh. I. §4
in spite of V, I. 15 which applies especially to leathers, and V. 1. 4 and its
• vArtika which applies especially to 'offerings' and 'food modifications 9 . This is
an example where a subsequent s&trgt dpes npt debar a prior stitra (1. 4. 2). Thus
SRJ + *fll- *HF$ *?*, 'leather fit (pr jsnaki^ . ^anangu', ^R5 + *?*- *TC«ir W u l*!*
•rice fit for making charu' f S^ + ^k^^T^ir ^HT: "barley' fit for making Saktu'.
In the list of tf^nrf? given hereunder, occurs sftft spr ^, which means that
*ni^ is replaced by *pr when the affix m is added. Thus srre% ft^T: =» *W. mean-
ing «rm 'axis, axle' lit 'fitted for the nave of the wheel'; or a wood fit to be
made the nave of a wheel or inmhh. the grease. When the word snf*
means 'navel' of a living being, then it will not take this ^ but it will take
the mi of V. 1. 6. In that case, *re will not replace Jfrt%; e. g. 5m9 + m~^P*n
'suitable for navel' i, e. oil.
The word 5^ occurs in »T^rff class. It takes sampras&raija, ^ being
changed to 7, and optionally this ¥ is lengthened; and the ud&tta accent falls
on the final. As ^^T^+^-g^+^l-gslwc or ^+n?l=*^p^ 'fit for a dog\
Contrary to VI. 4. 144, the sj of q&i is not elided before the taddhita affix q^ 11
The word 3j*f*£ occurs in the iraiFF class. Its final is replaced by «FT^;
e.g. «^+^=^ + Bre+*«3WF*:^j<r. 'a well*.
1 «tr, 2 *ft?T, 3 HTO*, 4 ft<r, 5 wf$H, 6 BITOT, 7 TO*T (S3*), 8.yr, 9 ?Nr, 10 5^
(^).ll*ri?*w%l2^fcTOrc<**Tn Sros* H*qfl*u*H «HnTnwnL i 13 vrat
S5f^% 14. ^T*. 15 151*, 16 ** (^[) f 17 ^ 18 «rg**, 19 a^p* (*to*; *wr) 20 q*? 9
21 V» 22 ifr*», 23 &*• «fer), 24 <*«* II
3. The affix *icj comes in the Pr&k-kritlya senses,
after the word 'kambala*, when a Name is meant.
This debars 'chha'. Thus 3PTO+3rt»3i*9Fi| 'A kambalya-measure of
wool'-" 100 Palas of wool. This is the name of a measure, such as qiMHiflufi
Why do we say tifiref ? Observe zmftm ^ "wool" lit. 'fit for making
blanket*, which is formed by 9 U
4. The affix *rac comes optionally after the words
denoting 'offering/ and after apftpa &c, in the sense of
Prak-krltiya.
Thus *nft*3 *fa " fit for making «nftw" i. e. curd :— or sttFwW with
9 M So also gftirap or jfffcnfar W^n, - suitable for making Purofasa • L e.
\
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. 1. 1 J. ] ** u 85 2
a kind of rice. The word gft occurs in the irarft class (V. I. 2) and it neces-
sarily takes mQ there being no option. The fft here, therefore, means things
denoting sacrificial offerings, and not the word-form ' havi.'
So also after *T£TTfe as, -5*35*1* or «l$tfq, ^JF** or 3*ftfW »
1 **&f 2 H°3?*, 3 bt^t (spy?), 4 bt^T, 5 stfta, 6 3T>5*, 7 55^, 8 stfc*, 9 g* f
10 jjt, 11 ftr% 12 itfhf, 13 ssn*, H ^r^t, 15 tfrw* , 16 jfa?, 17 ht*K
18 STSPpRft*tW, 19 gr», 20 tjpir, 21 *ft (<fhf), 22 *?*% 23 ^, 24^,25 *w*y* f
Vnrt: — The affix zjrj comes optionally after words denoting modifica-
tions of food: such as Sr§ ■ In the case of 'saktu* howevet, no of op tion is
allowed. See V. 1. 2.
9r^r f%cra[ 11 ^i H ^i^r n ci^lr, feni n
5. An affix comes after a word in the fourth case
in construction, in the sense of € good for that/
Thus-ro^f|^«Tt2^«^^5P 'fit for calves' i. e. a cow-milker. So
6. The affix q^ comes in the sense of 4 good for
thaV after a word denoting a part of the body.
The word *flft means animal organism. This debars 3; thus, $?ani
good for the teeth.' ip*^ !ro*Pfc 5p*l*> «fewL such as dentrifice, snuff, oil &c
See VI. 1. 213. _
7. The affix *rac comes in the sense of € good for
that/ after the word* khala/ 'yava/ m&sha/ <tila/ 'vrisha'
and 4 brahma^/
This debars 9. Thus h&m. "suitable for threshing floor/ So also
$**% 5ra% (^eiin, fan and vjr*tal 11
No secondary derivatives can, however, be formed of the following
f*^ ftcPl, STO^ ifftl; the full phrases must be used in these cases, for these
words take neither er nor ^ though T* is « fq^, and a^ is- mm N
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
8 53 **li [Bk, V. Ch. I. §9
The word ^ in the sfltra indicates that the rule applies to words other
than those enumerated. Thus mr* f^ttf- W1F W
*I«UN»UJ *3R[ || < || q^rft II anr- *lfiy4IH , *3RC II
8 The affix *3pj comes in the sense of € good for that/
after the words f aja ' and i avi. f
This debars ? chha. f Thus snruir «JRJ : 'the yellow jasmine called
^^ibwrww
^iffi* 1 * II MV444ljqWt4M<ll! mf$F&l II gy^TRTO *gy I
«rro ii ^i^HiBt^ . *^iW| » ii y ii erarenfrqig fa*i*ii
ijt* II <HI*{|iiiwt4 ^r II j
9- The affix l kha ' comeq in the sense of c good
for that/ after the words ' fttman/ and ' viSvajana ' and after
compounds having the word i bhoga ' as their second term.
This debars ® II In the sfltra, the ^ of stt*^ has not been elided,
indicating that it should not be compounded with the word %*? which would
have been the case otherwise. It therefore follows from this irregular con-
struction of the s&tra, that the word J TPTFPS* does not apply to the words
STnT^C and ftfPR,- but these words are themselves prakpti. Thus srm^+*!r=*
tmw«tf«lML < suitable for ones self the sjof atman, which required to be elided
by VI. 4. 144, is saved by VI ? 4. 169. So also R^^^H*i ' suitable for all men.*
The word f^iR must be a karmadharaya compound, meaning ' ajlmen/ for
the application of this rule; when it is a Tatpurusha or a Bahuvrihi compound,
it will take £. As, ft4*l4Miq fw^ft^Ffapfc 'beneficial for man-kind'
Vdrt: — So also after Karmadharaya Compound <^ft, e. g. ^nrifa%
ptherwise q^npfoni II
Vdrt: — After the Karmadharaya compound *r$5nr, there are the affix-
es *ij.and ^ as, sfcnffo and fuJ^fltbHj ptherwise qfrspfrPU l
Vdrt: — The affix ssj comes always after the word q^ipf whether it
be a Karmadharaya or a Tatpurusha, but not so when it is a Bahuvrihi Com*,
pound. As q^nrcra f^f-HWmr^Ni II In a Bahuvrihi it will be l^npft^: with
p «
Digitized by
Google
Bjc V. Ch. I. § 12 ] «n» . 854
Compounds having Hta as their final term, also take the affix *5f. as,
*PjpfWfa: and fljHHiK U The word *tpt means * body/ But qprft: and fcft**
with tf, when the word %ir does not follow.
Vdrt: — The words ttsr and sjrcrii followed by 'bhoga* take always
the affix ?ar, as, mAl«ffc : and *JHi*HHft«T - » In the case of ^l^lS^HfH:, the
*r is not changed into or (VIII. 4. 2.) The words do not take the affix or when
psed singly. As, trtr f^ara, agranfa f^ 1 *, no affix being employed.
* i4^wivii nrysft 11 \o 11 q^rft u ^- y^rnm , *r-^ II
?i%s 11 ^jwp^w mmre* *i*3t Jwft >rarcp tr& RHfiwidffHPiM^ 1 grernrt* u
^iftl^HLII ^Wf^^T^'NHHLII ^fri***!. II Ji^ll(MR«hKilit!^*t5t^^A TifWWtli
10. The affixes *r and grsr come in the sense of
* good foi; that* after the words ' sarva ' and 'purusha\
This debars * chha '. Thus ?^£r ftffr-ST^. So also ft^nFt W
Vdrt : — The affix m comes optionally after ^t, as, {-tffa*, or m$R M
V&rt : — The affix ¥>r comes after ^q" when the word so formed
means : ' slaughter ', € modification ', ' a crowd \ or ' made by him \ As TF^TOt
spF &c ' marj-slaqghter ', ' a crowd of men', ' human action', 4 made by man 9 ,
e. g. ^H^ift v?q; 'a book written by man' contra. Msufrqr *3T: The Vedas arc
ri on-human \
HI^tR*!?*? JsHT II 11 II q^n% It IPR- -*K4>l>qiH , ^ W
^IrP II *il"N , *li«h^4^|*qt *5TR. *PW *FTfrT <T& RtiRwwf*HM*fa I BHIimU* H
11. The affix ^^ comes in the sense of ' good
for that ', after the words l m&nava \ and * charaka \
This debars ®. As m*mn ffi = HFrtfcPl; So also *m*?m<i II
<f^i fa§&: sr^ 11 1* ll q^r n c f5 *fa-fi*3: , x^dfr N .
*f% ! II U$QVJI4M4iHui, ****** ^R'HWRR f%^!%» I fa$fcPttFJPf s mr<iSR4i|UJ$4iqft w
^mn\ sreTPrffsr jt^wt *ref?t 11
12. After a word being the name of a product,
the above-mentioned affix comes, to denote a thing which is
the primitive that ,is serviceable for that.
The word g$fi^ means € primitive or the material cause of a product \
The word ft$ft means ' the product ' or € modification of such primitive *
f&$ 'serviceable for that' i. e. 'the primitive being serviceable for the product*.
The word ^J shows that the primitive must be serviceable for that parti-
£ij|ar product and nothing else. That is to say, an affix will not come to
V^iOOQle
Digitized by VjOOQ
855 **t* Bk. V. Ch. I. §13 ]
denote any product in general, but only when the primitive is serviceable for
a particular product and nothing else. The word ?r?$ shows also that the
word must be in th* 4th case, when the affix is added. Some /ead the words
9CT fff also into this sfttra. .
Thus srjpwr f^ft qmft *TOlfa-*TffrfNrfir grorft 'wood serviceable
for making charcoal; 9 so also irrertfal preff* € bricks serviceable for making a
wall \ Here VTCT&q and grarrtfa are formed by & V. I, 1. Similarly uf^ 3T$
4 wood serviceable for a spear. 9 , f^^mra : 'cotton plant serviceable for
cotton \
Why do we say tn^fa ' serviceable thereto 9 ? Observe qqpff **FlT* f **T-
«TRT ^FCTS 11 Here there is modification of primitive, but ^gs is the product
also of other things than >*RP such as «rar &c
Why do we say ftg% * 'after a product 9 ? Observe T^CTif: f?T* f there
Is no affix. For f»T- * a well 9 and 9^1 * water 9 do not stand in the relation of
Hfrfa and f?$i% i. e. material cause and effect. As 'water 9 is not the modi-
fication or product of ' the well ', though it is found in the well, and therefore^
the affix is not employed
Why do we say vffi$i 'to denote a primitive*. Observe *reTOT *Kfaft
•a sheath serviceable for a sword '. The sword is a product of iron, but a
sheath is not the primitive of the sword.
By using the words q$r% and fc$ft it is further shown that the pra-
kjiti is liable to modification or vik&ra. /
fftn ii ofwff^r* *r^w5ir *u h«whii<| *wb ft$<r: H^ift^cuVifo^ i 5**irsrar*s h
13. The aflBx ffsr (± ! — *gt) comes, in the sense of
a primitive serviceable for a product, after the words 'chhadis',
'upadhi', and 'bali', denoting the product.
This debars &. " Thus ^jRQuirm ynPT, aftq^l TO m^mrqfBT : M
The affix comes after the word *qfo without changing the sense. *T-
4hw f^JTf^ -wmnc'part of a wheel between the nave and the circumference
or the wheel istelf '• The word sfftifci also means the same. ~~~~
14. The affix say ( +/ — *r) comes, in the sense of a
primitive serviceable for a product, after the words € f ishablja'
and 'up&nah* denoting the products*
\
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V, Ch. I. § 16. ] ** u 856
Thus btKp* TOP, a*hFT*!t: jssp 11 This 'ftya' debars 'chha\ Even when
the primitive is 'leather ^rfr, the affix 'flya' will come after *4H^ irregularly
debarring *T3Tof V. 1. 15. Thus flrhrot^rf II
15. The affix srer (+/ — sr) comes, in the sense of
a primitive serviceable for a product, after a word expressing
the product of leather.
The word ^rv*: in the aphorism is in the genitive case. This «m
debars g. Thus ^5 *rf and *ror ^ a leather serviceable for making a *v4rd-
hra* and VArata' i. e. a leather thong.
Rffif^ Jnrot h^i% i 4Tiummtw3r ^nxnfii^fn 1 tfJrercqremfrffrrar 11
16. The above mentioned affixes come after a
word in the first case in construction, with the force of a geni-
tive or a locative, when the word in the first case' is agent of
the verb 'syat'; — in other words — the above-mentioned affix*
es have also the senses of 'very well sufficient there to* and
'very well sufficient to be made therein*.
The word ^ shows that the word in construction must be in the
1st case, the words 3T*H 'of it' and «rf^ 'in it' show the senses of the
affix, the word *np* 'it can be' qualifies the primitive, the word ffir is for the
sake of distinctness. Thus upm *nqnHM»Mf **T?l-iTnRT#nr fRiP 'the bricks
sufficient to raise a wall'. So also srrertft *T5 W Similarly qreiTftsfa^ TOt(~
S|l4il(l4l ^n 'a place sufficient to make a wall therein*. ijku<{Uu gfo II
The word rar?j being in the Potential Mood ( ftpr f?B£ ) of 9^ • to be,*
has the force of *prm • potentiality, sufficiency • as given in SAtras III. 3.
154 &c. Such as when the large number of bricks makes it possible to raise
a wall, we say inztf* (MIUIlWHiMi Pint II Similarly when the quality ( ipr ) of a
land, such as its area, situation &c, makes it possible to erect a palace therein,
we say, smrnr R»^% wni n
In the examples under this sfitra, there is no modification ( fom ) of
v^ooole
Digitized by VjOOQ
*$} ta« (hK. V. Ck. L § 18
the primitive (sr$ft ) into a product, as was the case under sfitra V. I. 12. The
examples under this stitra show merely the 'adequacy, fitness or sufficiency'
of a thing for a certain purpose. Herein lies the difference between this
sfitra and the previous ones.
The repetition of the word <n£ twice in this sfltra shows the existence
Of this Grammatical maxim : a^cfcf^H sj<44l<f U«Wi OT^ RTHFI? ^W*Fft**
• when the sense ot an affix is more than one, the case in construction to which
the affix must be added must be shown in each case.'
Why there is no affixing in this case : Jftarfr^KTiHI tqni$ The us£
of tflt in the SGtra would prevent this, the force of ffir being that the seculaf
usage must be looked to in forming these derivatives.
17. The affix &£ (4/ — *CT) comes, after tlie word
€ parikhd ' in the above senses of ' this is sufficient for that i f
and ' this is sufficient therein \
This debars GT. Thus <rrft$pft *ft* 'land sufficient to make a ixiott
thereon 1 .
Up to this Stitra Was the governing force of the affixes cr and ^ II
Hereafter another affix will be taught.
^w^fN4*fr$it*!«i* ii
18. Upto Sfttra V. 1. 115 ( excluding that ) the
affix Z$t (+ ; — t* of +/ — *) bears rule.
The affix vs^ governs all the succeeding sfltras upto fft £Fqr f*fft( %tnr f
and has the senses given to it in Sfltras V* I. 37 &c Strictly speaking the
affix x*l governs only upto V. 1. no and not upto 115. Thus in Sfltra 72,
the affix v*± must be read* as qrcTOPft*:, tnrafa^H, «ll»inftw II •""""
^R«w : *n2*«$i$M4Rwr 1 srf>ifiMM«i*ii<shKs ci«mJ«i*tR *f» *nnW ii
srraprej imp* wi<*n#u wtwf 3 *Ak* u
\
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
V
Bk V. Cil 1. 5. 19 ] n^tt 858
19. Upto Sfttra V. 1. 63, inclusive, the affix
( +l — ^ or +1 — %) bears rule, with the exception of the word
< gopuchchha > , or a Numeral, or a word denoting a measure of
capacity.
Strictly speaking v^ governs upto sutra V. 1. 65. The word «n*fe **
made up of stf+srsfcj The force of s*r here is «?PrRnR or inclusive, so that in
the SOtra sffrf} (V. 1. 63) also, the to will be employed The affix s*t debars
*3£ 11 The sense will be the same as given in V. 1. 37 &c the difference be-
tween s^and S3* beirtg in accent only. Thus P>H»m irftfr-^fcli&I* So also
But nrygg^r ^ftfPl^ ^i^^i^ the accent falling on tfc; so also with
words denoting Numbers and Measures, as qfrg^TCL, lhft*WL Stcfq^H. W
The word qffrn? in this sfitrahas its technical signification, and not
its etymological sense. Technically nftmm does not include gtsqr, etymologi-
cally it does. P&ijini has used this word ^rft^ipr in some sfitras in its technical
sense, in others in its etymological sense. Thus in sfltras IV. 1. 22, and V."
i. 19 the technical sense is taken, while in sfltras IV. 3. 156 and V. I. 57 the
etymological sense is meant Technically <rfaror means s^ft m^ or a measure
of capacity, and surface namely length and breadth and height or depth, such
as jtcT &c, Lea cubic measure and a square measure. In this sense it is"
to be distinguished from the measures of length or lineal measure, technically
called sriipiT, such as a fttrtcq 'a cubit' &c, on the one side, and the measures
of weight, technically called 3"iW such as <T«S, &c on the other side. In short
q»HH means a measure of weight or gravity, qfttpr means a measure of
volume or capacity, jrnror means a lineal measure, and a fcw * s beyoud all
these.
*wm% PliM>ii^vi : Hon q^ifa n mw«ft - ftM»iftw ( 3f? )
20. The affix 3^ comes after the words ft*^ &c,
when they are not parts of a compound, the sense of the affix
being that taught in the subsequent stitras upto V. 1. (*$•
The word Bn^hc * s understood in this sfltra also. This tq; debars *xj.
Thus^^H, qrf^L qrfMk 'rtH^T'l H
Why do we say sr*pn% f when not compounds ? Observe ^i*fii|CJh^n
3 «d*AfiMiH» formed by t% (V. I. 18.) Compare VII. 3. 17 by which the Vriddhi
of the second term takes place and not of the first.
Q. Is not the employment of the word smTT% in the Sfltra redun-
dant? For by the maxim nyrerr * nfinffr%*l qfr^PfiVH l fe* "that which cannot
2
_- '■^•=3^
v^oogle
Digitized by VjOOQ
M
859 "*l« [ BK. V. Ch. I. § 21
possibly be anything but a prttipadika, does, contrary to I. I. 72, not denote
that which ends with it, but it denotes only itself ;" the pr&tipadika frsff being
especially mentioned in the sdtra, the rule will apply to the word ft*3i and
not to a word ending with ft^j M
A. The employment of the word mqm<jy in this Sfltra, indicates by
implication (jfi^paka), that in spite of the above maxim, the iftnfffjft* I. 1. 7*
applies in the previous sfltras, while in the subsequent sfltras its does not As
3*rcnf>5r ^ V. 1. 2, the mi applies not only to vfr &c but to words ending in ifr
&c Asirszr* and jprwre, mf<l H«im*i H Not only BTS^srg^fa* V. 1. 4. but
also ^TO=iPL miayfcm M Not only jrhh V. 1. 6. but also *TO?api U
While in the sfltras subsequent to this V. 1. 20, the tadanta-vidhi ap-
plies only to words preceded by a Sankhya and that also in Sfltras upto
V. 1. 115 and not there after as, frmrarEfor . and Vmrm^C V. 1. 72. Even in
this latter case, when an affix is elided by «^ the tadanta vidhi does not
apply. Thus fpnf fpfrm flffcf =» ft Spf + *s^ V. 1 1 8 » ftjrfo *e affix being elid-
ed by V. 1. 28. Now in forming a tertiary derivative from this word TVft^t
the tadanta vidhi will not apply. Thus ft^rqfa «for, here what affix are we to
subjoin? If tadanta-vidhi applied, we get the affix srs^ V. 1. 26 in the alter-
native. But tadanta-vidhi not applying, we get the general affix *** V. I. 8
and have nNffrrera II Here the affix sir is not elided by V. 1. 28, as there is
no Dvigu compounding. The above rule is summarised in the following ishti
The words 1. ft^r, 2. qui, 2. hi*, 4- ^TO*^ and 5. qif belong to fTOTft
class.
ff*n 11 BTrfos^ijRra^s^ 1 ^^*^
21. The affixes 3^ (— ' — **>) and T3C ( — ^) come
in the senses taught upto V. 1. 63 after the word 5RT, when it
is not a part of a compound, and when it does not mean
merely a 'hundred*. —
The word str^l V. 1. 19 is understood here also. These affixes *\
and m debar the affix ^ V. 1. 22. Thus *RTT rfhWL= ^^ or UlttaHl •purchas-
ed for a hundred gold coins*.
Why do we say bhrt 'when not meaning merely 'a hundred*? Observe
Srft sTlmm Wl = JKHK F^WHL'a band whose measure is hundred'. The word *m%
qualifies the sense of the affix, and not that of the base, the latter not being pos-
sible; for the word JKT as a base must always mean *a hundred*. The following
examples will illustrate the meaning ;^ qmm i : < rffrn m*i W M»<W = fTCW'a book con*
\
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Bk. V. CH. I. §. 22] qpttt 863
sisting of hundred Adhyayas\ In this case there is essentially no difference be-
tween the base (prakpti) and the sense of the affix (pratyay&rtha), though there
is apparent difference, for the sake Of applying the affix. For 4lt|«ht is a book
essentially consisting of huhdred: while frsqr 'a carriage purchased for a hundred
coins', does not contain hundred as its essential part Similarly %\H*H l ttt^ht: *a
herd of cows hundred In number*. Here the fjq: essentially consists of *RI and
so there is the affix sjt^ and not ^ or ^ ( V. 1. 58 ). But not so in the case of
^raf OT^RRT, *lfNf OT^TCKT, for here the sense of the affix is formed by the
sentence, and not discovered merely from the word. Hence the following
Vartika WTfaT ^s^q^MJIf^ : I
The word ^ in the sfltra draws in the word srapntl from the previous
sfttra. Thus ft ^r TOT ^=ftOT, fifrRP f 3fl*r=ft*rcra* 'purchased for a hundred
and two coins'. Here the affix is qj^ V. 1. 22. So Pftmqp* II According to the,
Ishti given in the last Sfitra, the tadanta vidhi applies here.
^frf. 11 *mi^R^ i^ra^rar ^M^*di^i *iti4«tU4t*Tqftiv&rat' *rn<l *n3!Hta*fsis5jf stot* 1
22. The affix kan ( _L — *R) comes after a Numer-
al, when it does not end with % or srj, the sense of the affix.
being that taught hereafter upto V. 1. 63,
The word *TT?f?J is to be read into this sfitra also. The word cNffl Is
defined in I. 1. 23. This m^ debars ss^ir Thus ^rf*h 9fo:*-STOi* 9 *£*P #
■l<JW II
Why do we say • when it does not end in ft or *m' ? Observe &Hftq?^
^IM l IUlcW formed by ysi 11 But why 5n%5P is formed by 3FJ and not by *^
or «^, as the word gfrf% also ends in ft ? The word m^i is formed by adding
the affix sft, while the rule applies to the numerals which in their primitive
state end with Rr such as SHfts, srcftft:, firoft &c Here apply the two maxims
»< * fafflqfr HHM<h*q ' a combination of letters capable of expressing a meaning
denotes whenever it is employed in Grammar, that combination of letters in
so far as it possesses that meaning, but it does not denote the same combina-
tion of letters void of a meaning;' and fttfvaro n^ * *U$**y<hW 'when a
term void of Anubandhas is employed in Grammar, it does not denote that
which has an Anubandha attached to it '. Therefore when ft is taken, it does
not mean <jft II
ff^i 11 *w^TTO*ro?m^^f^^ to* qtft *r nr-
23. The affix ' Kan ' coming after a Numeral end-
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
£±xjjs.rta*ao*
Ai.
861 *«***» [ BK. V. CH>I. 5. 2$
ing with sgc, takes optionally the augment %^, the sense of
the affix being those given upto V. 1. 63.
The words ending in *^ are ^qr; see I. 1. 23 : and would consequent-
ly take *pj by V. 1. 22. The present sotra ordains the optional affixing of f*
to this ^11 Thus m^p or OTRraP, *nfiRP or m**- H
24. The affix ^pc ( -£— «my) comes in the senses
taught upto V. 1. 63, after the words * Vinsati ' and ' trinsat ',
when it does not denote a Name : the fit and «?<* of the base
being dropped before this affix.
Thus farfir+^-far+«w (VI. 4. i42).=ftarcrj flra*+*i*-far+*i*
(VI. 4. l43)-r%TOP ■
Whydo we say sn^po* 'when not denoting a Name'? Observe,
im&i., fam? formed by affix 9^ V. 1. 22. Q. Why do you affix ^ when
it is prohibited by the phrase «Tfiro**n*r: ; for ffcrft ends in fir and ft*m ends
»n yt? T he affix ^will be added by dividing the sotra into two: viz: (1)
A*Rift vv qi (2) «3TOarain; the meanings being (i) The affix « Kan ' is added
to vinsati and trinsat; (2) The affix dvun is added to the *ame words, when
not denoting a name.
25 The affix £3^ ( 1 _^) comes in the senses
taught upto V. 1. 63, after the word %*r n
This debars *?*; theanubandha f* of fcs* shows that the feminine of
the word will be formed by #K(1V. 1. 15), the X of fr is for the sake of pro-
nunciation,the*off**i is for accent (VI. 1. 197). Thus «j*fit fern. *M„
VArt -.—So also it must be stated after the word frf; e. g. itfW
.- Vdrf.— So also after the word qnsfnr, e. g. wrf** fem. «nifo.
PPfl 11 Sometimes the word sftj is substituted for mtiwi before this affix
as, iiRrp fem. nRraft M '
\
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Bk. V. Ch. I. §. 28 J «r? u 86a
?f*P n ^■fom«**M<.wiiH.jra* *nt% «nftWfs 1 rqtnrr 11 «r» Siflr »ro9 1
26. The affix *pt (+' — sr) comes optionally ia
the senses taught upto VI. 1. 63, after the word 'gurpa '.
This debars v^ which comes in the alternative. As, «ftnc ;£ftr»fttpi.
orimf^KUM
27. The affix «nff ( + — ar) comes in the senses
taught upto V. 1. 63, after the words ' satamana .', 'vinsati-
ka ', « sahasra ', and ' vasana \
This debars w*i t ^ and ^p^H Thus jRpiPFntfhf - ^nnirt so also Wta*
OT^m and qm*n£U
1TO II
28- The affix having the senses taught upto V.l .63,
is elided by ^^, after a stem beginning with the word adhy-
ardha, and after a Dvigu compound, when it is not a Name.
The word srrtf^ is understood here alsa Thus «TUKNrer% fi$KHj *HH-
£y$%9 fifilfci PTOS* , fir^f* II Here the affixes i?*^ and *rn are elided.
Though in the words ft^fc &c the affix is elided, it is only so when the
affixing of the taddhita occasions a Dvigu compounding (II. i. 51) such as in
IMT ^r>*tf *for-ft^TCUl Here the resultant is a Dvigu compound. But in
forming tertiary derivatives the affix is not elided, as ft^fo frfoi^ ftfrffan H
Hence the following rule: fpTt^i ^Ptxt^m^ 11 See IV. 1. 88, V. 1. 2a II
Why do we say gmgrai* ' when not a Name • ? Observe qrTOtf^K^
or itashtft^ and HN<Mift*1 being names of certain measures. The femi-
nine word m*% is changed into the masculine by the VArtika *nqft qftft
givien under VI. 3. 35.
The word «tur| is a Sahkhy* (See I. 1. 23), and a word beginning with
it will be a Dvigu compound. Its separate mention in this sfltra may appear
superfluous. It is however so mentioned, in order to indicate (jft*paka) that
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
JwL
863 ^-Elision. [ Bk. V. Ch. I. §. 131
this word is not always a SankhyA. Thus for the purposes of the application
of the affix t>«I^H. (V. 4- *7)> this word is not a safikhyi.
fkmrn «friNlquiM<wiyiiH « ^ n **$& n forrer, «r*rw f sr^sir-
m*> ( 5*0 «
ftf^r 11 «rerihpkft*fry ^hi^mm^^wi^-di^i^^win^n form g*H*nfr >
29. The affix having the senses taught up to V*
1. 63 is optionally luk-elided, after the words k&rsh&pa^a,
and sahasra, when they are preceded by adhyardha or are
members of a Dvigu compound.
Thissfltra makes the elision optional, when it was compulsory by
the last sfltra. Thus **«rJN*rifo*r* or sjureNiNfaf 3 !*. fl<*>IWl*i or f^rahft*
qp*, here the affix f^*sj (V. 1. 25) is elided in one case, and not elided in the
other. When it is not elided, srf% may be substituted for ^rt^TTT (V. 1. 25).
So also after the word a?«, e. g. wrefcr?** or gr m^mgW * flOTTO or
ftmqqq II When the affix is not elided, the forms above shown with irregular
Vfiddhi of the second stem, are evolved by sfltra VII. 3. 15.
Vdrt : — The words ig*Fi and ^dHH should also be enumerated. As,
ftHjUH*lH or f|m<mmi N The irregular Vfiddhi of the second term takes
place by VII. 3. 17.
*!• II «iK^i*t/i qt|i«Nt 11
30. The Arhtya-affix (V. 1. 63) is optionally elid-
ed after a Dvigu occasioning compound, of the word nishka,
preceded by dvi and tri.
The word ftift: • a taddhita occasioning a Dvigu compound f of V. I.
28 is to be read into this sOtra. Thus ftprareor fiftfe^ , ftflM^ or fi%ktar-
^(VII. 3 . I7>
Vdrt .-—So also when nishka is preceded by W$ e. g. Ygftre^ or w*V
fefti* II The irregular Vfiddhi of the second term is caused by VII. 3. 17.
fearer Mt« <KCnfr \\ ft*di<^ ( 5*0 »
Oto 11 f ifi^fiiffifr MthK"iidt>^i»firM^iia^iM i ^vTt : Hwiijfanww Ammg'wifil 1
31. The arhiya-affix (V. 1. 37-63) occasioning a
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. I. §. 34 ] nil 864
Dvigu compound, is optionally elided after the word bista,
preceded by dvi or tri.
The word <* in the sfltra draws in the words ftft^jfol II Thus ftf*W*
or fiftferar*, fSrftm or Prcffcras, ^gfaRc*. citato* u
The separation of this sfttra is for the sake of the subsequent sfltra.
Ewfd*hic<a : 11 ^ n *t%fa n firafcrtjrac-w: n
32. The affix kha (£r) comes in the ftrhtya senses
(V. 1. 37-63) after the word vingatika, when preceded by the
word adhyarddha or a Numeral, occasioning a Dvigu.
Thus gr m^ft*ird<tfM* , ftfJUlftctfrm and ftfttifto'fo* » Being especi-
ally ordained, this affix tg is not elided by V. I. 28.
33. The affix Ikan (J. — ^?) comes in the Arhtya
senses (V. 1. 37-63), after the word khari, when preceded by
the word adhyardha or a Numeral occasioning a Dvigu.
Thus sr mjkqi&h* . ftmCUsJ 1
V&rt : — So also after the word fgrifr alone, as onfaplll
Vdrt :— So also after the word ^ifauO, as, WE&STfo#g* ; flftiffciita*,
R*hlfauft*»* H So also when the word is alone : as, qflfcotfa* II
34. The affix yat (4) comes in the &rhiya senses
(V. 1. 37-63), after the words pana, pada, misha and Sata>
when preceded by the word adhyardha, or a Numeral occasion-
ing a Dvigu.
Thus sna^h **. ACT*!?, ftv** so also «ra$qra«, ft<TTO*, ftqi«5 tt
. Here <n* > s not changed into q*, by VI. 3. 53. The substitution enjoined by
VI. 3. 53 takes place when qif means the foot of a living being, while here
it means a measure of capacity. So also gr wufcim* , fiprro*, Prf^, *«>#•
1FC*i flW^W* PRTSWLM
Digitized by y
85s ** v ~ (BK.V. Ch I. §. 3?
35. The affix yat comes optionally after the word
S&ija, in the ftrhtya-senses (V. 1. 63), when it is preceded by
the word adhyardha or a Numeral occasioning a JDvigu.
This debars *u which also comes in the alternative, and is then elided
by V, i. 28. Thus *r m^m^i or *ra&rr>r*, fifan*fi[ or firara^, (TO°iB or
Vdrt : — So also optionally after the word to, as. «RW$*PR1* or °tnr*f
fiW^Ui or # "W» flUM* or TORN
36. The affix aijL (+ — sr) as well as 'yat 1 optionally
also comes after the word fi&ijLa, in the ftrhlya-senses (V. 1.
37-63), when preceded by the words ftc and fk.
The mi comes optionally by the last stitra and is also drawn into this
by the word ^r. Thus we have three forms, ftw^, farTOt an< * flRn% so
also Niqn, Vuro* and pTOT** H
The irregular Vfiddhi of the second term in cases of compounds of
numerals, taught in VII. 3. 15-17, does not however take place in the case of
fjpr, this word being especially excluded from the operation of those rules,
see VII. 3. 17. The Vfiddhi here is regular as taught by the general rule
VII. 2. 117.
rt jwire , w<i Shranw <ffww qqrniifq trwt *hrt m
37. The thirteen affixes taught in V. 1. 18-36,
have the sense of " purchased with this price ", and are added
to a word in the third case in construction.
The thirteen affixes otj, z^ f s^, *J?J, m\ t $5ft f fts^ t «nj, *T*J f iff, fcftt,
i(H and *r* have already been taught Now is taught their sense, and the
case in construction of the word to which they should be added. The %*
shows that the word must be in the 3rd case in construction : and rffar* shows
that the sense is that of ' purchased \ The illustrations have already been
given in the previous sfitras. Some more may be mentioned here. Thus
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
BR. V. CH* I. § 38. ] WIN 866
The affix will come after a word In the 3rd case tn construction when
It means • price/ and the force of the 3rd case is that of 'instrument • (II. 3. 18)
and not that of 'agent' Therefore! there is no affixing in the words Vnrf*
rfW or <nf*HT <*M it
Nor does the affix come after a dual or a plural. Thus tft*Tt**tf rffcr or
iftSfc ^SWr. there is no affixing, as it is not the idiom. But $f*tf ifct-ffo*, fatt,
***&£%$& aft^-trfJ^U * nfirepfr Here there is affixing after a dual and
plural, for the words ffc ft are essentially dual or plural, and in the case
of $*t and hw> those are always used in the plural! for it is not possible to
purchase anything with a single grain of $* or Hf** I
nr» it aftrmrr5ft ^f^wlm
38. The above affixes have further the sense of
11 for its sake y \ when the meaning is a relation or an unwont-
ed appearance.
The word fff^ shows that the word in construction must be in the 6th
case, the word fStfro 'cause or occasion 1 gives the sense of the affix; tr§nr means
•a connection, or relation ': Z*tt%: means • a portend indicative of good or bad
luck.' Thus fRTO ftnrt tmfCTT 44frT*-»mp f a connection with a rich man
forthe sake of getting a hundred.' So also trnN?:, STW II So also *r<K*fif»Kr~
i^iw #^WM a *rnp*> *r£ftPC *T3*n*"the twitching of the right «ye for the
sake of a hundred"!, vindicative of acquiring or losing a hundred, a thous-
and &c
V&rt:— The above affixes come after the words mn, ft^r, and $m m
the senses of allaying or vitiating. As qiRwi ' allaying or vitiation of windy
humour.' So also V^*, <&f«ftPtll
Vdrt:— Also after the word qfcflffiT, as, w fr wm frm II
39. After the word ift and after a word having two
syllables, with the exception of a Numeral, or a Measure of
3
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
IT •• } • - itt ii • ***.- V s *~J-i- J ~l "t -91 'j- .:'r , J -.•- _,-- -„>••- ^^ t_ i ; mJ»< UT_ ;jf_!,il_
867: «r* arid *w B X Bk. V. CM. L § 4*
capacity^ of aSVa &c, the affix yat (*T) is added, in the above
sense of 'a relation or a portent for the purpose of that*.
This debars sw. Asifr l%f*nt OTPT^Tmr^T-'r^: 'a connection or a
portent for the sake of a cow.' So also alter a word of two syllables, as,
•" • . * Why do we say " when not a word denoting a Numeral, or a Measure
of capacity or *p$* &c "? Observe qHTtff fafof- VTO*, ^H^, *l€^; ilrfl*FR*
*m#TO,*nf**r- formed by V. I. 22, 18, 19.
e. l VArt:— The word ggm^q should be enumerated: eg. bu^^^j
ffiW n^pfT OTHT* - gryre i reTC u relationship with a teacher in order to acquire
Prahmavarchasa. w \ 1. r ^ '.
40. After the word putra, the affix chha (^r) also
Monies, as well as yat (;£), in the above sense of *a relation or a
portent for the purpose of that/
The word 3* being a dissyllabic word would always have taken ijh by
the last aphorism. This ordains & also. Thus grctrcftrT ^TT 3*n*ir *T=J*
fHq^ 1 **rn& 11 . „
* . 41. The affixes aij ( + — sr) and aft ( +'• — ar) are
respectively added to the words sarvabhflmi and pjithivi, in
the above mentioned sense of "a connection or a portent for
its purposed .. '
This debars **. Thus ^^tffl»it ^Ml ^ldt ^=qmpy:» so also irffoll
In m$*ta s there is Vjiddhi of both members of the compound by VII. 3. 2a
^n ii *rwf% M^ta^t*^ u$i(ftiA4taMiHiiiw4k ro4k tot fa* fSEn%rfo^ 1
*..•>/*: ^42," To the same bases sarvabhAmi and pjithivi,
are added the same affixes aij. and aft respectively, in the sense
of "lord thereof'.
-> -y Thus *rfg?rtWc. » OT^R 5 'the lord of the whole earth', qTffa: 'the lord
^fthc earth'.; ; -• * . * '. a . .'
\
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
?k.v.ch.l.$ t 4<sT «*r *&
•/' • The word *W, showing, the genitive construction of the base, has been
repeated in this sfttra, though its anuvptti was running into it from V. I, 38;
in order to show that the senses given in V. 1. 38 do not extend further. Had
ITCH not been repeated here, the word f*jr. would have been an attribute, like •
the words fc*r»T and ^qnr, of the word ftlTO H
ftnnf i
43. To the same bases sarvabhtimi and pritfixvl;
being in the 7th case in "construction, are added tile same
affixes a^ and aft respectively, when the sense is that of "knowa
therein". ' '."•-•.. .".""■'" .*•*• /. •< •
word RT^n means ■ known published &c. *r*^fr fW^T:°tfr*>W
whole world. So also qrf^T M .-"..-. f /." **
44 The affix ^hafl (+/— peonies id- the sense oft
f known therein', after the words loka and sarvidoka, in the 7th
case in construction. ■'■•'*•' / r • - "^
The
known in the
t
Thus nr% ftffcr*-8tfa*:, wMh^W » The irregular Vpddhi of botli
members takes place by VII. 3. 2a
45. The above mentioned affixes (V. 1. 18 &c)
come after a word in the sixth case in construction, in tha
sense of 'sown with so much\ ,
The word qr*: means 'sown therein' 1. e. a field. Thus reft* ItV *!*-•
vrffcl^'sown with a Prastha', ffrfoir;, isrffav. i. e. a field sown with a quantltjr
of grain measuring a Prastha or a Drona or a Khlrt ♦ : *
ffir: 11 qreroni g^irewr »nft;ircq *re uwfihPiifc i rfrwH* 1
f ". ^ ^ e a ^ x sb^ban (2—^) comes in tbcj sens?
of /sown with so much 1 , after the word p&tnui \ *
This debars re. The * of 2% is for • accent { VI. 1, 197 ), the £ i? for
^r* (IV. 1. 41). The word qncidenotes a measure of capacity. Thus qnrc^Wjl
«^h%3i^*» fem qiflifo *rw*fiff II . '; " \ . . .'„ i.-.-J
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
I J-JP ' ^ t V—i- T — 1«
, S i _
W9 «(ll BK. V. Ch. I. § 49 ]
!Ppm *rt$f% swWfafttfStfit *H«r5r *wrftf?* to4T *mS g^renrercpffr swift
47. The above mentioned affixes have also the
sense of "an interest, or a rent, or a profit, or a tax, or a bribe
givea thereby or in that".
The affix is added to a word in the first case (a?) in construction. The
sense of the affix is that of a locative (•itenO. The word ?fWr 'is given' in the
singular number joins with each one of the word ^fc, *m &c The sum paid
by a debtor to his creditor over and above the principal, is called $fe or in-
terest The share of profit taken by landlord in villages fcc. is called *m or
rent The increase ever the capital by sale of cloth &c is called i^«r or pro-
fit The share of the king for protection &c. is called 3*^ or tax. The pre-
sent or bribe is called *to « Thus^nf^ffatf «n*^«pft^5^^*w*r
<ft | Rr-4 , *Si J that transaction &c. in which five percent is given as interest, rent,
profit, tax or bribe'. Similarly *nTOt W, tfa*F, 3TW* &c
F<f r/. # — So also in the sense of a Dative. As <brr£r jftrit «n«it *T «nf>
WlTO^rfrtiHSTOit^TOP "Devadatta to whom five percent is given as In-
terest &c". This Vartika may be redundant, if we take the locative as some-
times having the force of dative also. As in the sentence MHIfllflfr *pi U
48. The affix $ian ( i — ^) comes in the same
sense of "an interest, a rent, a profit, a tax or a bribe given
thereby or therein", after a word denoting an ordinal, and
after the word ardha. " _
Thi s debars y^ and ffy^u Thus ftfftfr gfllft<IH< ^-fMtf»y*> gfr»
fi^» *Hrt**, SHft*?:, **fi&r- 1! The word *fi$ is technically the name of qprorfi
49. The affix yat (4r) comes after the word bhftga
in the sense of a an interest^ rent, a profit, a tax or a bribe
givea thereby or therein**
\
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Bk. V.Ch.L§ 51.J v*N 876
By the word ** in the sOtra w% also comes. This debars r^ u Thus
*T«Tt f^lR<R*i<<W^-Hr^ or *nf*TO OT^,; ^FW or ktFt^t farflfc U The word
HPT also denotes ^TOnf U
50. The above mentioned affixes, after the word
HPC preceded by the word ksx &c, have the sense of* who
carries away, or conveys or brings that *".
The case in construction here is accusative (3$. Thus *wnt ftfilr, *ji%
Why do we say "after to" ? Observe W tffc no affixing. Why do
we say "preceded by to &c m . Observe *tf**nt *tf*r, no affixing.
According to another explanation, the phrase Hm^^m?^: is explained
as HTCg^qt TOTIW5. Then the sfltra will mean "the above named affixes come
after ire &c when they denote a load". Thus HTC*^TOT*f?f%~*iftrap f
«tu«f*w» *T?gf$rap II Why do we say "when denoting a load to**? Observe t^t
5<fa II Why do we say after to &c ? Observe H K g fli^ «#$***<% M Both
these explanations are valid and traditional
The word ftf?f means to carry to another place or to steal; ^nr means
to carry on ones back or head, vtrcgnr means to produce or bring.
1 %*, 2 $or, 3 wero, 4 5*, 5 ?pnt, (tg*i), 6 «m, 7 «?^, 8 «r*, 9 **<?*•
10to» u ^rM
51. The affixes than (^ — **>) and kan (-L — v )
come respectively after the words vasna and dravya, in the
second case in construction, in the same sense of l who carries
Thus ^r i*fn **fir ^r-^RP, w*w& n
*n *fa^, ii nw<flR[ il< j m u i u
52. The above-mentioned affixes have also the
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
:*-*• ■■«—««• - *^"«**.t>ir*'- *-tf***+L#mA
87r * n« - ( Bk. V. Ch. I. "5 S4
■ . — ^^^« ' — - ^ T~^ ■ ■ H ill — ^— — i— -^
sense of " what is capable of holding that ; or takes away
that, or cooks that."
The word m * s understood here, showing that the word in construc-
tion to which the affix is to be added should be in the accusative. The word
fbnr means the capacity to hold the exact quantity; «TTOt means 'taking
away, or containing/ Thus srar *pr*fa«infwiP 'a vessel capable of holding
a Prastha measure/ So sre*T*rey*f3 or **n%-Jnffcran 'a vessel or a person that
takes away, holds or cooks a Prastha measure.' Similarly ^TTfW and cnQr^* II
The word SPT* does not govern the word q^rfir, thus ***T ^HlRf HWft- JH^nflf
•Brahman J who cooks a Prastha. 9 .. >
VArt:— The affix *r* % also comes after the word fr* in the sense of
•who cooks that* e. g.^Tq^Hn^^ffpftorftra^t II • •*
v tm^ifii<im^icM?^4d<^iH n M n ifift H *n^i f «ute<s, qnrwc
HfrP n imcQiint fim«i titbit' (MtamHtMlr sssraranf Iprort^rofij w wok iraft •
53. The affix kha(fc) may optionally be added:
in the above sense of ' being capable of holding &c/ after •
the words fl4haka, ftchita, and p&tra.
This tg debars rsr which comes in the alternative. Thus untf fN*fit;
«n**fo <nrnr *r- *n*tfhfr or HTrffiraft, «nf*nfarr or »r iftiRi$ r, qrfNr or qrfttf n
: ' ftftfev II W II q*ri*"« ft*: f Wi^l
^nr : n mM4iifc<rimiftdU i •ii**iPi^wiiiiwiii ftnm ^f^mf^^ ^ to^ *nfifc
64. The affix sh^han ( -L — %$>) as well as the
affix ^ ( 6f ) may optionally come, after the same words
&4h&ka, ftchita, and p&tra, being final of a Dvigu compound,
the sense being that of 4 what can hold, &c. r
The tjj is read into the sfttra by the word ^r of the aphorism These two
affixes 9 and g^ being especially ordained, are not to be elided by V. I. 28.
But when in the alternative, we add the general affix 3TJ, then it^is elided
by V. 1. 28. The ^ of g^ is for accent (VI. ir 19). and the * for #1^11 Thus
we have 3 forms:— :ar*f^fc OT*KFir, or draft; gnfitfMfr, OTTWiRT, SjrPniT. In
this case of 5jrf«mr the feminine is not formed by *fhi (IV. 1. 21) because of the
specific prohibition contained in IV. 1. 22. So also ftmf+uft , rC T Pfom and frmfttl
*f?n n ftmR^r $fe*uiMMii fit**: *prrarf?*nfj g^ii *ror i * nmi<S«i «phto^
\
s
Digitized by VjOOQLC
rBtf V. C». X t 57i] » . « M «73
55. After the word kulija, being the final of a
Dvigu, there is optionally the elision of the above affixes, or
the adding of the affix ^ ( FT ), in the sense of ' what can
hold that &c '
By ^ the affix g^ is also added. The elision being optional, the affix
tf^ V-. i. 1 8 may optionally be elided by V. i. 28. Thus we get four forms:
fc§iW3ufl ( g^)» ft*R**gH l ( iff \ ftgfrUT ( *g jwO A^ftfaO X **0 » In "thfe
last example, there is not vyiddhi of the second term, though it was so re-
quired by* VII. 3. 17. The anomaly is explained by holding that the word
3»rS^r should be included in the exception along with 89T and jipr of VII. 3. 17I
fRfs M\g-f» | JIMHIMHqI<Hhg | !nffff iWTftfW ***% **t% **H WHX^kVWK&nn
M4Tnt M ,
^56. The affixes -taught in V. 1. 18 &c have also
.the sense of ' this is his portion, price or pay/ ,
The ?sr: shows that the case in construction is nominative. The word
Snr means ' share/ ^f means * price,' ^1% means * wages.' Thus q^r inSt wit
m ^m^fer-TERP ' whose portion, price or pay is five.' So CTftP, mw* «
?rtw qftwum 11 <vi 11 tr^rft n &%, 3het, mR«i«i«c h '
57. The affixes V. 1. 18 &c have the sense of
t€ this is its measure."
The word ^ shows that the word in construction should be in the
nominative case. Thus uw Hft*U<wq ==iTTre*ralr nftr: 'a heap whose mass is a
Prastha.' So also OTthp, *T**:, JTfiFiP, mW; tlFTOs ^T^P, *mrm^, *!$€[*•
f^: II So also crfujlftd HRHimHCS-^rfS^, fa<HIHId* : ■ . . -
Why the words ir*W have been repeated in this sfttra, when their
anuvjritti could have been drawn from the last aphorism, the word 3t s TO and
*WB being the same? The repetition shows that the affixes are again ordained,
so that the elision taught in V. 1. 28 does not apply. Thus f q^t ^tfor qftfPt-
TOl-ftTOOTP, ffrsrnfffr3P > ll Here the affix is not elided by V. 1. 28. *
- if^r. 11 inro qfarroftft *3% 1 tiiMMiPm: mf ^MfW^fiHifliMif^wqHiqHitf fSfo
srnrenui *3ft sftfo i**iwi«ifr 11 *r* 11 tPW<frftf%*s**i% 11
. W* II ft\RWOT^^fWWLW , •
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
873 W H [ Bk. V. Ch. I § 59
— ■■ ■ i ii . y . ■■ , ■■■ i • ■ ■ i i ■■■■ ■■ ■■ i ■
58. The affixes V. 1. 18 &c come after a word de-
noting a numeral, in the sense of ''this is its measure/ 1 when
the word so formed means a Name, a Multitude, a Book, or a
fixed way and mode of study.
The phrase h*W qfarr* is understood here. The word in construction
to which the affix is to be added should be in the nominative case. When
it is a Name, the affix does not change the sense of the radical Thus <ta3iTS
-trr* - the Five' as +«raT fT^TO, fiR5T* - the Three '- mHftHHI* M The sense
of the primitive is changed when it means a ^q ' a multitude or flock 9 ; as
4'<rap nm 9 HCT* it So also when it means a g* • a Book \ as, grenMWP qfar*
TO Cro-**** qrfMfa* 'The Ash{aka of P&^ini viz, a Book comprising Eight
Adhy*yas\ So also **i* ^*UHM<UhI , f*T* affiTCrywu il Is not a collection of
'Adhy&yas the same as <jpf ? No, the word ^: is confined to a collection of
living beings only.
The word qrappf means 'study 9 . Its numerical measure (&TOT qffaFr)
means the particular number of times, or ways in which it should be read
Thus STTOTS^P 'what is studied five-times or in five modes' tfH^fop so
also *TCTP or TO W
Vdrti — The affix * comes after the words <H*TT &c, when the word
means a Stoma. As, T^rw l^nr? 4R*il<nH*q»^TOn f^fr*, OTTO* f^ta &c The
indicatory f causes the elision of final (fc) by VI. 4. 143, in the cases of
words like q^rffa: &c In the case of $iw the ajis elided by VI. 4. 14 j.-
Vdrti — The affix firft comes in the Chhandas after words ending in
qntand q^, as, reqftretjpuqr , fafipft *TOTs M
Vdrt : — So also after the word firaft, as fcftpftsfftrep n
59. The following words are anomalous :_ jmfikti
* a verse \ vinSati ' twenty \ tringat € thirty - , chatvAriiiSat
* forty ', panph&Sat l fifty \ shash^hi ' sixty ', saptati ' seven ty f ,
a&iti ' eighty \ navati ' ninty \ and Sata 4 a hundred \
The words ihpi qfr.FC* are understood here also : qfas is formed by
adding Rr to^, the final being elided, meaning 'averse the measure of
which is five*, i. e, a half-quarter consisting of 5 syllables. The word foiftr
is formed by adding fiftnf to the word ft^ which replaces the tVvo word rtt*
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. I $.62) **n *H
VSS* as tr qfa& SRimwi $TO-faffiP ■ So the affix *r* comes after fa*
representing TO?OT< ; so for *ryift **rat we have TOlft^and then add WL K
similarly with q^rttPl II Similarly with the rest
Kote : — All the rest appears to be the conjectural etymology of Patanjali and KAaiki*
K&ri,and hence it is omitted. •
The word qftK also means •aline*. As wwmM<fa »i fflfftaaff Wr«l
Here the sense has no relation to its etymolbgy.
M»^<^*icft ^ ^t It \o it qqift d qs^^nraNpf-^r I
60. The words pafichat and daSat in combination
with varga, may be anomalously so formed, in the sense of.
' this is its measure \
This ordains *r% instead of qj^ V. 1. 22, which also comes In the
alternative. As Tftft, TOffc or TOKFPr f TO^rri II
61. The affix aft (+' — sr) comes after the word
. saptan, in the Chhandas, when the meaning is that of a
Varga.
As si? *JIH1«4^4< II The phrase STW qfoin* is understood here.
^ftr 11 *r*f*i <rftiiuifHtqi 1 ^TfRc Hf^*t 1 ffcw<4ifUi*<&m*3T *r*rnri Rh% ^ sra%
62. The affix <J a ? (t — w) comes after the words
trinSat and chatvarinSat, in the sense of ' this is its measure ',
when it is the Nam 3 denoting a Brahmana-book. i^*
The word *n does not govern this sQtra. The indicatory $ causes
the elision of the last vowel with the consonant that follows it (VI. 4. 143)1
The force of the locative case in utyft is that of srPron and not firTO, I c when
the word means a Brahmana itself. Had the force been that of ftTO» it
would have meant, • in the Brahmana literature \ As f?rwnrap hRhI^Hm!
WTO^nt-^raTRr HTwnPf 'The Brahmana containing thirty Adhy^yas'. So
« mwfUllfl wrgrmfa 11 These being the names of certain Br&hmanas.
crrtfo n w n q^rft I ?ns-*fcfo II <
4
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
\
8/5-* ^HW [ Bk. V. Ch. I. § 67
63. -The affixes V. 1. 18. &c, have also the sense
of 4 who deserves that % , '
The case in construction here is accusative. Thus * for*OTHJnr »^r-
^Crf^n M who deserves the White Umbrella ", So also qwjtPH-*- , %T&* : * tlftm*
^rrf^ft for* IU« II ^r^ 11 STT^w: f ^ni ll
64. After the words ^f &c in the second case in
construction, the above-mentioned affixes hav6 the sense of
u who deserves that under all circumstances' 1 .
Thus Q^ ftum$f<r - &ffar, so also ^rftan 11
i^2^3Stf;4^r f 5^(^*) > 6^ f 7fJrtr # , 8 stout, 9 PnrtN, 10
*&tni # f 11 rciratf, 12 ^vr, 13 &&tt 14 ftiro* 15 ffatf # , 16 STC&*, 17 ftuvr ftqf *BT
(from fopr is formed ^tfjfa? ) f -« "
sfhfcs^nrar 11 %\ 11 M^ift 11 sfr^-^^rrac^rac 1 tf "
65. The affix yat (4) as well as the above affixes y
come after the word Slrshachchheda in the accusative, in the
sense of ' who deserves that under all circumstances'.
Thus firc&? ftnmsra-tffc^, or frre/fc* « The word fat^ is
changed irregularly into *fhf before the affix.
q « mfiyh m n « 11 *r^rfa n ^srf^pr., *r. h
ffH s 1 ftwwnfa Pt^viHii v^rrf^ fitftarcriSWr i&ft«*ft*wi5f *.• iroqt H*fa 1 u£mqi{: 1
66. After the words da^4 a &c in the accusative,
the affix ya comes in the sense of ' who deserves that \
The word Ph* does not govern this sfltra. This m debars if V. x. 19.
Thus W$%**VW. * deserving to be killed \ 33*9: &c.
Iff.2 PP* 3 ii^TO, 4 ^rar, 5 ir4, 61^, 7 Imt, 8 g^* # f 9 ^^, 10 W, 11
jir f 12 s*r, 13 «n*r, 14 tw, 15 *j • n ^ ^
tfote. — The Sidhanta-Kaumndi gives the sAtra as q***rf|*fr 9^; another
version gives the sfttra as ^TTf^ only drawing the affix q«j from the last sAtra.
gg ^^m^n q ?n% i s**ftr,^ (*rac) ii
67. The affix yat (*f ) comes in the sense of • des-
erving thai*, in the Chhandas, after every pr&tipadika*
\
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
BiC V. Ch. I. {. 71 ] " ^ii 876
— 1 . ■! ■ r
This debars *n &c Thus *ftfr ?TO> fa q*5TO : f foif ^:tt See VL
1. 213. * j
,*V 68- The affix ghan (±vt) together with yat (4)
comes in the sense of " deserving that ", after the word p&tra.
This debars z^ and *n u The word qnr denotes measure also. Thus
<TTO$ft«$TI3: or hf*P* M
69. The affix chha (£r) as well as yat (4r) comes in
the sensfe of • deserving that ', after the words kaxjankara and
dakshi^ft. }
This debars ra? \\ Thus qreftuffir ^qrqffii: or ^T^T «one deserving
straw • such as a cow. So also sfiNte or {ft°?ft WW* • a Brahmaga deserving
alms/
4 <wi<flhU*id 11 v9o n q^ifa 1 ^i^fiaidK g-qSr)
70. The affixes chha (%*t) and yat (*r) come in
the sense of ' deserving that/ after the word sth<bila.
This debars ran Thus g qiflfttflqiK i "^ or WTCftfRir: 'rice deserving
the pot ' i. e. cookable rice.
71- The affixes gha (**r) and *«^ { +'— fcr) come
respectively after the words yajfia andj-itvija, in the sense of
1 deserving that.'
This debars s$ 11 Thus wfijgft vr$on € a Brihmaga worthy -of honor
at a sacrifice.* mifft^Ht wjro M
VArt:— After the words yajfia And ptvija, these affixes have also the
sense of "deserving the performance thereof*. Thus i|<H»qUfa -nflrqr'fo: *a
place fit for the performance of sacrifice. 9 qfit*** qrf*ft-«ff^frr g n mm*<ML M
Here ends the governing power of *q? V. 1. 19 : hence forward is the
government of *H V. 1. 18.
Digitized by VjOOQiC
mMarrs*£-v - - <-- e-.-. . wi*k**kS.«aaanaMrt*a^. * • * rf A'*i»**:**A.* *v:
i77 ~, • «**« [ Bk. V. CH. I. §. 75
Li ij. l i i ! _■■ ■ * t i ■ ■■■■ auwiiii
Tfir: i qn3R*ifiMi*lft i nfrftft fts*ru SKFPirfHr fofrtrennNt ^*fl<Afl<»w
72. The affix thafi (f— TR V. 1. 18) comes in the
sense of € who performs this ', after the words p&r&yajta, tur&-
ya$a and ch&ndrftyaijia, being in the 2nd case in construction.
The force of «*§fir ceases. Thus «mraf*W H5Tf 'a pupil, who reads
under a teacher 1 : ftrcraflriSt WW, ^MH*4fl»*MM*fl M The word <mTO*
means a ' teacher ' (to* 4$fRr) i
^rcnnnw. H ^ n *fltf*r n trcPTO^rnw (ssr) n
73. The affix $hafi (+! — rs) comes after the word
saifiaya in the accusative construction, the sense being "fallen
• into this, or thrown into it w .
Thus otwhtop HW^fafali* WTO* M a doubtful pillar M t i. * in a
precarious state.
• ^ftn w «iiMH\iMii fWrarcppfa f ro<ftetf?OT*f *rh«wI *rot% u
74. The affix ^haft comes in the sense of 'who
goes \ after the word yojana in the accusative construction.
Thus iqftnt «i*^-4NPw: n
V&rt :— So also after the words TOTOKT and SnPTCnr As $nivftw t
V&rt : — The affix after these two words means also w who is worthy
to be approached from so far". As i£raw?ft*PH'ltft - fFtarafMit f*Qgu &**•
75. The affix shkan (J — s>) comes in the same
sense of * who goes there , , after the word patha, being in the
2nd case in construction,
Of the affix «*r*, * is for *K (IV. 1. 41), and n for accent (VI. 1. 197).
' Ai ^irt '^yfit" a 5Pnis fern. ifi&H if
3 d by Google „
Digitized
Bk. V. CH. I. §. 78 ] *HH 878
f**fc II
76. The affix na ( + a* ) comes after the word
pantha, which becomes the substitute of pathin, the sense of the
affix being "who always goes*\
The word fH*Q qualifies the sense of the affix. Thus qsqpf fts( irar-
fir -TRT* as qpRft flrei m^r ll Why ftni ? See qfinp 11
77. The affix ss^ comes, after the word 'uttarapatha*
in the third case in construction, in the sense of ' who passes
by that way ' and ' what is conveyed by that way \
The construction of the sfltra shows that the base mu§t be in the 3rd
c^se. The word ^ shows th^t the word q^gf^j 'who passes by that way*
should also be read into the aphorism, Thus ^Miq^iy f- ^MisPHiH, , or
vm*!^ iTOft"*iii)*H4R|Jh! n
Vdrt :— So also after the word q*r preceded by the words *rft np^
VQft> 4NK the affix has the sense of * conveyed by that way ' or 'passing by
that way \ As qiK4*HUt<|: - mRsiRl«*HL, #W n^ft^ qiRsfq^ :, so also ^Tjpf-
<rf*ra?, Wn*<rf5rar, ^T^TTTTfu^, masculine or neuter according as the affix means
conveyed or passing.
Vdrt :— So also after the words «nrra and vqfw as, irenfrrcp i «rofll
Vdrt :— The affix n*i comes after the word fq&wt when the thing
conveyed or brought means honey' or 'pepper*. As roTCTO H&x, WUtvi ifrmi "
ssrarac 11 v^ n M^ift n *»i«mi ( s^ ) i
78. In the following sfttras, the phrase " after a
word denoting time f \ should be supplied to complete the
sense. 1
The word qnnni bears rule in the following aphorisms upto V.1..96
Inclusive. Thus the next sfltra^ftf^ means 'accomplished by means
thereof. We must read the word €f>i<* into it As m%*r ftffi^-iiiiftnrii $c
V^OOQle
Digitized by VjOOQ
879 ** *" 'It Bk. V. Ch I. §. 82
79. The affix $haw (+/_*^) comes after a word
denoting time, being in the third case in construction, in the
sense of " to be accomplished by that time ".
Thus *fi|r fHf^-«Tn^li^ " to be accomplished in a day" i. e. a certain
portion of reading &c, tfttfarftrai*, OTTOfoEg M
cnnStsfr ^ *j<ft *rnfr B^oi q^rft n <mvfl&, *jcr: f *jjr: f *rnft H
ffrfs 11 nPift fijpftarawR3Rn**rf*rT: ^iRi^R^i faster w ?^r *r *u^«iR*wif *pnfafW
vrof^wfil 11
80. The above-affixes come after a word express-
ing time, in the accusative case in construction, in the senses
of " solicited to instruct for such a period, hired for such a
period, which had lasted for such a period, or which will last
so long ".
The word Tvjte means "honorary office " therefore f one solicited ta
teach, but who accepts no pay* III. 3. 161, ^ means "engaged on wages",
33: means 'the time pervaded or occupied by its existence 1 , and iqrffr the same
as last in the future. The word denoting time will be in the second case
by II. 3. 5. Thus iKPnite a| nfe$t?4nTOi:, so a ' so •irthRP^HlRMP *M«h< : i inf-
Q. The solicitation («raTO) and hiring (yivn) only take a short time,
how can these acts extend over a month ?
A. It is not these acts, but their results which extend over a month,
such as, teaching and serving.
81. The affixes yat (L5) and khaft (+'£r) coma
after the word m&sa, in denoting € age '.
This debars t% II The word ^P of the previous sfltra should be read
into this. Thus WJ^J - TO** or w&r* • a month old \
Why do we say when denoting € age f ? Observe qifita* tt
82. The affix yap (5) comes after the word mAsa
when forming a Dvigu compound ; and meaning c age \
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
[Bk. V, Ch. I § 87. ] * H 880
Thus {r m4tt wfipn^r, f**rw w .
83. After the word sha^m&sa, come the affixes
|fy' ijyat (+ — *f) as well as ^ and ssj, ia the sense of € age f .
Thus NI"HIMI : , q°W, and SI U H|R|%« W
84. The affix $han (2 — jqr) comes also after the
word shaigim&sa, when c age * is not meant..
The ^r draws in the affix °«PJ also. Thus VHTftRF or m^HIW> bf* f A
disease lasting six months 9 .
wmi : w. II €\ 11 q^rft n muni :, w.n
^frf: II ?T>¥lKI44«4e4l<l S*fr *T3*tF% I iJIIWVt ffcflF^RWrf^ irffelRwIS W Vl%
85. The affix kha (fc) comes in the fourfold senses
4 of solicited, hired, lasted, and will last, after the word samA.
This debars to II Thus ?EP?mvft£r f ^ ipffr *pft *T - srfbfs II Some say,
the sense of the affix is Ifa Ptfrfr V. I. 79, as SPOT f%^*T: -^ftf* M
fenfcft n ** n q^rft 11 facnt:-^rr ( w ) n
86. The affix kha comes optionally in the senses
taught in V. 1. 76, 80, after the word Samd, forming a Dvigtu
In the alternative y^will also apply. The V&rtika taught in V. I. 20
(HfF^: qw^mMf ^HnHflF* *gfo) applies here also. Thus ftroffc or \?fr
fa^n, RnrcfH 5 or VnHran n
<i^fi^ciciH<»ti II *s H q^ll^r-BTc:-^c^ro^«5r(^r:)«
w ff^n 11 ciPr «t*s *n<*K twH^n f|«T)H^Tiin^^ *r *sn ip*rat **flir • §fr 9%^ *•
87. The affix kha optionally comes in the fivefold
senses (V. 1. 79, 82), after the words r&tri, ahan, and sam-
vatsara, occasioning a Dvigti. .
In the alternative «^ will also come. Thus fftpftop, fUft*ff : # OTfta
VI. 4- 145 or VlflNp, IUta«i()w, rwfaniftar. VJL 3. 15.
^igjtiz ^by.vjQOQ lC.
8Si * u [ Bk. V. Ch. I. $. gi
88. The above affixes kha and \hi ft may also be
elided after a Dvigu ending in varshft*
The affix or as well as *H come in the five fold senses V. I. 79, 80,
after the word *qt forming a Dvigu ; and these two affixes may also be elided
optionally. Thus we have three forms; ftwnt, ft^TT^Rt or ftrofuofts 'a
disease that lasted two years'. Compare VII. 3. 16; but when the sense is
that of nrft, the form will be\rffan 11
89. The affixes meaning accomplished &c V. 1.
79, 80, are necessarily elided after the word varshA forming
a Dvigu, when it refers to a being endowed with reason.
Here the elision is compulsary and not optional as in the last Thus
ftrof *ra?s ' a boy two years old \ Why do we say fcroft M when meaning
endowed with reason " ? Observe ffqrfHt «nfts H
90. The anomalously formed word shash^ik&t h&s
the meaning of " what are matured in six nights "•
The word qfwsP may be said to be formed by adding ^ to qftrrflf
in the 3rd case in construction, then eliding the word tn%, the force of the affix
being 'matured*. Thus tou$f* <ra%-*ft**P - a kind of barley*. It is a name
of barley and therefore does not apply to pulse, beans &c, though they may also
ripen in six days.
91. The affix chha ($r) comes in the Chhandas,
in the fivefold senses taught in V. 1. 79, 80, after a stem end-
ing with vatsara. •
This debars *H II Thus TOsto, WTrenfa* M
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
BkV.Ch.LS.94] *»* 83i
92. The affixes *r (fa) and ^ (fq) come in the
Chhandas in the fivefold senses taught in V. 1. 79, 80, after
the word vatsara, when preceded by sam and pari
Thus Sro(h»n and gqratta*, Mfawfrl * and qftrarffry ■
93. The affix {hail (i'-Hps or q?) comes after a
word denoting time, in the 3rd case in construction, in the
sense of "to be subdued, to be gained or attained, to be"
completed and to be easily completed in that time 91 .
Thus irift°ift*iMi: (*nror 5t£)-*nftrair «nfa*» uiitiafoft *qtN*> iitpr «mu
^YtT: ii ^Rr jrcwrnHtfiiwfl m****} «^itoot tnrfet, tra^roft ftfife agrol *Kmi 3 q
Hf^Rf fWtoW*nfi««hl<WII*H4 mflnft«iii*?<tf<i ^3H^ V^JHSOT **i% WfT^aq ^{<|*iu} n
m* u miHi^iii^t RH^oHi ii m* u *tgi*i mfUiJt fi* faft** ^m: u
*T<> II <WAmm^*m : ii
94. The affix tfiafi comes after a word of time in
the sense of " an abstinence that last? so long" or "who prac-
tises abstinence so long 9 \
The word irq[ shows that the word must be In the accusative case t
ztm shows the force of the affix, V3Fn& joins both. Thus intf flgjq^w
»!Tftr*rTO , nft M who practises abstinence for a month" So also i^nftii,
Another explanation is, the affix {haft comes after a word in the Jirsi
case in construction, when the sense is that of an abstinence which lasts for
.► such a period. As iratst* flJWWl'-'lrflnfc *m4^ M an abstinence lasting for
a month". «n>fafa*, WTOft* H
In the first case the affix relates to a person, in the second, to the vow
itself. Both these explanations are valid, as the structure of the aphorism
is open to both constructions.
Vdrt :— So also after the words i^Rnft &c in the genitive construction.
As nfHTft^.^rw^wr, «nft*i Hfinm
5
Digitized by
Google
.inr.«
88$. *wu Bk. V. Cn. 1. 1 96 }
T4/tf: — After those words, the affix means also Svho practises that*.
(VI. 3. 35 Vart)-infFrfPWs (VI. 4. 144). Hfjnw^ *^ # -, nn ^r^rft* ** «
K<fr/: -The affix reft comes after the words wa^Mha &c, in the
sense of * who practices \ As ararerefoffcrcfa - »44l*K$lnfo Gwafii* « .
• Vdrt :— Tlie affixes qjj^ and ftp* come after the word m^illUufr as
^g^tt l falWfo l gfr^- ^gN*3 l fUl3P or <MU^^lfJA»< W
: Vdrt : — The same affixes come after the words *4g*ilHl &c, the final q
being elided. As *{jHf^ifl ^S*r-*ngpfa*P or M Ignite^ II
Vdrt : — The affix «hej comes after ^g*inr, in the sense, of 'produced there*.
As ^35 *rf%5 wmH - ^UflHlHUft ll It refers to a sacrifice.
Vdrt : — The affix «^ comes, when it is a Name, as, ^jp§ iirJ^ w—
^Tgptf^ SI*>MI*fl M So also snqrtt, Sttnfaft, 4^^ W
cTFT ^ qfeptT WR^pr: II V* II Vtrfk II cTOI, ^^WTy ^Wil^iW:
<^> .■■:.■
95. The affix thafi, comes after a word being the
name of a sacrifice, in the sense of u the fee thereof "•
As srfNefasn ^firfT-^ifauilftyifl* 7i^iRi«A* u^Tfefl 11
The word STP&a in the sfltra implies that the affix comes even after
those sacrifice-denoting words which do not express time (V. I. 78) ; had it
not been used, the sfltra would have applied only to such sacrifice-denoting
words as ?3iT?:, 5RSH?, which are time-denoting words as well. The Vartika
in V. 1. 20 would apply to gTfBT? &c Some texts do not read ^r in the sfltra.
<rsr ^r <?wcl wx% vr^rac HMH M<ift ll erst, ^, <0^^> ^i^^ra^c
96. The affixes having the sense of srer (IV. 3.
53, IV. 3. 11) come after a time-denoting word, in the sense of
" what is given in that, and what is done in that y \
As ifl% H^-llfirefr (IV. 3. 11). This word also means »n% *fN?t and
*n% **& W Similarly ^k^cft*' m?q°* (IV. 3. 17), TOifcrara (IV. 3. 20), TCRPl
(IV. 3. i6),%im(IV. 3. 22), Vraw (IV. 3. 16), VlfcH^ CIV. 3. 21), TO** (IV.
3. 16). All these words mean also what is given or done in those seasons.
The word ^ in *m?j means that all the rules of tnPCT (IV. 3. 53) apply here.
This sfltra should be divided into two parts, one joining with the
previous sOtra, as 3*T <* <faft, ^RCRHW-f as *nfnferf*Kff *?*, i Mfjfo tji t , qi^fq^ q
\
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
V
Bk; V. Ch. I. § 99 J * w^M; - . 8&f
1
So far does the word q*m V. "i. 78, bear rule. Hereafter general affixes
will be taught
TrfWi ii sr*jraa?r sfr^rnft** «H<i*t4H*t i
97- The affix ai> (+ — zt) comes after the words &gp
&c in the 7th case in construction, the sense of "being given
therein or done therein "
Thus^ftw^ra*r«^g£*»^tei* w *
Vdrt :— So also after the words Btffcr?* fcc. As, BTrf^Wl, Vs<S**«
This V&rtika can be dispensed with, as the word btPtTC &c can be included
in the &gg[f% list of words. •
1 «3*, 2 f?n*, 3 R^q qf, 4 iftSFT, 5 «qtfg>nm , 6 #$, 7 «TW* (STTScTW), 8*-
*jto, 9 ^qnr, 10 btRtt*, 11 <ft32r* Wra 3?)* l2 ****' 13 *****' u *Wt 15 <**-. w
?f^r: 1 ?ra% *i<Tflft t5% i%^i% 5tfararem**f wrerci'mstfwmntf wrasfc <rc&
jr*n§t »ro 1
98. The affix or (+ — *r) and^ come respectively
after the words yath&-kath&-cha, and hasta, being in the third
case in construction, having the sense of what is u given or is
done in this way or with this ".• ' . v u ,
The words %zft and qsra apply to both; the rule of «raT554: (I. 3- *°)
not applying to it. The word qm*qrq is an Indeclinable, meaning contempt.
Of course this word cannot take any case-affix, it therefore only gives the
sense of third case. As *WT qWTO <faKT *Rr! 3T=3nn3iVr^; f^f fliRT ^rA *T—
^nr: 11 y t*ii3 i f^rarawc^nf^iP^ *r*jw*4I *ret% 1
99. The affix than (+' — r*0 comes after a word in
the Instrumental case in construction, in the sense of " fitted
for that".. — :
The word cnf^f: means 'suitable, proper, fit*. The word fcqift* U
formed by adding fan* to m% f the force of the affix being that of neces-
sity (III. 3. 170). As chu l ft^ l**! srnf? S&» *|S^g£teft S# 'a face fit for ear-
rings'. qiwiMi^i *rfir<w i. c. qrejjpfcf Mrrp qfNif m . .*
Digitize^ b Y
Google^
-. L..
88$ *^K [ Bk. V. Ch. 1. 1 104
■ ■ ■ ■! . ■ ■ ' ■ ■! I ■ « ■ I - II
«if^rra^B^i q^ it ^-^*i^-*nr>
100. The affix yat (*t) comes in the sense of " be-
ing fitted with that '\ after the words karma and vesha, in the
third-case in construction.
This debars {haft. 3ifar taTO%"»^*4 OT(^, Vfar fcTOSr^^Bfr «!** U
For accent £ee VI. 1. 213,
101 # The affix ^hah (+ / — ©b) comes after the word
sant&pa &c in the dative construction, in the sengfe of " what
is able to effect that ".
The word sprcfct means f able, capable \ The dative here has the force
of ira^Xil. 3. i6> As,cfmTOOT^»«rmf^OTn$3i: u
fWr, 11 ffircni, 12 3w&» 13 tort, 14 ^mm, 15 *Eranr> 16 tftx* 9 17 srare*, 18 fpfrn;
19 «g:, 20 iii?l4HiRL^uR, 21 «reft. «
" *ftnra*i n *o* ii q^fir n *Jtnr^ *rac, ^ n
102. The affix yat (*j) is also added in this sense
of g able to effect that f , after the word yoga.
Thus ifrifTO *PTOTO a 3ra : ° r *nftw* ii
103. The affix ukafl (+/ gns) comes after the word
Karman, in the same sense of € able to effect that V
This debars *jj. As ^fit iprcnr - ?KT§* *3* H This word qffl§3H[ means
always a 'bow*, and is never employed to designate anything else, —
www*q smnM I** « *&&& II *nrr, <rac, wF^ararac ( t^t ) n
^l^Rt^ll
104. The affix %haft (+' — i^r) comes after the word
samaya in the first case in construction, in the sense of " that
has arrived for it f \
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
I
Bk. V. Ch. I. I 109] - **** 886
* — ■
Thus q r nfa4 i 9r4 a< a work for which the time has come 9 .
fr%: 1 <rcro xrmf^i^T^r 1 *ki*iMMi?M *mf ^wrt, *n&Rr m*^^ s^tuwwl vqfit,
105. The affix a$ (+ — vi) comes after the word
jitu, meaning " that has come for it v .
As qgtfinfltsre ^gTrfo 5^5 (Guna by VI. 4. 146) w the flower for which
the season has arrived *.
Vdrt : — So also after the words ctto &c. As iltora^, SlftPIS. U
s^fa ^ « \o$ 11 rprf* 11 g^fa, ^ 1
106. In the Chhandas, the affix ghas (**r) comes
after the word ^g in the same sense of 'season has come for it\
This debars «r*. As sjiRT q iMHtfow M Here there is no Guna by VI.
4. 146, because by s&tra I. 4. 16, ^5 before the affix ^ gets the designation
of q^, hence the guna rule which applies to H (I. 4. 18) does not apply.
*t>l«MCHl II \o\3 || q^Tft II S^WC, *I<* H
fRf: II ^RR^TTO^TRTO *T^ *r*TO mHffi«(RHI^m^[ 1
107. The affix yat (*5r) comes after the word K&la,
in the same sense of l time has come for it \
As ^T^TOirT:, ^Nl *ft* H See VI. I. 213.
vrgk za II \o* n q^iisr^tra^ll
108. The affix thafi (+' — %&) comes after the word
K&la in the first case in construction, in the sense of " long-
standing".
As STf^t *l3fctq - 3fffe5ryr% " long-standing debt H . qsrffoig Vfr " long*
standing enmity ".
In this sfltra Sire and tnTO are understood, but not so thefrord IJTH* U
«fll«MH II ?©^ II <F?ifa II miU«ni (wr) H
109. The affix \hafr (± ! — ^) comes after a word
in the first case in construction in the sense of " that whose
occasion or purpose is this "•
Digitized by VjOOQLC ^
■ hi ■ Mai if .j
JB8J Vii [ Bk. V/Ch. I. $ t\t
PwrtJ: I
110. The affix an (+ — bt) comes in the sense of
/that whose purpose is this', after the words vig&kh&, andasM-
<3M, when the derivative of the first is combined with n**f
and that of the second with ^*¥ n
As qrorcfr i^q^, wtnit **¥* m
V&rt: — So also after the words ^jt &c As ^ST nqiMHMtq ^^frr*,
. fjftn u ^i«*H(iV*i 2 yii34fl%*«PBr: JT^wr >rcnr hs** y^Ti^^^ifHPi^ i *4m4W i
<HfiNiHL II f^r^R^^UIMtiHwitti^Is^i^y^WI'iHL II *T« II ^^fftf^^ «WFIft*ls II
111. The affix Chha ({q) comes in the same sense
of * that whose purpose is this *, after the words aigsra^T &c.
This debars r^ II Thus mgiwtU M«iU«tWl g3 *iaw***fl | Hl t **!PPfol*ll
V&rt : — So also after the derivatives formed by the affix «T5| (5) from
the radicals ft*J, 'to enter*, $c 'to fill', ^ 'to fall', and ^f 'to mount', when pre-
ceded by a word. As t^ft^Fftaq,, JTnSJCflrt^, swrnrfol^, JJTOTfrlfc'tol* 11
V&rt : — The affix u?j comes after the words &*i &c &*i n3i*HMm «
«***, ircr***, *Tr3«** f 3*1***, v*m 11
V&rt : — The affix is elided after the words ^mut^i^H &c. As, s**mf-
15 «r?prrr f 16 q?hpT m —
^TOT q^Hci^^cfq^ici « m II 1^ II ^TPWraC, ^4^M4ldl fa:) II
fprr # . 11 «^im^Mi <l ii^iif4^HH , i44^i , *^5 jto^t hiRt «nw ijiii 44ft *3l<<ft »rf^w^ 1 «^t-
112. The affix Chha comes in the same sense of
€l that whose purpose is this ", after the word sani&pana, when
it has a word in composition preceding it.
■ \
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
< I
Bk. V. Ch. 1. 5 us,] **» 88*
This debars *s* II Thus GFF hh i hA n3l*HHM =»g??* <mw4\*\» , cqRi^r
SPTTnffa? Il The specific mention of the word <ff in the aphorism indicates
that the rule will not apply when a word other than a • pada, * such as the
affix • bahuch/ V. 3. 68. precedes the word Sam&pana.
113. The word ^EFTrf^^ is irregularly formed, in
the sense of a * thief \
The feminine will be in rfq, Thus fj*|Ufi h*&*mwVm«hIV»» fem.
*fit II This word can be regularly formed by *5j, but it will always be res;
tricted to mean a thief. When any other thing is des ! gnated, it will not
take this affix. Thus q^mrt H*ft*WW faw, here there will be no affixing.
The feminine moreover will be in ^^ II Some say the word is formed by
adding the affix *srt with the irregular Vpddhi of the first syllable.
^Tf%^r^i btfctbr[ *>^r 11
114. The word dkalika^ is irregularly formed in
the sense of " what coincides with the beginning and the end
i. e. what lasts only an instant ".
The word srnfin* is substituted for qnn^M. Thus a^l^lP.^: trPlf^
' a thunder lasting for an instant \ gTOKrfSftft ft*i<l " a lightening lasting a twin-
kle ". i. e. whose death is equal to its time of birth or dying as soon as born.
Vdrti — The affixes z\ and zz^ also come after vrraiTt*; as mudfi^i
So far is the governing power of the affix *n V. 1. 18.
eta 35* tor %sfa: 11 \\\ 11 q^rfa 11 ^i, ^-f^r-^^r: R
ff^r: ii W?r ff Riiii^lTiwiHcdii- *fir: s*j§r *reflr ^§r| firor *r*rr **fir ii
115. The affix vati (**?*) comes after a word in
the third case in construction, in the sense of u like that ",
when the meaning is ' similarity of action \ ' .*
As ms&m g^ *$%«HT3m?t, u*rh ii
Why do we say "action"? The affix will not be joined when the
similarity is in 'quality'. As jppR^ *p s "as big as the son", 5%^ 3?* ftjp^ n '
Digitized by
Google
Ji £ -^
889 9T1II [ Bk. V. Ch. I. § 120
116. The affix vati comes also in the sense of
11 like what is therein or thereof.
As H5OTTffa-Hga** 'like that in Mathura'. as qgOT^cffr TOSTO* <n*fi*-
cr^cnu^n ^rf^n?rqr-3Tin(^:)ii
117. The affix vati comes after a word in the
second case in construction, in the sense of "befitting that
or suited to that ".
As ii^HHtfQ -n^Tft WR^ M the protection as befits a king Le.as a king
should protect*. HTSTTOfc «ftafc qtfann tt
^f: 11 *ro*fraiDFC ^nr5r q-H*iMr*wp$r *Rp *wj3i H^fit s^sfir fask 11
118. In the Chhandas, the affix vati is added to
an Upasarga (Preposition), in the sense of a verbal root.
As the word ?f?P a °d RW in the following Rik ( X. 142. 4 ).
15^ f^T «nf& ^B\ Ttftfo TOf^ft3%HT II "When thou O Fire ! goest
burning high (SftT* s »***TPO and low ( Prop -PnninO trees &c
^PT *TI«H^Jd<& II ?^ II milk II cT^T-W^T2- ltt$t II
fRn u «&ft ^hero^nr to i3wRH**f ***rar toSt *ron u
119. The affixes tva (?«r) and tal ( ' a or 31)
come after a word in the sixth case in construction, in the
sense of c< the nature thereof".
As »TOTO TO* — BTO^fnor «T&fTt «it^«| or iftfir II
bit ^ csrrac 11 ^o 11 q^rft 11 3^-^-?^ ( ^-^ ) n
120. From this forward as far as the aphorism V.
1. 136, the affixes r^ and *r» bear rule. ._..
Thus in V. I. 122, <f and 33 are read, giving the forms ^*p*n and
3*piT &c. This rule is intended to secure admission for these two affixes not-
withstanding the bars in the shape of subsequent aphorisms directing the em-
ployment of other affixes. These affixes signify, in addition to TO" (nature),
qjH (action) also, in V. I. 124. The word <? in the aphorism is intended to
secure their admission notwithstanding the affixes tn^and «rat(VI. 1. 87). Thus
ftTCP TO '• ■ §W% qft«nt» Jtftar ' the nature of a female \ jpsnr » j^it, tor^ 11
Digitized by
Goo^lt
bk; v. ch. i. 5. 122 ] or** 890
Tftn ,n re grftfr minima ^^fxnawi* ! *nft ^d<i<H^ftm h
121. The affixes denoting c nature \ taught here-
kJ after, do not come after a Tatpurusha compound formed by the
, negative particle srsr, with the exception of the following: —
chatura, safigata, lavana, va$a, budha, kata, rasa, and lasa.
Thus the words srqftr, «ns and sn^plhl will have two forms only t e.
«nf%^* or *rtftm, m5***or HTqsar, HKHulUwt or *TC»nforar II While by V. 1.
128, other compounds will have irj also, as iNrrer* H An exception to this is
snfafji (VII. 2. 25), as used by the author himself. Why do we say «rR **!*
" a Tatpurusha whose first member is sp^ H ? Observe qnfcqsnfc uniFR** tt
Why do we say • after a Tatpurusha ?' Observe, when the word srqj
is a Bahuvrihi compound meaning to* 1*** sF<r f its derivative will be «nTO*.
So also, uramwu
So also the compounds of *rg* &c, with ^i? r e. g. gTWgq* , mi<J«U<J<i »
btrt^5, *lH*a3, «ni^ f *MI«M*, *nwi*» *n<*OTl u In some texts, there is
* 2jt* instead of -yi II
^f%: u ts **3*irft*F Rifinft*** tnPimm4l *rai«* *r, m *m vxtafasft 11
122. The affix imanich (**TC() comes optionally in
the sense of ' nature thereof \ after the words pjithu &c.
The word *T 'optionally' is employed with the intention of securing
admission for the affixes snw&c. Thus j*fhqfa:»imPfitnom. irfSrer (?3+rn
-TO+toVI. 4. iSS-^+r^V 1 -^ i6i=*rf*TO), orqr^N*by V. 1. 131. So
also sft*ir or *rn^*M The I of^j and 55 is elided by VI, 4/ 155, and C
is substituted for q? by VI. 4. 161. Of course, the affixes ** and 115 come
here also as, s*FS* r $5**?» TQ&i 53FW M
► 1 13, 2 <u, 3 q^, 4 qj, 5 33, 6 1*3, 7 *& 8 sis* 9 «?nj (*TnU), 10 ?*(**),
11 55, 12 *£**, 13 JUT, H *°T, 15 TT, 16 mfa*H , 17'qi^ 1 , 18 $r, 19 qn;
20 *w, 21 1^, 22 ^5, 23 ff**, 24 ft*, 25 ft*, 26 f«r, 27 *&, 28 fipr, 2
HI>30ini* f 31^(!).
qukdifc w *<rac ^r ll m n v^rik li w-*STf^F*r.,*nr «* l
tSwItHfaifa M
6
Digitjzed by VjQO^lg
891 «***« [ bk. y. ch i. 5. 124
123. The affix shyafi (+' — *r) also comes, as well
as imanich, after a word denoting colour, and after the words
dridha &c, in the sense of € nature thereof \
Thus 5J^^| *TFP -*f*TOIS, sftFPF*, g 4<**l, 5PFTOT, W^fir , tf*m* f fTO-
W£» s^itn ; sreo*, fef4*t<(nom. °m\ w^, tWT 11
The ^ of sq^ shows that the feminine is formed by tft* (III. 1. 41).
As *trf*ro: fern, wPreft (VI. 4. 148. and 150).
1 CT, 2 f?*, 3 qftf*, 4 to 5 3TO, 6 ra ('era), 7 ^, 8 g** f 9 «TW
10 5*, (sn^O, 11 a^r, 12 unr, 13 *fhr, w 3*% 15 *nr, 16 wftrc ; 17 qf*nr
18 «n|S» 19 U& 20 g«K, 21 W^TtRfcWH s^m^RTC (BHT is also read The affix shyafi
is added to compounds ending in y&ta &o preceded by vi, as, ftqTCT??;, Pl«U*UHi ft*UPW»
5nn?fc f^re**, fasnror, ftHTffirar,^rrar**, ft*ffsr**, ftHfsr^faHfcPiT.VTOandVtf (V.
1. 131); RdRSSf, R«Htcll, RHf^RT, %VR^andR^K^*, ftflHW, RraTtfaHT, W***) ll
22^r,»rf?tHTOlr:, (The words mati and manas preceded by sam take shyafi, as^i^ft,
OTfirm, &c). 23 si^r. 24 *r*<*, 25 *f*, 26 ir^r, 27 *i?*, 28 fore, 29 w& t 30 *M n
124. The same affix shy an has after a word
expressive of quality, and after Brfthmana &c, the sense of
the activity or occupation of something or some one.
The ^r in the aphorism is employed with the intention of including
m or " nature". The word q& denotes activity, snreq W qrf ^T-siTOTSr so
also wr&T^t IPW^ M
The words *Tf and ^ bear rule upto the end of the chapter. This
class of OT5T*T &c, is Akritigana i. e. the fact of a word belonging to which is
known only from the forms met with in writers of authority.
Vdrt : — The affix does not change the sense in ^ngl^ &c # as ^FTIC
1 sTsm, 2 *nrc,3irrrc,4 9*1*3*^, as*Trt5^5^6^7Bmni* f 8ftrmt
9 BFTOTO, 10 3TO>W, 11 <WiMI«f, 12 ft*T*, 13 &rm, 14 stpptt*, 15 *ms^,
l6**if^, I7*%ftp*, !8^rPr^ f 19 *pnf^, 20 jftfof^
22 OTT, 23 ft^TOT, 24 q^^T, 25 irorer, 26 atfta*/ 27 &&, 28 ^TO. 29
ftyn r 30 fnpr, 31 m&**> 32 $TOt 33 ft^, 34 wrt^l, 35 w&Q, 36 5^w,
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
[BK. V. CH. I § i*8. ] ** » -89a
37 9iTSw, 38 ctspl 39 imfa 40 srf^tfSr, 41 15^, 42 *rar?. 43 flrcrffcr*, 44 Rwh*.
45 frmr* 36 farcr*. 46 ^rawf*** **r$, sm^-s^r. 11 48*rg**wpn*nifir*. «*
*4l<i?U<t49^rrtfta 50 5^1, 51 ^pf, 52 frofir, 53 fTOT^ r 54 fron*, 55 tFTTftr, 56 «rcqftr 9 57
Pr^58f^R 59^,60pRT^,61prq|f^ t 62tra3W, 63 firam 64 ftwtf, 65 f^inr, 66
TOT*, 67 gf^r, 68 #*, 69 ft^r, 70 nf^T, 71 *ro, 72 *ffc*, 73 sro, 74 f^ 75 *WT
|J *P1T, 76 u^, 77 yr: j^p, 78 STORI, 79 TOFT, 80 q^m, 81 *mFSPT, 82 ftǤ*,
83 HiiM, 84 H^Ki'^i r 85 jprrsr, 86 *hu<, 87 srfirfjc, 88 BrfrspT, 89 tM^yy, 90 «rarar*
*PT, 91 HTWT3*, 92 ?vtft 93 *rg$*, 94 <?fcr**r* f 95 ft^q, 96 qri^, 97 ??rcfft,
98 far, 99 jrf^r, 100 m&tfjO, ioi m^*, 102 «nrera?, 103 irffercr, lMjirq*,
105 Sjfa*, 106 SrrePTC II BUS^T* u
wm^ciiq^ 11 \\\ 11 fi^TR n ^irac-^c, 5T^rr., <* n
125. The affix yat (*t) comes in the sense of "na-
ture thereof or action thereof", after the word stena, in the
genitive, and s? is elided before this affix.
As ^pren K*re: 9R ^T-^nr^ll Some divide the sfltra into two %=RT<1
**m> vrefer (2) <rar *ct «m*r as ^rts and ^pi* 11
^p^r: II *^ H qsrrft H *nig:-*r. H
^rfrrcp* 11 fjr^F^f %filr ^rj^pi, ii
126. The affix *r comes in the sense of l nature or
action thereof ', after the word ^f^ N
As CT53* ' friendship \
Vdrt: — So also after the words p and qfa^r, as, J3T3 and qftsq^U
The word srf&nr*w is formed by V. 1. 124, ^f^ belonging to mgOTlft class.
lyrfq^Tc^rg^ 11 ^ 11 q^n% II *fa sitwt:, sr^ B
^frT- ii «nfi*uRi<u*ii»3if wmwJr H^fir ^N^H^HuUii' u
127. The affix dhak ( + — vtf ) comes in the sense
of c nature or action thereof, after the words kapi and jfi&ti.
Thus ^ *rhn *& *T=2Rflrar, 5n%**ll The rule of qqpfriRr (I. 3- 10)
» • does not apply any where under this head.
^^i i fiidif^vqlq* II \\* II q^ifa 11 qg^cr ^iT^diRy r?, m^n
Tfif: ii q*q^i*wfaM fi*itaflifeuR»«i*i qEfrsrerft ^rtTfrrrrerforrofar : 11
128. The affix yak ( + — *f ) comes in the sense of
1 nature or action thereof', after a compound ending with pati,
and after purohita &c.
Digitized by
jQOffle
-893 «m w X Bk. V. Ch. I. §. 130
13 ftrf^FT (tffifcO, 14 hR^t, 15 wfo*?, 16 fit?**, (fitfifcfr). 17 Brerfifc? 18 BrarEras;
( » T5rffrST), 19 qtBnr, 20 sf*R* (I**), 21 Hrf*^, 22 *f*E*? f 23 itffaf, 24 <tf^
(qfaiO, 25 ^Prt, 26 ufircr, 27 Hitf* (*rcPnr), 28 snffcrar*. 29 «f*n?, 30
*tar* f 31 q^ra? (TOTq^r), 22 Hum* *, 33 snrrfoir, 34jjrorc(*raO f 35 5nnt # f
36 *JJT^, 37 qftfti, 38 ftfcWi, 39 irffta, 40 ^RrftR?, 41 $ftF3T, 42 jRf^T, 43 qftq?,
44 HHf^T 9 45 qf§T37, 46 MI^K, 47 qffar, 48 fcrfiqfti, 49 qf^i, 50 Jrf^f, 51 qftft3i 9
52 ^ftcfj, 53 *fc3it 54 tqfi<fi II
^p$t ^^-^i^i^w, ^r^ II
^Rts ii innsrifii*n%*i s miuwR^*^ t^t^r*^? ^i^iR^mh* *iwil *rtnr hi^A-
129. The affix aft ( +^— *r) comes in the sense of
* nature or action thereof, after class names of animals, and
words expressing age, as well as after udg&tfi &c. J
Thus •w^ to* *ot *t-*ito*, ^fog*. c^hkh , %€rt*, sfonp*, tflfSrt* it
i^rf, 2 93^7. 3 nfiwf, 4 irorff, 5 fr$, 6 qtf , 7 *$ (^rf), 8 totto
9 qprHiuN) (ifon^ <rf%imO f 10 gg, u 55, 12 *rt*£, 13 *^, 14 g*m ^ 11 In
the Mantra literature subhaga takes *ny, as 13%%H«TPl; sometimes there is no «n* v
as ^rlraro i^i wr u .
ffrT: ii srwrfais mi3 | <f$4i*3t sprt^^nj jjHRfr *r*fir him^4 u Ti<45is ii
*Tffop* 11 *iFrcf* ww *ro* 11
130. The affix an ( + _*?) comes in the sense of
* nature or action thereof, after compounds ending in Myana,
and after yuvana &c.
Thus fi^RR** nnrs qft *r»ferara*, %?ro**; *Jhrc*, wrftwit
VArt:— The * of vtRri is elided, as vrfciTC* IT*.' qrf ^-*Jhpui
1 3**» 2 fitf**, 3 ft^, 4 «nRTT, 5 j$«rrSr ( JCT STOlflr ), 6 Wf ( HT? ), 7 $-
3=* ( ^Ri ), 8 w* ( TO ), 9 3TJ**, 10 *r*qrg, 1 1 $tfr, 12 g*fc 13 5:5ft, 14 g W
15 5^, 16 gci, 17 5^, 18 g*r?, 19 5^, 20 f^, 21 qffcrntt*, 22 *r«3rerR* f 23
WT?tfST. 24 wfo (%w 3?^r% ), 25 ftfj<*, 26 ^^, 27 Rrjor, 28 f^pr, 29 $g**, 30 fr-
HfT, 31 wfrTOiBTTV, 32^,33^nir,^l ^^r, 35^5^,36(3^,37 3^, 38^-
to, 39 ^wft 40 wr- 11
Digitized by
Google
Bk. V. Ch. I. §. 133] irii 89*
* 131. The affix ag. (+ — zi) comes in the sense of
'nature or action there of, after a stem ending in ^ fc | f % gj
or sg or ?s), when the preceding syllable is prosodially light.
Thus ^ hr- *kh *r=flr«r*, *irc* (sft), *n*rc* (h*t*\ wffcre** (vfcrft)
<?T*fHL(<T3), HI*** (<*3)- Why do we say **3^jrfcl * the preceding syllable being
light'? Observe qr*%FTC , qr^e^ll Why q» | 4HHL from *rf|? The word **r?
takes c^s^as belonging to Brahman Adi class V. I. 124.
N. B. Tlie word anta in the S&tra may will bo dispensed with. The aphorism laghu-
p&rvad ikah will give the same meaning.
ff^r : 11 PnrnflHiHHW ufliwtfMHHj 5P^npn^«iw suj^pffpu *i<hiitam£v4lMH(*
132. The affix vuii (+/ — are*) comes in the sense of
'nature or action there of, after a polysyllabic stem whose
penultimate letter is ^, and whose penultimate syllable ia
prosodially heavy.
The word zfrfiH means the last syllable but one in a word of three
syllables or more. That word whose penultimate syllable is 55 ' heavy \ is
called qvtMli : the qrrer means 'having penutimate <.
Thus uHufcttii from *ipfhj» ^PJ^ft^RT from q^nfa U
Why do we say * the penultimate letter being ^"? Observe mnvf
from fironr u
Why do say q^qfin " the penultimate syllable being heavy" ? Wit-
ness tfXTC* M . .
Vdrt: — Optionally so after the word cr?ni as, MHHH»*i and HT^T^n^CI
The words STHre and *<PTr should be distinguished : the first means
penultimate syllable (implying thereby the word is of more than two syllables),
and the second means penultimate Utter.
5nw$r^i%**s* 11 s*3 11 tr^rft « 5^-*Ffarn$*r:^r (555) H
^Pfp 11 m4i«i4i*3ir *ini<i*ffHrv j^xp^ ?rei% m^^k^H* n
133. The affix vuii comes in the sense of 'nature
or action there of 7 , after a dvandva compound and after the
words manojiia &c.
Pigged by.
G oog le
895 BT « [ BK. V. CH. I. § 67
Thus f t im*wam«*Hf *re *ft «r- ftmwmmifoM, \iwftmmrflwsr, $rar$ft-
OTv,io*flr*, 11 *t, 12^,13 ftsffr(V**0, 14 xvi.is 55^** 16 , n , »3r 5 r. 17
HWp?! 1 , 18 UPOT? ( TPTCPT ), 19 UPr^lTC, 20 gjW, 21 *$*, 22 iTOCTJsr (WWO;
23 ITJ^TW, 241T5CU3W, 25 *TT?*r*. 26 ^RTJ^r, 27 $tf&, 28 •TfrjOT. II
*TOrerc^-*%&3 (551) n
^fip II «Tmif*H*lWlf*HSI WlfawTHK 3*1 'Wfr WRH H$\4i HFRifaitoHiP *«RT-
134. The affix vufi comes in the sense of l nature
or action thereof' after a family-name (Gotra), and after the
Name of a Vedic School, when one boasts thereby, or mani-
fests his contempt thereby, or when it means on3 who has at-
tained that (or has come for an inspection or inquiring thereof).
The word >«mr means boasting; *r**irerre means 'contempt', «fl[ *f^ep
means friror: 'who has gained that 9 , or imjf: - who inquires that'. The word
Wl refers to ifhc and *re* II The word *nrc: means "who has obtained that or
who has known that".
To take first ^mr as irrffarar $3rcftr or n> i u<^i» VMM3 "boasts of belong-
ing to the family of Garga, or the school of Ka^ha". To take umi^hll* , as, mflt-
g>^ i mij>*d, ^lft<ft*um$4?<> "he manifests contempt upon another, because of his
belonging to the clan of Garga or School of Katha". To take ^r as, nfitc-
qspftq-- <MlkM*ft<| :-qre* or *T**nHnti
Why do we say "when it means boasting &c" Observe *f*ifap|, <irmvi
The q of itfs is elided in the above examples by VI. 4. 148 & VI. 4. 151.
^Rp u ftrois? qrfifP*3rcrT^* sefaP«\imifV*w5* H«t«5 *nifir *ui*4«h* «
135. The affix chha (fa) comes in the' sense of
4 nature or action thereof \ after words expressing Hotr&
priests.
Thus »ii^i<n^?€iHL , *>MM^fa^ nmmi*&<fl*w » BHiflflmt m<?M*m»ftA*i>gN
CFl^T^nil ft?wr: is plural to prevent application of I. 1.68. therefore the rule
does not apply to the word-form ' hoti&' derived from 3+*** meaning a |itoij.
\
■■^ M «. '^ -
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
Bk. V. Ch. I. §. 136 ] If h 896
!%•• u *r*rra wi^*i i jw<«umui1*wiPhw ro* *Prt% *rara<fr ; grow? a
136. The affix tva (^r) comes in the sense of ' na-
ture or action thereof', after the word Brahma^, denoting
/ a kind of Hotr& priest.- • • . - • • -
This debars g. Thus B^rnt *ttV *& *T« V9F&H II This debars mr U
When sgi^ means a Brahman, by caste, we have vgroqtor Hgnrr M
So much for the province of the affixes *nj and fpg[ (IV. 1. 87).
Google
-Diflltaed.byA^ , ,
BOOK FIFTH
Chapter Second
ifin u ftftf^ ^HtiRmRRj 1 qprf^fnn^ra* HSltwSNfr K^iPrtft ta^TO^f *rtfor f
1. The affix khafi (+'_fc) comes after the
name of any particular corn, being in genitive case in cons-
truction, in the sense of a place of growing, when that place
is a field.
According to Bohtliftgk, the Sfitra should be thus translated. To a
corn-name is added fc, to express the fields in which the corn grows". Accord-
ing to Ballantyne, it is translated "when we speak of a place for grain, or a
field of it, there may be the affix khafi*.
The word %n*HHi € of grains', shows that the word in construction should
"be in the genitive case. The plural number shows that the affix is not to be
added to the word-form qro, but to words which denote various kinds of
dh&nya (I. i. 63). fCT means 'the place where a thing is produced or grows
Thus gsptf *rc* %h - faShm, 9tRrfNnt, sfowftron
Why do we say "of grains" ? There will be no affixing in a case like
this QQiPfi *wl qiPt •
Why do we say "when It is a field" ? Observe gsnf ht* ^j* 'a gra-
nary where kidney-beans grow*.
2. The affix dhak (+_n$) comes in the above
sense of c a place of growing, when it is a field \ after the
words tftf^ and snfe II
V
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
BkV.Ch.H.§.6) *• *9*
Thus tflftHT «* Wl - afcl*. #m € a field fit for growing tfce\
^frP ii ^nft^n n^*^t *bto% >rofa *rt^ fc% spn^r fspftrot* n
3. The affix yat (tf or -tq 1 ) comes in the same
sense of c a place for growing, it being a field ', after the words
yava, yavaka, and shash^ika.
This debars i5T^L M Thus Wl* ^*^nc-ti«n^ f rofrb *ft**Wl» See
VI. I. 213 for accent
^rs u fin* sr* ^ft * jr *rg fSi%»^ ft*m TOsriir *refa h^ %i% sfiftft s .
4. The affix yat comes, in the sense of / a place
for growing, it being a field 7 optionally after the words tila,
m&sa, umft, bhang£ and a$u. -
The affix khafl will come in the alternative. Thus ?if F3ftor%ft3P(, f a
field for growing sesamum', $rap(, or frffoftt 'a field for growing beans'* Szq^ or
vfrfrpi'a field of linseed', i^ntor WjjflHH/ a field of hemp', *r*Qta or tmm&m
*a field for small grain*.
<h4^Aui: ^f : mjsJMi II *\ II M^lftl II w'-dflui :-^cl>^ra3n' I .
5. The affix kha (£f ) and khafl ( +T— In) come ia
the sense of u wholly made thereof", after the word sarya-
charman.
The word ^ is here a part of the sense of the affix, and joins with the
word $3:, and not with *&{. The compounding is in fact made by the affix.
Thus q%«j*fafr<H ~ ^nffop or qrfoift** "made wholly of leather*
6. The affix kha ( ^V ) comes in the sense of ' a
mirror \ after the words yathamukha, and sanmukha being ia
the 6th case in construction.
The word ^m means that in which something is seen, such as, looking
glass, mirror &c, which reflect things. The word tRTS^r ?s an AvyayfbhAva
compound, the meaning of q*ir being that of likeness II. i,& Thus TOTOfrffa*-
7
Digitized by VjOOQrC"
.. t:~i
899 «« Bk. V.Ch. II. 59J
IMI^H' 'showing or reflecting the likeness of the face' — a mirror, qfa s«re(
T^-«^^N! 'showing or reflecting the whole face' — a looking-glass.
agrafe: Mm^«bAi<tm<I «mtrfir 11 v* n q^ n sn^Enft^, *ift-*nr
. 7.. After the words pathi, anga, karman, patra
or p&tra, preceded by sarva, being in the second case in
• construction, the affix kha (fa) comes in the sense of " what
pervades or fills the whole of that '*. ' '
Thus *RT«T «qWTl%- <M4<flH ' W ; OTfrfNWPT*, «fcrtf<* 5W-, «W*«t*
aim* srotflr n <. n wft « snaq^-srarfo (<**•) i
«fi«Hi^<flwtlVnn y gp *&fo *rf* M
8. The affix kha (fa) comes after the word apra-
pada, in the sense of " reaching thereto ".
The word VK means the 'top of the foof . vn means "upto". «rom Is
an Avyayibhava compound meaning 'to the top of the foot'. Thus sim* WIHIHI
— «TPJ«rfr«P 1** 'doth reaching to the end of the feet', L e. showing the width of
the cloth by comparison with the body.
stf, ^raci-wgwfir-^5 (**•)■ _
^r. 11 *Trcifim* ^*mftft ffrfarOTfrfr «wrtlre* ret msraft ^rc ^~«35 <y v-
9. The affix kha comes after the words anupada,
Barvanna, and ayanaya, being in the second case in construc-
tion, in the senses of ' so bound \ l eating that', and ' to carry
thereto ' respectively. —
Thus »T3T* TOT-»T3«T#!f 'a kind of shoe'; this word is always feminine.
The force of «I5 here is that of 'length* or 'likeness'. That is 'a shoe of the
measure of a foof. So «&m% WTO-«T*rnrMS: > mendicant who eats the
wholefood'. Soalso«uH*T:W*'a chessman or piece that .is taken to the
Lition on the chess called ayanaya'. The word *un^ is compounded of
two words **, meaning 'going from right to left', and WW 'from left to right,
two
\
Digitized by
Googlt
Bk. V. Ch. II. § 1 1. ] *r n 9oa v
and it means a particular position in which the pieces moving from right to
left and left to right cannot move further, and attack the other pieces.
According to some miintf'f is the name of the front pieces in ones own
row of chess-men. A piece which moves only in one side, does not admit
of this affix. The piece which is carried from one side to another, admits of
i\ this affix. Others move only in one direction sri or uro but not both.
Kaiyyata : *rcg qjre q^j qn& i& ^**fir *W 1 *T*fir h«w, 5t f| VJV ITOfaj ^1 MWHH1*
*tonfr. sr tff uuu*i4 5fta%, wrtt^ *««*H *ftaft v BTTOrt *W% ^r u
^4{cit% ( ^r: ) n
10. The affix kha comes in the sense of "who
witnesses or experiences that", after the words parovara,
parampara and putrapautra, in the second case in construction.
The word qfa* is compounded of qt and «m the *fr in tr being irre-
gular, the compounding being caused by the affix. Miinnuv »< 3*431^ =>qrrefoy
"who lives to see high and low". The word q<*4i is compounded of q* and TOR,
the compounding being caused by the affix. As, irfa TOrcNryTfft «^wflqp n
Similarly jprrpfr* H
The word toto is a separate word as well,' not formed by or admitting
this affix. As qfemwu *&& Pniftc W
^NKHKi^rdi^iA nufr ll \\ a q^rfa n «rareqn:-«RqFcr-3i3^r*j
«inft(w:)l
^nrs ir stttotc hhi»<i *m^*in f^i!fr*«& fttftara*i3fcft ipfhStaftnnf w moft Tift u
11. The affix kha comes in the sense of "who
purposes to go", after the words av&rap&ra, atyanta, and
anuk&ma, being in the accusative case in construction. * :
The word npft means 'n ftqft 1 , see III, 3. 3. The genitive case is
prohibited by II. 3. 70 : the word tipft governing the accusative. Thus vnrrait
«rpft«iMqHm{)u|: II
Vdrt; — So also when the words are reversed. As mimflm; 11 So al«
so when the words are taken separately as, vraFtN* and qrfW tt
So also srsref HPft-BW^hP- 1 !* *RH » As •T3*rthP-*ft*iRtni
G oogle
90i «ii [ Bk. V, Ch. II. 5 14
12. The affix kha comes after the word sam&msa-
mam in the sense of * who bears in the womb \
The word fciraar msans ipfr TOsfir € who bears in the womb*. This
verb governs the accusative of time ^fatf by II. 1. 29. Thus *mm fr*ra%
■■ *ini*i4lni *fc> «initt # t)«ii IHf II
VArt :— According to others the aphorism means 'the affix comes in the
sense of to give birth to or to get a young ". i. e. toiraitt « «rWhr* U According
to them, the verb governs the locative : srcraf STORlf ffrsn^- qnUl41«lc; the \ of
the first otto being elided, the rest of the vibhakti(s*PO remaining. The word
will mean M an animal that gives birth to a young one every year*.
Vdrt: — Sometime there is no affixing, but the whole sentence is to be
used to express this meaning, or the 3 only of both members is to be elided
and a sentence formed. As craf CTff ft*iratt or spntf m ft^tPRt •
13. Tne word adyaSvinA is anomalous, meaning
11 a female near delivery ".
The word fcrott is understood here The word «rav¥ means 'im-
minent, near'. It is formed by *r*+^C*+*K, the n being changed to ^ by
VII I. 3. 68. Thus *ra *T *IT *T fTOWT - srotfNr »fr M a cow likely to give birth
to-day or to-morrow w . So also nwv/Nu WIT n
Some do not read ftrcra<t into the sfitra, which then means u The word
adyaivtna is irregularly formed meaning imminent ". As mcptfJH «W8f * im-
minent death \ mipfift fiflfrn* ' separation likely to take place to-day or to-
morrow 9 .
fftr w •im^ln ffifr fwwft i wrr^jonT *n itch *it* sRpuvtm ^*n<wRPi *s* *«c«wl Pfr*
14. The word Agavina is irregularly formed.
This word is formed by adding ^r to the word nt preceded by the
preposition UT, as •Tmt+^-STTWT ll The force of the affix is that of 'a
servant \ A person who is engaged in business till the return of the cows,
Lea day-labourer.
^frl* II «fr: TO? «T5U I «44UUfc4K4M|<{| HUtHU'l' qp JPWt **fa U
15. The affix kha comes after the word anugu in
the sense of ' who is fit to follow*.
\
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
BicV.Ch.JIL § 19] will 90?
Thus the word ST33 means ifp <ro?c H Thus «T33 qnfa 1*51$ ■■ myi<M«
'who is suited or able to follow after the cows' Lea cowherd.
16. The affixes yat (*f) and kha (fa) come after
the word adhvan, in the above sense of ' who is fit or able
to follow*.
Thus sr viH*M«ii*tt agpj^ft^: oriT^ra* 'able to undertake a journey \
By aphorisms VI. 4. 168, 169, the word «rar^ retains its original form before
the affix q and ^c, not losing its final aqr^ which it does before other affixes,
by VI. 4- 144.
17. The affix Chha (fa) also as well as yat and
kha, comes after the word abhyamitra, in the sense of € who
is able to go \
The ^ draws in nn and ^. Thus spqfipr *^«nHr««THjft^: f sretfcRQS
sraf^ftap ' an warrior who valiantly encounters his enemy '" HpiMlfHiW g*|
^bi^^ ^p^ 11 t* 11 ij^r^ II nrsrac, ^nsr, *j*i^f n
w*i% 1 «Il8^**i^d!i^4ifa*hi*wi<f isp ir^wt *wflr w
18. The affix khafi (+ ; — fa) comes after the word
gosh^ha in the sense of * it formerly had been \
The word ifrs is a compound of ifr+ttn' i. e. a cow-pen, it means the
place all around a cow-pen. The word *$$%$ qualifies it Thus «TOT ^W^fc —
trir^HtTO? 'a place which was formerly aGosh{ha'. Otherwise when not
meaning formerly, we have niit *$% II
3T *H&^I^W : || ^ || q^xft || 3TOFT, ^FCTSTIT. ( <B*0 R
19. The affix khafl comes after the word a£va,
in the genitive case in construction, the sense being ' what
is travelled over or traversed in one day \
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
SK>3 cmnrihrii, (BK.V. Ch.H.§m
The word irotW being in the sixth case shows the construction it
should have before the affix. The q^r^tm: means q^f^f it*H% i. e. what is or
can be gone over in one day. Thus «TO$TOT3nHte^»«TOm«, as mcvflmft *r*
%*fti n
c*nfr ft$9^ i wtfr^rtft TfErarftSr. i«53i «wt?iw far ^n^ft^ft" *
20. The word galina and kaupina are anomalous,
when meaning € modest ' and € a shameful action ' respec-
tively
The word «njc means € not proud ', m^ifri , means • unfit to be done*
L e. an infamous act The words come from qpff "a hall " and fpr 'a well 9 .
It is not easy to trace any connection between ' modesty ' and ' a hall \ or
between 'shameful' and € a well'. However some say OTHmreFTO§fir 'who
deserves to enter a haU',«TOfrnt qflmimSld 'who deserves to be thrown
into a well* »3ffHfc:, hence a thing to be concealed, and the dress that con-
ceals it As to<4% *nr*» %rtW ^rt w •
ironiRfNr •iPwii'tw *n!iN*ftR*is $m bhip u
21. The affix khafi comes after the word vr&ta
in the third case in construction, the sense being " who leads
this life, or who lives by this ".
The word jjRf means a multitude or mass composed of various castes,
who have no fixed employment, and live by violence, or by bodily labor. sn%sr
*Jfafif ~anftH : 'a person who lives by the labour of his body, not of his brain 9 .
22. The word sAptapadina is anomalous, when
meaning € friendship '.-
The word snmPT comes from otto? but the connection of senses is
not very clear. It is said craft' iftmnft - qumfrll , M formed by walking to-
gether seven steps or by talking together seven words ". The circumambula-
tion of the Fire by the bride and bridegroom in seven steps makes the raarri-
V
Digitized by Vji^OQlC
| J | L .,.....,. . --,;--. ■ ■■Ill , I _ ■ ^^
Google
Bk. V. Ch. II. 5 25. ] ft* 904
age irrevocable. BTH#t seems to have some connection with that The
word' gnrrtfrP or °% means 'a fiiend 9 also ; the abstract sense being made
applicable by analogy to the person as welL
jftr.-ii iNrfr* Prerera aarer fircft i i jimiCi«hi Rny^» , irei taift tgRTOft w*
23* The word haiyangavina is anomalous, when
it is a Name.
The word VqffiTC means € fresh butter \ The word comes from fT:
• yesterday * and itf € cow '. fir nrfftf* f&RKs € prepared from yesterday's milk*
i. e. " fresh butter "• The affix does not come in the sense of any fccrc in
general. There is no affixing in fSt «lfrfhfW ft«hll when it means ¥*ft*n or
• whey \
fRrs « twtft 'rtWht , ft^nrf|Hp ^rmft^w «wr^rt 4I4iu<u)h441* $*m inr? fSiftr
24. The affixes ku^ap (5*) and jdhach (*T*)
come after the words pilu &c and karna &c respectively,
when the senses are respectively ' the fruiting-season of this*
and ' the root of this V
The word 3*3 shows that the construction must be genitive. The
affix 5^ comes after <ft??rft words, signifying € ripening \ and the affix *inr*
comes after <<|U|?R words signifying the • root \
Thus'ft^iT «rrap-<ftg3pn, JfoSHMw, soalsosrfo ^^^Aw^» *ifir-
^r, li*lte, 12 ^g. 13 to, Ust^j*. n . ~
1 4Vg» 2 ^f^faj C™j)% 3 jpfr, 4 q&t, 5 $*?*, 6 *$*; 7 «TOttr, 8 l!|fH H
25. The affix ti (fo) comes after the word paksha
in the genitive case in construction, in the sense of ' the
root of it '.
The word g?* of the last sfltra is drawn into this aphorism ; and not
the word mm as well. This is an exceptional case of Hjifftf, generally the
whole is drawn and not a portion. Hence arises the following maxim
Digitized by VjOOQIC
90$ «*t<fH [Bk, V^CH. H.§*8
^^tstttyjfi l u Sometimes it also happens that only a part of the words of
a rule which are mutually connected is valid in a subsequent rule, while the
rest ceases to be valid "
Thus qqrcif $*«TORh L e. JTfit^ ' the root or the first day of a Paksha
or a fortnight \
vrp u iRRf 5<afrarepniTR^i f«idiwi*j ^FS^^^^i i«Wi vswt *n*p >
26. The affixes chufichup (3*3) and cha^ap (^w)
come after a word in the third case in construction, in the
sense of € celebrated through this \
The word fro means known, illustrious. Thus ffoqr fing* - R«4l3*3* t
fim«|u|* , %*WP n The initial ^ in these affixes is not f^ (I. 3. 7).
ftwMyjf «imimI srant n ^« n <r^ifa n fe ^M><4iH t ^n^renr n
27. The affixes 5TT and *nsr come respectively after
the words fr and jfsr, in the sense of € not being together V
Thus ft+«ir«fciT 'without •; n^+srni-sfRr 'several '.
iftn •» R^^i^%uHM.^s^wfS^ *ron 1 *UNHfiMiq"q*{i5mjMlwiif jp^ top 11
28. The affixes g&lach ( 5ira ) and fiajikatach
(sfasi) come after the preposition fk, without changing the
sense.
Thus ftii% p^-f^n^> ft^RK^ II Thus these words may apply to a
cow, as f%qmy , Raj*** 11 According to some these words are adjectives mean-
ing 'great, latge' &c There is no connection here of sense of base and the
affix.
%^Rf» 3*?^U V* R M^lPl II ^raC-W-Wp,^, SK^B
fftr- n s* * *t t^ft *** ^r^ ipirSr *refir 1 ^rcft* Ii
^T* II «TtOTW: WfrftS HSJHIHlR^ 4M^*WH*( II
*r«> ii s^ritr «ks^«rf* ii *r* 11 ffcaft q^^^fws 11 m* 11 fipfc irt5pr^d
IT* II U&UI^HI ^?5^ ^pn^H *T* II f^«fil< ^fr%H^U
*t» 11 *ri^r rarffrgr- mwiM n
29. The affix ka^ach (*si) comes after the words
sam, pxa» ud, (and vi).
\
Digitized by VjOOQLC
-..-. — I
bk. v. ch. il $. 31 ] ftfar** 906
■ ■ ... .... _
The ft is read into the sfltra by virtue of the word ^ tt Thus cNi&t»
V**fll, u«f|4H, R^l M
FJr/.- — The affix «W comes after n^rj, ftp*, **n; and njr in denoting
dust thereof. As «Mlg*l tsr- - *T3l*ji*s*, fores** , SfTO**, *ira*H H
PTJrf : — The affix «TO^ comes after the names of animals, in denoting
the places. As «m WR=«TPTtt, «rfWWt*> &c.
VArt : — When a flock is denoted, the affix ^r% is added, as wrft^zqtH
Vdrt : — When spreading is denoted, the affix is mc% % and *lfcf?: II
Vifr/^When a couple is denoted, the affix is fltjn^, as, *w«iia«iH«
Vdrt : — When six is denoted, the affix is q^OTl, as, ff^f^T^L, «r*»
■Trim.*
V&rti — The affix $3^ comes when it means the oil of it As qt*r-
Vdrt: — The affixes m%s and qiftft denote € a field where it grows \
after the words fg &c As miWHl , SjTOreCTL. tgqrfiFT, gflmflrlHL M
Ufa: II «*WIWN<l3STC?.JrSF5t *l*^l *KhlU4 3S*^ N
30. The affix $<£rv< as well as se^ comes after
the word sra R
As m^KHL , «WK?H * downwards ', * very deep \
qjfcr- ii*nrrf*^i^TO*i*nftR^:fc^
*ref*cr $*jnif ft^u
31. The affixes fre^, *tt*% and ^ra come after
the word sw, in the sense of a hooked nose, when the word
so formed is a Name.
Thus Hlfa*w *r*n- *TOte*, or wn^, wwrn II The word signifies
the nose, as well as the person also, as «n&T llfaTO BTOite* I^T •
3fofcHfcl41 II ^ 11 q^Tfr II ^,( M^^ »
fRT ! 11 1% frf^Knn tui^q^tt M^i^iftRi *r 1 Prcr^nrrm^Fn *rcr sPiV^ firnc fWhr*
32. The affixes f^P^ and fotef^ come after the
word fa, in the above sense of a hooked nose, the whole word
being a Name.
8
Digitized by V^OOQlC
90/
•Tr*.« • [BicV.Ch. II. §35"
Thus ftfrntand ftfWsPl" How do you say ftft<l|:ftvn or Plft* TOH?
It is by analogy.
s^ frtffe* fr * n ^ n <nifaiH5r^,fo*^,fcwj,fa*«
33. The affixes *!f^r and fta^ come after the word
ft in the above sense of a hooked nose; and fa^andfcr
are the substitutes of ft before those affixes respectively.
Thusft+fsr«f-f^+i'P»= , P*ER'is; ft+fa^-FT+ft^-faftf "
Vdrt: — So also comes m, and faRR replacing ft, as fH+SR=f*t^+*f
Vdrt:— The affix h comes after the word ffc* In the sense of 'its
eyes 9 ; and Pi^ and fri are substitutes offesf: as, f|^r *TO ^flft-far-, ft**
•blear-eyed'
Vdrt :— 5* is also the substitute. As, g*: II These words apply to
« eye • also, as Fra, fife 3* " sore-eyes." They apply to person alsa
*fir: ii *<? *tf* ffirap^t qMiq^Hi«*n^wMJiHHi» qr Mi5t«**-M«i4l Twfit n
34. The affix tyakan ( .i—srej) comes after the
words upa and adhi, in the sense of * nearness 9 and € eleva*
tion f respectively ; the words so formed being Names.
Thus ypn3fr« q$Hmiq*m! lowland, a land at the foot of the mountain \
•ippq^-^TOWre^lL'a table-land, high-land*. The rule VII. 3. 44 docs not
apply here, so we do not get the forms CTfeftir or trftffepiir •
^f^fs 11 Ff$*n^src*fr%*rf^i3foi**raH4te^^
35. The affix athach (sis) comes after the word
karma in the seventh case in construction, in the sense of
4 employing oneself zealously in it Y
The word *i*: means zealous work. Thus srffa q?*r»q?fe: j^s 'a
clever, proficient person \
Lng i ti^ggpyvjQOQiG
I
'■\<
[Bk. V. cn. n 5 37. ] ntn * 908
^ftr* 11 irfsfli jmHi«Hih^WK*ir?^ ips^f wifil *ro*f w^ VRtUt *nfll n ^ifM
36* The affix itach (^S) comes after the words'
tftraH &c in the first case in construction, in the sense of
* that whereof this is observed * .
Thus nt&fr tfsrmr «TOI «nW:»?mfirt «P* S 'a starry sky\ L c anight in
which stars arc visible, 3f*TOt*pff: * a tree in which flowers have grown \
The srcsnft class is HT$ft«raH
fcftraro. lO^ta, 11 rare, I2inm. i3fr*reH3ppE*, I5qp»^r f 16 33**, 17 95a,
18$gic, 19$^ 20*ror, 21 faqmi , 22 to*, 23?§P¥, 24>it, 25 ftn 26 nt f
27fgw, 28 ^nr,29 firmer, 30 *OT. 31 mi, 32 5,^, 33 srjfreif. 34to9?, 85 frf .
36 ftf, 37 g?s, 38 j:^, 39 4* feu*| ( ^^» ), 40 **, 41 «*nfir f 42 *fcf, 43 w*\ 44 4k-
W # , 45 WW, 46 gtir, 47 ^5F, 48 ***&; ( *F* ), 49 «|5>^to 50 nt, 51 35c, 52 **, 53
^tf, 54 r**, 55 $*r*r, 56 ?r^, 57 ^pj ( g^r ), 58 ^Fcf, 59 5^; 60 irc # , 61 *pr, 62
*faT**T, 63 v*st,64 ^jst*, 65 jqf, 66 ^&, 67 *»&*, 6S ^|^ # , 69 qp*, 70 *F3^f\ 71
*»TC # . 72 «T^3T f 73%**; 74 *$**, 75 ***•, 76 ma**, 77 *<*f , 78 ^$n 79 **^ 80
55!*, 81 irjfK, 82 mm ( *«t ), 83 syfirflr** 1 , 84 Amur ( ftw, w** )•, 85 *<to\ 86 #-
W # , *7 frir, 88 mfonfcft. (nffar- TOTO butftfpft «lp) 89 355T, 90 frar, 91 ^
92 tiFlnf, 93 *Ht, 94 nn:
*f*r- 11 mAm^a 1 nf%<% * mrerofo 3fi tre^tpra^jjPtqpr^tQft nam *i*-
*ri%9** 11 to* 8r tow: u qr» U f|«Tlfi«|il It ^•U^OT^TOW:«
^T* U 4MU<lif3ftfaM: II ^T* II ft^lll lf TOW* II
*r % 11 *<v«uwiif wihjmi^ 1533 m
37. The affixes dvayasach (jft^), daghnach ($tf)
and matrach (iTsr), come in denoting "that whereof this is
the lineal measure " after a word in first case in construction.
The word rRm is understood here. . Thus 3^t K*umwi " <M*fWIH > > Wf-
IT*, ^HNML € as high as the thigh '. So also srrgHHPfr ^ir^fwr^and ^TJ^n^n
As ^^yrergTOH ' water reaching upto the thigh *. According to some the. first
and the second affixes (dvayasa and daghna) come in denoting the measure of
altitudes and depths, and not horizontal measures. The affix nprat comes in
a general sense also. As utqnmi ' a cubit long \
Vdrt: — The affixes denoting lineal measure are elided after words
which are themselves recognised as standards q( measure, Thus wr* H1|uih<*
Digitized b Y „Vj^__ t , . , ^ ^
909 *5*tt [ Bk. V. Ch II. J. 3$
— qpp.'that which is lama (a hand) in length'. Similarly ftfc, fW^T W . The
affix matra only is elided, the other two affixes are never applicable to these
words.
Vdrt: — The elision is invariable after a Dvigu. As ft vfo Himwi
■■ ft*PP# ftfidftrf* II Why do we say u invariable " ? The elision will take
place even where there is doubt It ffft wnrf 11 H IT-ftftffc tt
Vdrt: — The affix ^ comes after a word, when it denotes a stoma; as,
SMWflH; , V*vft <lBr- II The ^causes #ft (IV. i. 15),
Vdrt: — The affix feft comes after words ending in jpjor *m» as <far-
Vdrt:— So also after the word ftqfir, as ftfirersfjpap W
Frfr/.* — The affix hr% comes after words denoting lineal measure,
and mass measure, and after a numeral, even when there is doubt As *PWT-
**, =w lrepra* ssrar *r, ftfernr*, sre*renni» a^HWt, 4^nc*[, tohpw iff: *
An exception to this is contained in the 2nd Vartika, where matra is elided
in Dvigu compounds, owing to the word Pfar being used there.
Vdrt: — The affixes 53^ and inr^come without changing the sense,
diversely after a word ending in 13; as HUVUHi^tPttftHlumwi VJMURWU*
ffri? 11 hiw^, spTPr^ t 1 s^ffep'if iwfrcR*ip*K M^i^mf^^w^iiHwRlf ^w9 s^
38. The affix a$ ( + —ar) also, as well as dvaya-
sach &c, comes after the words purusha and hasti, in the first
case in construction in the sense of ' that whereof this is the
lineal measure \
The phrase iron ipjpr is understood here. By ^r the affixes fW^&c
are drawnln. Thus 3^: Jrerrapf - fte**» S^TOKT*, S5TO*S> SW*m$ dfaw^
Vdrt: — The affix is always elided after a Dvigu. As ftg^JV^, f%3Wfc
nrcrcr, Rnsrer. mw, ra^si, twrentt pw«pu m
^fit: 11 fRW«CT 1 *nn^ : inpira#«n ii0uutituitMi»*iMi5 writ 44<ut«i$ *wfil n
Kdtikd * [ *H\Wi\lv\mw VFTzft I
• ■ \
L.oogle
Digitized by VjOOQ
Bk. V. Ch. II. f. 4» I <%*■ 910
39. The affix vatup (sfj) comes after the'* words
yad, tad, and etad, being in the first case of construction, in
signifying " that where of this is the measure of volume *.
The phrase inw is understood here. As qfr qfimmqw - 3RIH, This
form is thus evolved; iRi+^g^-^r^ (the ti wr^ being replaced by «*r by VI. 3.
90- 1TO& (the 3* being added by V 1 1. 1. 70) - urcptf* (the «? being lengthened
by VI. 4. 41); the vibhakti g being elided by VI. 1. 68, and ^ being eliided by
VIII. 2. 23 we get finally urer*, fiHF*, q<rnm H The qfctra is used in this sfltra,
in order to distinguish it from the word ^Pf used in the last aphorism ( See
V. 1. 19 ). Therefore n<£ m & ipR[ take the affixes 'mfttra' &c also in the sense
of JRPT, which would not have been the case, had qltRpr not been used in the
sfltra, for then the special affix *g^ would have debarred matrach &c in the case
of mi &c: The word ^nj in the k&rikft is the name given to this affix \$r by
the ancient grammarians; so that according to them there was no necessity of
VI. 3. 91 to replace fc of ^ &c, by *rc; thus itit+ros-qroi*
Moreover the affix *g^ being added in the sense of vtffrr*, (capacity )
only after ^ &c, it follows that the words so formed, may take the further
affix «nr^ &c in the additional sense of *ron* (length); which would not have
been the case had the word <rfapr not been used in the sfltra. Thus fl^mHT*
*TO=flreTastns4*rtfc$*l From this m^jwe have nT^iRPfH^^TOf^-mT-
•iii* meaning «mr^[ <Hft**fHI ^pq^ fdfc m^ irorft H
Vdrt:— The affix ^g^ comes in the sense of like this\ after the words
gw^ and *reni in the Chhandas. As wrm* S5TO* *tf flnret 1TW II
40. After the words kim and idam, ^ (**) is substi-
tuted for the f of vatup.
Thus ^T5+^r«^+^ !: (VL3.90)-5+^^(VI. 4. i48)-ftrc*nom.
fa<IK* Similarly fiR[ nom. fqpj 1
few: 4«nmflwft sfa ** u«* II xptffc II ^ ^^^rrafan^^ ^i
rit<pnft*Rp to% *ref?r 1 *MKit4l * *w ^ wwr *riW* u*i% 11
41. The affix 4ati ( «trt with the elision of to ) as
well as the affix vatup comes after the word i%n, in the first
case in construction, in the sense of 'numerical quantity*.
•igitized by
jQOglt
■.-., "*** - "W«Bfl^a
9« *mu [ Bk. V. Ch. II. |. 43
The ^r introduces the affix *g^ which is changed into tjjj^(l*)0 P
The word qgqmfimfr means q*qran qfon* i. e. 4uwmR*tM* f making
estimate by numbers \ As *j fmr <ffcn*r W WW^HT-^lifir WTjrnn or faqWft
KTST'ir 'how many Brahmanas in number do you estimate these 9 . This al-
ways comes in the plural.
This word is formed, in fact, when a question is put relating to the
numerical quantity (sahkhyA-parimAna) of any thing. But the word safe*
khy&~parim4ga may be explained also as a Karmadh&raya, in which the
attributive word has been placed second. It will then mean "quantitative
number H . The sfitra will be rendered thus: " kim takes £ati, when it means a
quantitative number". It should not be objected that numbers are always quan-
titative, and therefore parim&Qa is redundant in the aphorism. For sometimes
numbers are used not to define any quantity but merely to mark contempt
As in the following : —
HfldHlHM^im i *ura«n4lM*flfi«HHL l TORP OTHPff <ITW** * fftfo II Here
the word mmi ? is used indefinitely in a contemptuous sense. Therefore, it is
not true that a number always defines a quantity. Where f%*us used to
express contemptuous number, no affixing takes place : as $NtoT CT53T TOT-
*m II The word parim&na in this sfttra is not used in its technical sense ; as
in Sfltra 39 ante : for its very repetition here shows that it is used here to
denote 'quantity' in general, and not € capacity ', for a number cannot mean
•capacity*.
^fxT? 11 *rc$rcta i wrarar <h<*«^ wirpii JMtSifi tovJ" *ra^ r?t9i ^flrtfir 1
42. The affix tayap (5PT) comes after a numeral,
in the sense of " that whereof the parts are so many ".
The word ^3 is understood here. Thus q^ *TTO3T «TOf-TTO^ 'hav-
ing five parts '• The part being connected with the whole, the force of the
affix is to denote the whole. So also TOcTC*. *nj5*5» **W&ft (VIII. 3. 101 and
IV. 1. 15)
Off m ^ Www iww fiS^p^ , wct ^ s^rf^
43. The affix ayach (*w) is optionally the sub-
stitute of tayap, after words dvi and tri.
As tm*HTre* - H^ or fipw%, *3% or ffim ' a couple ' f a triad* (VI. 4*
148).
The word w* is used in the sAtra to indicate the sth&nin or thing to
be replaced. Had it not been used, the s&tra would have run thus ifflp^im^
m w ayach optionally comes after dvi and tri", Here ayach would have be-
• \ . *
- DigitizegHjrVgjOO^ [Q
Bk.V.Ch. II. 5-4$] ** » f *
come a separate affix, instead of being a mere substitute. Where is the barm
in its being a separate affix ? Then the word TO^or TO will not form their
feminine in ift%; but *m being taken as sthAnivat to *q (I. I. 5<S)» &« a ^ x
rfH which by IV. I. 15, applies to **, applies to «W alsa Thus we have w#
trRt: ll Moreover by I. 1. 33, words ending in tpf are declined as Pronouns
optionally before nominative plural termination. By the rule of sthanivat
Adesa (I. I. 56), the words ending in vm will also be Pronouns. As f% or mr*»
qfa or TO: U The ^ in *nr^is for accent, showing that the substitute *aya*
differs in accent from the sth&nt taya.
vd^i^i^Ti f^ni ll «v* ll ^Tf^ II ^nqc,^TO: f f^mil
43. After the word ubha, ayach is always the
substitute for tayap, having the acute (ud&tta) accent On its
first syllable.
The affix vcb% having indicatory ^ takes the acute accent on the
final syllable (VI. 1. 163), i. e. on q, the special mention of the udAtta in the
• s&tra shows that the accent should be on a syllable which would otherwise
not have taken it i. e. the first syllable L e. *r ; for had this not been the mean-
ing, there was no necessity of using the word udltta in the sfltra.
If W is a SankhyA word (I. 1. 23) in the secular sense, it would have
taken uq^, the present sfitra ordains 91$ instead as a substitute always. If
it is not a Sankhyi, then we should first ordain ip^r after it, by the process
of splitting the sfltra 42 ante into two, thus ^rfjtof ira^» *TOW *TO and then
replace irc^ by «An
Thus wt <fan5rftar *ralt to-*to 11 ^r^nri«in ; *$3p if*** «
<m^ i ifi w* 11
*rei ^wr *rciPw3i ¥» ^wft not inm
45, The affix 4& (*f with the elision of *RC of the
hase), comes after a Numeral ending in dagan, being in the
first case in construction, in the sense of u this is surplus
info".
Thus q^HW «Tf^n *Tfl»HHftr«fFFrol *rir u hundred + eleven w . So also
• wmi *wt it
1
Digitized by ' ^
/doogle--.--'
9U inn [BicV.Ch. II.54;
Why do we say ending in TO* ? Observe t*TI^rt *tR»I* tfir II
Why do we say a ending " ? Observe TOrfow «Tfa* ot H
/jA/i : — This rule applies when both words denote a thing of. the
same denomination. As tpfiror 95rofcprr «tf^RT nfet% SWfa* *flT-tWT*tf «nrf-
TTOtril But not here :— ^k^t m^ »rfw BT^»r* 3 i NfrrTO» H
Islitii— This applies only after wr and *r**, therefore it does not
apply here : — ^^TWrfiOT «raf flraift M
The word ffir in the sfltra is for clearness. The rule applies to W3tf
also, as q^tTOT TOTO** which may mean either (1) fR^tr WMRwiHlRmi or (2)
qWTO 4JWI u 4r^l«tiMftJH M
46. The affix da comes in the sense of u this is
surplus in it", after a Numeral ending in qp% and after
HWlS ; with the elision of srac and *n*r 11
The indicatory ^ causes elision of f? portion VI. 4. 142 &c Thus
finnf^KT BTT?^3%»flnt {ft, tpftf^TO TOT* <H^Nlf<<I ^RT II This rule applies to
abstract Numerals. Hence not here, nifamfcw ^Hh< «!ftl% n
So also after farfit J as fay TOt M
V&rt — So also after compounds ending in fSrofir, as, t z^rffrft WC II This
also applies to pure Numbers. Therefore not here, irt fgrctnrcfiran *\{%{\ «rr tni II
47. The affix maya^ {wi with feminine in *?v$)
comes after a Numeral in denoting a thing given in ex-
change ; in the sense of " containing so many times more of
something " or "the price of a portion of this is so many
equal portion of the other ".
The word m& from V. 2. 36 should be read in this. The sense of the
aphorism is "after a Numeral in the first case in construction (flT), with the
force of a genitive ( IH * q ), comes the affix nq^ 9 when the word in the first case
in construction denotes the value ( HHM ) of a portion (fpr)". The word gar
means ^if or " portion H , and R*iH means •price*. In comparing the quality
of one thing with another, pro* is the value or price. Thus qftFfi It frft Ptara-
* \
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. II. § 48. ] . ** tt 9I *
»K%3figT»Tnrei - fv^^fa t^HlM, "two parts of Yava is the price of one part
Udalvit". Similarly fire**. ««T3*nt f lit. « Udasvit is ft** or ' two-tiroes *
the value of yava ".
The word jptri is in the singular number. The comparison must
therefore be made with one portion of a thing, with the several portions of the
other. The ratio must be jt: I, but never x: 2, or x: 3 &c Therefore the
rule does not apply here, ft *rmr *raref TO **faKP » The x also must be
more than one. The lule therefore does not apply here: q^r wnlr ftlMIU W
The word jpt denotes an integral number, therefore the rule will not
apply to fraction. As fr HT^Ir iWHIHUiJ 3tf*TO* II
The affix also comes in the sense of purchasing or the comparative
value of a thing, i. e. in denoting the thing received in exchange.(f%**) As *f-
•TO^t ft ^rnt fHH*ww *iwrei=fa7rar : f as ftTOf*^35f^s°"V4pM<Sf wctr f%k$t
g mftHiU u lHi ,ararer "the exchange value of Udalvita is twice as much as that of
a Yava ". The word faHH means the thing given in exchange ; and Prii the
thing received in exchange. Both words are reciprocal and are terms of
barter or exchange, but they do not apply to sales or purchases for coins.
Why do we say jpref 'of a portion' ? Observe ft zftffctt PfaHTO&f-
ftjcj: II Here being no comparison of ratios, there is no affixing.
Why do we say Rhh " in denoting the thing given in exchange n ?
Observe, ft j^ $ftwi M*&<tt*~firapt <TO% &* tffaf "one part of oil cooks or
absorbs as much as two parts of milk". Here the sense is that of 'cooking' and
not of purchasing.
In short to? has the meaning of « time or fold \ As ftro " two time * 9
the word qualifying sometime the fgpTPT, sometime the f^ro*; e. g. ftTO3$Rfft
«TCFTT " Udasvit is two-times 01 two-fold of Yava in value ' ; or fyren *nr 7^T<
" two-times Yava are equal to one Udasvit*.
<rw ^r ^ 11 «* 11 q^rf^r n <rw, ^c5r, ^b
^ftr* 11 ti^ft *$tereufaj*FiPrrfaRi sjiRt rR-* i *^i u « f wiiVhm if ^* spiRt wtfa 11
48. The affix dat (ar, causing the elision of the
last vowel with the consonant following it) comes after a
Numeral in the sixth case in construction, when, the sense is
" making full this number ". ' .
That by which a thing is completed is called 55* II Thus l^minl
SJ^P-iFRTOP the "eleventh" (i. e. the one which, added to ten, completes the
eleven). Similarly totop II By this affix, ordinals are formed. The rule
therefore, does not apply to a case like this : — T^TRT gR^HT SJ*fr *** M
w i rdK^Kftd II vfr> 11 <^rfa H H i rdK w*(«wifr : ^ M
ff^f: 11 3frfrT *r% 1 T^RT^n^^jmrf^r: »HMMft«hM« ft* to* *$t »nrnrcr *rcfif m
9
- --.rs**~--'* r ** ; *'*-'
TW^
/
Digitized
by Google
9ij firw [ Bk. V. Ch. II. 1 52
49. The augment ma$ (w) comes before «*, in
the above sense, after a Numeral which ends in ^ when no
other Numeral precedes it.
Thus irW * fifth' (the* completer of the five), snFP II Why do we
say ' ending in n' ? Observe firenr SJ^fir-fW •twentieth*. Why do we say
•not preceded by a Numeral*? Observe q^FHWm ^r*-ipn^n tt
*t$ ^raF^fa II \o i q^Tfir II ^, ^sr, ^fti ■
ff%* u hnk^i^ toi ^r»e^fe faro *w«i$i *ref?r, ^ro^m *rarfa mfifr n
50. The *J<r is the augment of sr^ f in the Chhan-
das, after a Numeral ending in * and not preceded by another ,
numeral : as well as the augment u^fl
Thus vrw. t HTO* or q^rv, STPH II As qtipnnfa T^^nft *nfar and
H»^Hfift | HHWim^lH< H See V. 2.56.
ffrP II «T«c«(3<iTitk ^iiiAH^m RsR u l«kJ I ^3*fif *lr|HH ^iJit^WHI *I* 4<d*H l U | l4l'
*rtftu
qtf%3g*ll *td<*mdHI«ffllc*W«l tt
51. When da$ follows, gar is the augment of the
words shat, kati, katipaya and chatur.
The ^ is to be read into this sfltra, and it should be changed into
locative, as *& f when flat follows H . The word q»uiMil is not a Numeral, it
takes ^ by force of this sfttra. Thus qwirf $p>ir a TO* 'sixth*. ^fa*^ 'the
which in order ?* ^rfaWT * the one in order after several ', ^g^ : 'the fourth *.
Vdrt: — The affixes $■ (%q) and q^come after ^3^ and there is eli-
sion of the first letter. As gfop or jip M
In this and the two following sfltras, the action of the ^ of T^ vanishes
when an augment is added. .
^jPfto^tft fog^ 11 ^ u ^-*£wm-3*re*, ^3^ II
qifai H 314 uta i ^5 g*T «n* &l fui^^T ^f* TOTftjTSnnrtt **(% II
52. When <Jat follows, fa^ is the augment of the
words bahu, pfiga, gana, and sangha.
The word *fk is understood here also. The words ^ir and ^r are
not Numerals ; they take the affix ^ by virtue of this sfltra. Thus w^stf
*Ctfr s "WgfiW : > ^jTfiw^i M^iEto*, and uqftq* tt
f Rt*. 11 ifrnw 1 <m£f* tot ig*rpr% *rcfir 1 *srkh «<wmiqffm ^ffruqlVmHi'iHl
Mtiftii .
,. , -, ,„__
Google __,
Bk. V. Ch. II. S 56] IP^H 9i6
53. When 4»t follows, *g*> is the augment of a
stem ending in vatu.
The word qrf? is understood here also. The words ending in *j are
Numerals (I. 1. 23) : and they will take *^ by V. 2. 48 ; the present sfttra
declares the augment Thus *rarr ^OT-^nRPT, HHRrT, qnnfifa* ■
54. The affix <ffar comes in the sense of ' cQpi-
pleter thereof 1 , after the word dvi.
This debars ^ 11 Thus jsp SjC^-fafN* 'the second* — that which
completes the two.
55. The affix tiya comes in the sense of * com-
pleter thereof, after the word tri ; and there is sampras&raQa
( vocalisation ) of the stem.
The substitution of a vowel for a semi-vowel is sampras4raga (I. 1.
45). Thuspr+^fhi-^+f + ^hl-^t^: (VI. 1. 108, the % of ft assumes the
form of the prior letter q* which is substituted for ^). In $<fa: the q? is not .
lengthened by VI. 4. 2, because that rule applies to the lengthening of the
sj^ letters only, this word being read into VI. 4. 2, by anuvptti from VI. 3.
in. The pratyahara *f\ is formed by the first «r, and means the letters *r,
fand^n
Rmw4ifi^^dM^r^ciu^iH H w B vF&fa n Rnucmfcvi: , au^ f w-
56. After the words vinSati &c, tama^ (<nr fem. in
3?Hj) is optionally the augment of $a%.
This rule falling under the jurisdiction of 3TO, we must read the word
?^ into this sfltra, as the affix to which the augment tresis added. Thus drafts
SCTO-farffnPP or fan •twentieth'. rerffr^ftPW oripRfro:, fefarfopn or Rr-
fap, fJiViiH* or fop, *l*h\\y\H'- Or fqnfrw II
There is no ftuuilft class given in Ga^apatha, These are ordinary
words like farfir, firo* &c The words fvaft, f*TOH &c of V. 1. 59, should not
be taken as the froturft alluded to by this sfltra. For had it been so> we
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
917 *ra*w [BK.V. Ch.IL § 57
could not have formed the words like qqfsfirernrew ; because the rule applying
to fWlr specifically mentioned, will not apply to foro as the end of a com-
pound. As this maxim declares, n^aftCT * nid4R«irl 3nF3ftf^tffe l "that which
cannot possibly be anything but a Pratipadika, does, contrary /to I. I. 72 ;
not denote that which ends with it, but it denotes only itself". This being
the case, the word ft^n% &c must be taken in their popular signification, and
not as particular pr&tipadikas ; and hence also becomes valid the exception
given in V. 2. 58, in the case of qfir &c when preceded by another numeral. For
the very prohibition mq'mfr; in that rule, shows, that with the exception of
Sfe &c, the present rule applies to other gftgqrn words, as, tpfrffaft &c
Bohtlingk takes n* , qe and 31^ as separate affixes and not as aug-
ment He says " The commentators take frl^ here and in the following
Stitras as an Augment of ** (V. 2. 48), because fk^fttt &c with the affix qtf^
would yield HwfddH by III. 1. 3, whilst otherwise it would be accented as
flqfc q fl 11 According to this interpretation ** V. 2. 49 and *i^ V. 2. 50 arc
Augments, though they would yield the right form as affixes also. That
P&^ini by forms **, *rct and tt? so much resembling **, should not have
meant an affix, is not probable Moreover one does not understand well this,
why he, if he intended that n, tj and tpi should be taken as augments, does
not, for the sake of clearness, ordain this after the stem, which could have been
expressed by adding of the servile $ (i. e. 55, tp? and sg^), as he does in
the case of the augments g?$ V. 2. 51, firg^ V. 2. 52 and |*j^ V. 2. 53. I also
think this, that P&nini, when he designated this affix ffii*, did not think of
the accent"
In the case of ^ and q^ there will be no difference whatever whether
we take them as affixes or as augments. Thus q^+HX^^+^CVI. 4. 144)
fast iidii%*u«i^wd«MHii*i » V» w *%tft » foro, *rari%i w-
57. Always after the words fiata &c, and after
masa, ardha-m&sa, and sam-vatsar; tama$ is the augment
of4a$.
The words TCTTTO are numerals. The words mq &c, are not numerals ;
they would not have taken ^a> but by the implication of this sfltra. Thus
TOTC* *jrc«TOW 'hundreth'; q^kpt*, HWfl 5 II Similarly IRK* ^JCT — HfCRf^T
ffTO* * the last day of the month '. stctokWi gTCTOiyr M . . v -
\
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
BicV.Ch. II. § ii. ] *t*n 9*8
By the next Sutra V. 2. 58, the words jrt &c, would also have taken
fPK.; but the scope of that sOtra is confined to numerals not preceded by
another numeral. There is no such restriction here. Hence we have <^TCW-
58. After the words shashti &c, when no other
Numeral precedes them ; tania$ is always the .augment of
By stitra V. 2. 56, the augment was optional, this makes it com-
pulsary. Thus TOOT : t OTTfinW 41
Why do we say " when not preceded by a Numeral " ? Observe, y$HV
k^Ht&H ^, t protPi : or iH><HHfa*W N Here V. 2. 56, applies also.
59. When a Siikta or a S&man is to be expressed,
the affix Chha (jq) comes after a pratipadika (nominal-stem),
in the sense of the affix matup (V. 2. 94)*
The word H$t means * in the sense of h$x affix '. . The sense of 113*
is M whose is it or in whom it is n . Thus m^im* WII^IH^ H^dHI^ S A\ q^CTH
fiMUVfl^Hlt ^kU^kfl^HLSPT, ^TORfaWLSPl M
The affix comes after a collocation of words, as srerertW * the Sflkta
containing the words «rci *T*r' e. g. Rig Veda Mandala I. sOkta 164. Here
the words «TFJ ^W are considered as a Nominal Stem. So also qraflffftmi i
ffrT: II qfrft%$Y I <m4'4*I*IM BW 5^ *T*fir. *T^IAI£il*qi<fa>iTOir: II
60. When an Adhy&ya or an Anuvaka is to be
expressed, there is luk-elision of the affix Chha having the
above sense of matup.
This sfltra indicates by implication fam^: ), that the affix fj comes
after a nominal stem, to denote an Adhy&ya or an Anuvaka. According to
Patanjali the elision is optional. Thus irf^TTT re frsfemfe f - «l%*ti M JimiH *» tij-
^t *T II In the alternative, «i)wJta* ; so also {KhMto or {Hirftaffc* *f?W-
«P*5 or MfocHri*4|l|* N
*J*p ii «mrfaarc, n mnuiii4i4ira a ** 1 f%5*f>rf*** mKmR3»* » s* to* **flr to*,
Digitized by VjOOQ
*• I iU
919 *i*ll [ Bk. V.CH. II.| 64
61. The affix a^t (+ — zt) comes in the sense of
matup, when an Adhyaya or an Anuv&ka is to be expressed,
after the words viniukta &c.
Thus ftSrirasgsfciafcT ~VFFRrswu$li»i«u<w *r 11 -So also Vngt* &c.
1 fag**, 2%*rg*, 3 sifrsgc 4 *tot, 5s**(3^),6 , rffcrreii (tRto^!) 7
*TTO*. 8 *g, 9 *$*( TO^H), 10 <nft** f 11 ^*Pt 12 itfhtfT ( *#**), 13 *sr?fc 14
*kvC> 15 tot*, 16 tot!, 17 tos ( totstu^ ), 18 m*fa, 19 <mf*p*( <rof*c ), 20 irft-
*t, 21 STSIS3T, 22 ^THTOT, 23 f*T, 24 *mnfwj ( M*), 25 *fcft , 26 ?m ( ^r?fiT ),
27 ppft, 28^29 f3 # M
tUjqiW N
62. After the nominal stems goshada &c, there
is the affix vun"(2 — are>), in the sense of matup, when an
Adhy&ya or an Anuv&ka is to be expressed.
Thus «Tis^Ciywtff^=/nM<*i^i4i^i*i qr u ^tro s f inrfaro* &c.
Another reading is ift^ the final consonant being mute.
1 'far ( ^r? ),2f^r^r(^) l 3 qnTft*?^, 4$*^ **r, s^^ta**:, * &fit s**ir,
*&3', 7 *tf (Vf ) fir* flrar ( flm), 8 wtf^r, 9 jpsipt, 10 stssr, ll ***, 12 1^, 13
«OT3 ( CTPf ). 14 *wfafo 15 TOTC*%. 16 $*jp? f 17 fWfPT. 18 TOK (!). *
cT?r $%i<4: to: ll 5\ n M<iP* II cTh, s^rar., «nr:, ( 5^ ), n
fRr: u sfiraw 1 sreflr sirft swfcqf^ wr$w f^iferotf 3^1* *nfir w
63. The affix vun comes, after the word pathin,
being in the seventh case in construction, when the sense is
" versed therein or skilled therein *\
Thus qn£$TO , -» , nrap (qpPt+K-q^+f^ VI.4.i44«*n+¥T^ VII.i.i.),
*UV41kvt. TOC II V* B M^lft B ^i^mI^vi:, qjqc I
fnr 11 *r%3t*, 5^ ffi* ^ 1 «rrwf^i: JTrfittR^w CTritoftHp $*n* gSKrffrnri f ^
sipnir *wfa u
64. The affix kan (L — q>) comes in the sense of
1 versed therein, skilled therein ', after the nominal stems
akarsha &c, being in the seventh case in construction.
Thus 3TRft$TO:-»sn3ifo*,f533i:. Another reading has «n*HT (Bohtlingk)
1 »ii«n4 ( •h«hh ) f 2 sets, 3 ft*mr ( frqrar ), 4 ft^r, 5 «raft, 6 «rc*n*, 7 f^-
^(f^),8^«c,9f^V0mll*TO,12TO,13TO(f^^ 15 If,
16 m 17 jrf , 18 mw. 19 *r$f%, 20 tr*. 11
Digitized by
Bk V. Ch. II. |. 68 ] m* 920
65. Tlie affix kan comes, after the words dhana
and hiranya, being in 7th case in construction, in the sense of
* a desire thereafter \ %
The word Sire means ' desire, wish \ Thus ^ 9>PP* a tFrait ^fT^,
^T^rPr: rrf^ II ;* II <nnfa II wi^w , nfo% (^ n
^hT ii #n^» *Rfii *r i wijjf^if^Hp qcpqtaMft ywRynifais yf^w^sfennf ^j^t-
qtH^firil
66. The affix kan comes after a word denoting
a part of one's body, in the sense of ' who takes care of it,
who bestows care upon it \
The words if* and *PJ are understood in this sfltra. The word qrov
means 'devoted to, intent upon, craving after'. Thus %$g trf%<T: a tinrap t c-
*MllR<*HHi TO^K tr^g^rar H The FCTJfHl: is in the plural number, indicating
that the affix comes even after a collective compound of Svlnga terms.
Thus frjhw , ^qHiqw II See 1 1. 3. 44-
^4<I<A^II^ B V 8 M^lfa II 44<K, 3?£ *H*{% H
Sfrp II fl^l, Rfadffif ^T I ^WTUHH^W^lIidt^flGHHSf **?. IPTO *T*fl|r M
67. The affix thak (+ — *$) comes in the sense of
1 voracious \ after the word udara.
The translation given above is according to Dr. Bohtlingk. Accord-
ing to the K&sika, the ftnuvptti of srf%?T is also read into this sAtra. The mean;
ing then would be " (hale comes after the word udara in the seventh case in
construction, in the sense of ' who is devoted therein ', when the word so
formed means " voracious ". A person who is very much distressed by
hunger is so called ; 4JUfti*uft;iH u «l3 II Thus ^ iranr -^nft^i (i. c HT«pr:).
Why do we say when it means Voracious? Observe 3JCSJ: 'abdominal 1 .
*rc^r mR^m: II v II *vft > *re^r» ^fciRr:, ( *ac ) B
R*im f^rf^?nf *wi«uii H*fir it
68. The affix kan (I — q») comes after the word
sasya, being in the third case in construction, when the sense
is <4 to supply richly with it *\
Digitized by
;<50gk_._ /
921 Wl ll . BK. V. Ch. II. § 71 ]
The anuvritti of qj^, not of sw. is to be read here. The word *R9
here means 'good quality', and not 'corn*. Another reading is mq. The
word *?R means ' all, every where \ That which is full of (qfrsffir) good quali-
ties (to) in which there is no defect, that is the signification here. Thus
^dR <fft3rrer : "WntP mfe 1 <a nce » above all praise', M<^W HTgs 4 a good man,
not equalled by any'. ttWtJ »rfbr: 4 a precious stone of the best quality', i. e.
perfect in form*.
star 5F& 11 v*> n vrifo n tfsrar, sp&, ( ^ ) »
• ffrr* 11 rtywiRffoM' fi<fl^iuH*4l**i03wft*w9 4»»lJ<<j4i >**<% 11
69. The affix kan comes after the word an§a 'a
share 1 in the second-casein construction, the sense being
' who must take that \
The word &TO is used in the accusative in the aphorism, showing that
the construction must be accusative. The word STTOt, nom. frd" is formed by
adding fapr to the root f , the force of the affix being that of u must, or neces-
sity". See III. 3. 17a The word frft^ will govern accusative and not geni-
tive II. 3. 70.
Thus srtr ^rft-sfarap 'an heir ' f Lc who is entitled to take a share at
partition i. e. a *ntrj 2 i aftraF S** M
<FaT^rtPTgg n nso u q^rft n grany, surer, ^rg^ t (^q[) w
70. The affix Kan comes after the word tantra
€ a loom \ in the sense of " taken off therefrom not long ago
or shortly before ".
The word HT must be in the fifth case in cor.stiuction, by the very
fact of its being so employed in the sutra. The word sjfa* means * short
time, not long' »nCT means "taken off". Thus <F3Hf3TOTg<r: - tFTO* 4 a
cloth just taken off the loom ' i. e. an unbleached cloth. As fl-%±W qys, IF33P
srnrc 'a new mantle '"iRTOJ or 1*: It —
«iflui^fcui £ ^5U*UH n vs? 11 qsfrft n wsimth ', ^ir^,^rn*ni(^[)il
71. The words Brahmanaka and ushr>ika are ano-
malous, when they are a Name.
Thus grgr^> **P» ^fat^T ^rns II The affix ^ is added to BT3F>r, with
the force of * a place where Br&hmanas who live by profession of arms dwell \
Similarly afwi* means «T*qTHT* W
' " ■ \
^jiig^fj^C-iOogle
t
BK. V. CH. 11.5.7$ ] ***** PW
ifldMiyii ^rftftr H >n h q^rft b 3far, 4mi vim, *Eiftfa, fr^O ii
72. ' The affix kan comes after the words 6lta and
ush^a, in the sense of ' who goes to work thus \ .
The word trnr and z*H being used as adverbs will be in accusative
construction. As *ffcf 3OT*r * who S°^ s to" work coldly 1 Lea lazy man^tf*-
^ : ~ *TrTO:, SCT*. Similarly <fwi<*s - *fhTOtftt, **p * who goes to work hotly \
^frf s II Uf^ftnr ftWRfr I IWu^wJitivhAi* *W TOPI? H
73. The word adhika is anomalous.
The word *rfa^: meaning • more \ is formed by adding ^ to the word
«TOH£? ; there being elision of the second term before the affix. Thus *lft?&
Wfat gffqfa " a Droiia is superior to Khirt M mftH ff *&& W&& u a Khftrt is infe-
rior to Drona n . The word 9TOTCf governs nominative or accusative indiffer-
ently, j
74. The words anuka, abhika and abhika are
anomalous, meaning * being at liberty to do or being fond of:
Thus 9t&m*dt -*t&& 'desirous, libidinous \ gtfwq^ ~*tf*Pff* or
stffci: f a lover, voluptuous person \ . * .
*fc* u ^q«ji^<flqiq^PTO<flflfcttifr ^ro3r *rcfit it
75. The affix kan(i — «f) comes after the word pto»
Sva, in the third-case in construction, signifying " who strives
to gain something by that ".
The word qpfo means 4 a fraudulent or crooked expedient 1 . One who
endeavours to obtain any thing by fraud is called qr&P 'a cheat, a juggler, a
partisan \ <ir*=a rib, a crooked thing ; as qrf^-nrarft*, *ffito ^rf^p &C
«nr. y^^ifSwijpif d***ft \\^\n q^Tft H «Pr:^y f q^iftMi-
*q*fr*ron ■
76. The affixes thak ( + -**£) and thaii (+'-**>)
come respectively after ayafcgMa and dai>4&jina, in the same
sense of" who strives to gain something by that ".
10
'^
Digitize^byVjOOy
I— lirn ,h
9*S «*» [ Bjc V. Ch. II. § 78
The word irfirofll is understood here also. . The word. wi^pPl means
•a violent proceeding 9 . Who seeks to obtain any thing by violent means is
called MUMjfe*: - CTfftRP II The word fTTfiFT means # staff (dag<Ja) and
hide (ajina)' 1 e. outer badges of devotion or hypocrisy. Who seeks to gain
'something by hypocrisy and deceit is called jl"* i fMPw* - vf^T »
77. The affix kan ( I — **) is added to an ordinal
number, in the sense of i€ acquiring a subject after so many
attempts " ; and there is optionally the elision of the affix
denoting the ordinal number.
The word qrafttr (V. 2. 53) stands here as a type of all words ending
in affixes denoting ^r i.e. ordinals. The word q^qr means 'acquired or
learned hereby'. This qualifies the base. Thus ffcflSflT sSPV «F* IBpfa-ft*
**V*x£or f|tfl*W HfTH. * the acquisition of the knowledge or book by the second
time' i. e, " successful mastery by the second time ". So also Pre or fi^tawi*
■^Ta^j^or^rgpf^tt
Vdrt : — When the word, formed by the affix kan, means the person who
acquires after so many times then the elision of the ^cor affix is compulsory and
not optional Thus «m ^tjj imf *gpflr s » l V^ffir$!?^r' 'Devadatta who learns
the book for the sixth time' i. e. • who succeeds in learning the book at the
sixth attempt'. Similarly <H^fr# ^yy II The word n^or here is confined to
books only and to nothing else.
*sc cc^rf Hmtffr B v^ n q^ifa n *r, n*n*, *ra*fr: f ( ^ ) D
78. The affix kan comes after a word in the first
case in construction, with the force of a genitive case, when
the sense is ' he is their leader '\
The word tnrtt means 'head-man, leader, spokes-man*. Thus \*T#
wnrft^T->^irar-f *wwii» 11
Why do \v6 say • when meaning a leader' ? Witness \ffl(: fT^^SPltl
Here there is no affixing.
ft, ^wft f^tfft *5w%**r mfa 11
\
,„,,. P i r ,., , ,_»
Google
[Bk. V. Ch. II 5 *t. 1 *M »**
79. The affix kan comes after the word firiftkhala
1 a clog *, in the sense of " clog is its fetter *\ when the whole
word means a young camel,
Thusi^ f^nw **W*-WRP H The young ones of camel
are called wr N The wooden clogs put on their feet to prevent them from
straying are called *t?SFJ M Though the ropes &c are also used along with
the clog, yet Spnkhala being the principal object that takes away the free-
dom is called w^ih or bond or fetter.
3cS? 4whi : H^oll <^ift II ^t^r., 4»jmi:, ( m% ) H
fRp ti to* ffir f^rswr *wwi***€r h*Rt t **tf *rft toi fRwrcm i
80. The word utka is anomalous, meaning c long-
ing after, yearning \
He whose mind anxiously desires or yearns after a thing Is called
*npf: ii The word **& is formed by adding st* to the preposition *£. Thus
*eet $*^T : > *^* s *w§r ■»***!** or 4N>1**4s n
4fcldM<4J4WlsO<t II <\ U^lft II ^!I»» M<fi*WHHj d^T, ( *^C ) >
81. The affix kan comes after a word expressing
a time, or a cause or effect (of thq disease) t when an illnesa
is denoted.
The word ssn* means • days ' &e, and torr means f the cause (of
disease) or its effect \ Thus ft^ftsfjjw -fftfhra?f STC • the fever which comet
on the second day*, *v$pi3P 'a fever which comes on the fourth day'. Simi-
larly after a word denoting irata*:, as, fir^refiPH ■» ffr*l*TK> WO • a fever
caused by poisonous flowers \ So also «hm;t*W II So also 3t*f ^Hpft*- VWRF
* a fevet producing heat \ iftw^t TO tt
When f illness • Is not meant, then there Is no affixing, as, fitfhfr ffTOt-
stq N The word #^r is to be read into this sfttra from the next sAtra. There*
fore words fifcfhre p &c are Names,
d<ft«ww *ri% ^wnini n <r, U *Kift u jrj, st^rc topi, irot, *Jir-
Tra,(^^)ii
inr* ii irftfit M^Hw^fiRnfJiRr sm*qif s^ro* ^nfir, i rennrereRfort *«nndW
Enroll **%>* ifttaro n
82. The affix kan is added to a word denoting
food, in the first case in construction, in the sense of <f thia
• ^ i lij ■ ■ i i n'lir ^ *-j3-ti mm*
Digitized by
Goog le
925 *Pr and *** [ Bk, V. Ch" II. $. 85
— — ■ _ — — -
is the principal food oh this particular occasion ", when the
whole word so formed is a Name. : ~
Thus QTT^rn UfauilHHWI 4fer^f» ^I^Pl^i l fafareft "The Gu$4pApiki
-^Paur^mAsI * i. e. that particular Full-Moon day in which cakes of sugar
form the principal accompaniment of food. Similarly fiiHiuft^i, ctfTOT,
Vdrt : — The affix fp| comes after *ni* in the same sense. As qzftpft
gOTWi^sr n <\ n vRpfa B 5F53mr^rrac f si^ R
83. The affix aft (+' — s?) comes after' kulm&sha,
in the same sense " this is the principal food on this parti*
cular occasion' f — and the whole word is a Name.
The ^ of BT9 is for the sake of causing Vfiddhi and accent Thus
84. The word grotriyan is irregularly formed mean-
ing * who has studied the Chhandas \
The ^ in yrfire^ is for the sake of accent As $frrof mgro u a Brlh-
ma?a learned in the Vedas". The word vfhnr is either a condensed expression
for the full sentence gsftsffit referring to no parlicular base or affix. Or
the word &t^t is replaced by *5ta, and then is added the affix q^n But how
do you form then &F^T:» in the sense of g^tsffir , by adding the affix si^r by
IV. 2. 59? The present sfltra is optional, the word m of V. 2. 77 being under-
stood here: so that we have the form vrf^T also. Some say that Kl&m applies
only to that person who has not only studied the Vedas but who acts upon its
purport also, while m*qq applies to a student in general, so one sfltra does not
.debar the other, as they apply to different objects*
85. The affixes in i (frO and $ian ( — f — x<g) eome
after the word gr&ddha, in the sense of "this is eaten hy him".
Thus ^ro g^fpftf - W^t or VTftr^P "a person who has eaten obsequial
food". This relates to a person who eats on the day the SrAddha ceremony
takes place; and not at any other time nor who eats stale food of fr&ddha. fro
\
DinitgBflfay,
Google
Bk. V. Ch. II. 5. 88 ) |f%« 9*6r
E% 'WW V Ktfygpas fft iirOT 11 The word *ro originally means a certain cerem-
ony, and is derived from the word *rar with the affix W V. 2. IOI. In a figur-'
ative sense, it here means the food taken at that ceremony.
^*f%fa: n *$ h q^rft n *&&:, *fo, a
86. The affix ini Q&) comes after the word pftrva,
in the sense of 'by whom something was done formerly*.
The word «fSpr of the last sfltra is understood here. But what is the
verb of which vftft is the agent The g*R does not come to be read into this
sfltra. Therefore we must supply some general verb such as 'doing* &c, to
complete the sense. Thus $r »RPPPf ~S$fr H So also $f g4fc 4ht &c tft*-?$
s. qftofr d. yffa: pi. In fact ^ff% means by whom some thing was done &c,
formerly. '
^rpro n <^>3 n q^rft 11 ^njcfa, % ( *fo ) n
87. The affix ini comes after the word p(irva, also
when another word precedes it, the sense being 'by whom
something is done'.
• Thus gasSf 9***-$ pm 'who formerly made'.gro$ Jftim M
In these words, fint $9 and 15 are compounded by II. 1. 4; and then
the affix is added. These two sfltras V. 2. 86, 87, give rise to these two maxims
m«i3d f infifafl** H^clftPRfffer "that which connot possibly be anything
but a Pr&tipadika or Nominal-stem, does, (contrary to I. I. 72) not denote
that which ends with it, but it denotes only itself." wwj l QMllilSMlRrtfWl "The
rule of vyapadesivad-bh&va does not apply to a pr&tipadika". That rule is
embodied in the following paribhAshA — m < iqfil3^R 4 K— "an operation which
affects some thing on account of some special designation, which for certain
reasons attaches to the latter, affects likewise that which stands alone and
to which therefore, just because the reasons for it do not exist, that special
designation does not attach".
88. The affix ini comes after ish^a &c. in the sense
of 'by him\
ThusfCT%sr»fA^;r^^r &c. "who wished", "who performed a
charitable act". The words ff&^, qf^&c. formed by f^ will govern locative
instead of accusative* See vftrtika under II. 3. 36,
Digitized by VjOO ?L6
«~^
9V fft it [ Bk. V. Ch. II. §. 91
i ie, 2 3$, 3 nrarflv ( ?rorft* ), 4 ftirffcr, 5 t?ft»Tf^r* 6 <rffcrffcr, 7 fsf^ftr-
W.Sft^^^9flNfN,10tfS^ 14 «Tf%fr, 1$
nftq*, 16 «nraSh*, 17 «n3**. 18 jtfhr, 19 trmnr, 20 g* ( «rnmrg<r ), 21 ir^hr, 22 *c-
<nfnr (0\ 23 «n%far, 24 itotR*, 25 •rroffcro, 26 Pra^*, 27 *q$<r, 28 tthft, 29 •*■
33*k, 30 •ryrf^Tt 31 ngqffcr, 32 «*n$fi*r. 33 ift^Rnr, 34 ^f^nr, 35 ft^Rwr. 36
frrt%*, 37^,38sf^,39irffcrf^^ imrffcr, 43 ^m
44 ftijftir, 45 trrf^nr. m
fftn u HRMP^^Tf^Tft^f^rnT jnflr s^t% ft^ft f^r^ufr i&iwuift *p% m i4*wuii
89. In the Chhandas, the words paripanthin and
pariparin are anomalously formed by this affix, and have the
sense of 'an antagonist 9 .
The word qqqguiq ; means 'an adversary, an antagonist 9 Thus m ttf
ifiaftorf ftj* IT rtr qftsPrft fty* (Ysy\ Ved. IV. 34). These words are obsolete
in secular literature. See however Gita III. 34.
90. The word anupadin, formed anomalously by
iai, denotes 'who goes after, who searches'.
Thus *T3<?$ iwnr f W3*rtr*gn*Pl "going after or searching the cows and
camcl*\
91. The affix ini comes after the word s&ksh&t, in
the sense of 'a spectator, looker on*, when the word so formed
is a Name.
The word grant is an Indeclinable. The word 4?r is used in the
aphorism to restrict the sense of the word. Thus tfTOTT ffCT-flwft, d. fnflpfr, pL
OTf%"t: 'an eye-witness'. In any transaction like loan, &c, three persons
directly see the fact, and may be called VET, viz. who gives, who takes, and
another who merely looks on. By using the word ^9T, the word mfa\ is
restricted to the mere looker on, and not to the lender or borrower.
^mfliiHMl^f^f^w t«Hfi*w*f ^^tov muwuhm RmiwI u
Digitized by Vj OO
Bk. V. CH. IL J. 93] *<M 9**
92. The word kshetriyach ($ftr$) is anomalous,
meaning u curable in another body " i. e. " not curable in
this life".
The whole word enunciated herein the sense of para-kshetre chikitsya;
or the word tffa*, with acute on the last syllable, is formed . by adding
the affix v% to the word <rc$PC, the force of the affix being • curable therein *
and the word <re is elided before this affix. Thus ftftifr «nF** ' incurable
disease'. 3tftii $OTt * incurable leprosy': I e.— organic disease. The word
TOT? means body assumed in the next reincarnation. The word %ftft applies
to an irremediable disease.
The word fcnri means • poison ' also-t^ qtgft Mi*ftftq*HU| ftH4Wft »
' that which is to be removed from another's body where it has entered '. Or
OT%* means 'rank growth or grass', L e. tnPc *R*# ft%*nnfa PlfamilH TOlA-
trcqrft M " that like grass &c, which grows in a para-kshetra or another's field
i. e. a field set apart for grain &c, and not for grass, and which therefore
must be weeded out (chikitsya)" Or fcfiW is an 'adulterer', Le. TOKP <TOPfr,
fPC foreran fiflpjhr «y ll These are all secondary meanings.
t^TTO , WfeflH , WtUH , Wt*H i W^UH , V^TlH ,Tfo,^^i
ftsnfr I f^l "CTL I «hiwiI ffCTH tiqptil SHTO^f 4i4u)l*JHPU9 fl^T •
93. The word Indriyam, (having udatta on the
last), is anomalous, meaning an organ of sense; and so called,
either because it is " the characteristic from which the exis-
tence of Indra is inferred ", or ' it is seen by Indra ', or ' it is
created by Indra', or 'it is wished for by Indra', or 'it is given
by Indra \
The word |fjfa is a primitive word, meaning organs of sense, such as
eyes &c. Its derivation is obscure, if it is a derivative word at all In the
latter alternative, it may be said to be formed by the affix ^r added after |5f f
in the sense of either 'a mark thereof. As f*** ftf«-tPm II The senses
(indriyas) are so called because, Indra is Atma or soul, and it is inferred by
the existence of the senses, eyes, ears &c So that these organs are the 'marks 9
or signs or linga of Indra : because they being an instrument presupose an
agent, there being no instrument without an agent
'^=* w " J ' " » ■ — * -* — Digitizgc HbyCjOOg 'g
, I
929 *g* a I Bk. V. Ch. Ih 5 94
Or the senses (indriyas) are so-called because they are 'seen or
known by Indra or Atma' (f%«r Ce-Jjnc). The affix is here added to a
word in the third case in construction. The knowing or perceiving of the
senses by the Self is an allusion to the following Sruti of the Aitareya Upa-
nishad Chapter III. verse. 13, where the Self having created the physical body
took a survey of it *r wft* S^t TO utppr T^qf ^mdPfift " He beheld this y '
Brahma who dwells in the body who pervades everywhere, and exclaimed—
• I have seen this '.Or they are so called because they are created by Indra or
Atma (f%w *je) i. e. the senses are formed according to the good and bad deeds
oftheSelt Or they are so called because they are wished for by Indra or
Self ( f^r 3* %ft* ) as they are the gate-ways of knowledge. Or they are so
called because they are given by Indra (f%*r **t) i. e. they are allotted to
their respective objects by Indra e. g. the eye is given to perceive forms, tht
ear to perceive sounds and so on. The word qr 'or* joins every one of the above.
The word fRr shows, that there may be other appropriate significations also:
As, {£jpr jsfapi-lfawi 'senses'— difficult to be subdued by the SouL
Kdrikd ffrfSNnraqig ftwiftit sfir^fnft i
94. The affix matup (5^, 3**/ t) comes after a
word in first case in construction in the sense of ' whose it is, 1
or ' in whom it is \
Thus nrttstq *afcT-«Tt»m nom. iftaT* f having cows V as «frlP* ^T*r* W
^*TteP*SP*r-VWl(* being substituted for if by VIII. 2. 9), as fVTOCTOP H
Similarly WiPk* mm* U The word ffir shows that the use of ijRand cog-
nate affixes are restricted in their application. For example, a person who
has three barley grains only will not be called WTPt II This affix comes
when the significations are (1) A large quantity or number, as *Tfap* * having ^
many cows*. (2) When censure (Pt^r) is implied, asq^?nrtf, CTarofc (3)
when praise (**feir) is meant, as wiqJl *R*TTi (4) when an inherent or perma-
nent quality of a thing is meant (ftarifr) as, tftfWt ^P 11 (5) When excel-
lence (vTftTOR) is meant, as, ^ftoft W&R II (6) When accompaniment (to* ).
is meant, as vtt, CPft U (7) When the sense of *tf%r * to be 1 is denoted, as
uRdHI^N v
V
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. II. 5 96. J w*« 93*
Vdrti — The affix H3T is elided after words of quality (fpnraX a*
^TTf^na II V\ II ^dk « miftw , ^r R
95. The affix matup comes after; the nominal
stems rasa &c 9 in the sense of * whose it is ', or € in whom
it is\
As TO*TO, VM^IHL , «T5W^ W Why this special sfitra with regard to
TOrft words, when they would have taken 113^ by the last sfitra ? Thb pre-
vents the application to these words of other affixes having the sense of ifjpt *
How do you form then wwfit QFTT, Wm<£ | TCSF M These are rare forms.
According to Patanjali this sfitra is useless. Or the word to &c, must denote
qualities, perceivable by the organs of taste,touch &c, i. e. ^ should mean taste,
5tf form. Therefore the forms Wqufl and vfi^fa " : are valid, meaning ^PTro 1 ^! ■
So also if^^) *i*:«*Tre3nn, here ^? and TO do not mean 'form 1 and 'taste 9 . And
all words of quality having one syllable are governed by this sfitra, and form
their derivative in Hgi II See V. 2. 1 15.
1 TO, 2 *ft, 3 q%* f 4 1T5>T> 5 ^ 6 ^, 7 &f, 8 *u* # f 9 ipwii Q0|H^4 TOlfl-
ni ft%*PT* ), 10 q^r^: ( m* ). II
«^d<^mii
qrfrrereii ni"qjnRfl *5s*mm
96. The affix lach («J) comes optionally, in the
sense of matup, after a stem ending in long sir, the word
expressing something which is found only in a living being.
Thus from ^T € a crest ', we have ^TP** or ^nnt- So also qtffanf:
or *rf3n*TTTT^ II Why do we say * which is found in a living being • ? Observe
fircrai^ *#T: € the crested flame of a lamp '. Why do we say "ending in sir*?
Observe reran, IOTP* II
VArtx — It should be stated that the affix «^ comes only after what
denotes member or limb of a living being, ( and not anything like love, pas-
sion, intelligence &c, that are also found in living being> Hence there is no
affixing of a? here : Pmflirfwufe f f*MflNfal< , ft#Wl U
Every affix is udatta (III. 1. 3), unless contrary is indicated by some
anubandha. The ?*^ would have been ud&tta by. III. 1. 3, even without the
indicatory ^ (VI. 1. 163). The employment of this anubandha, however
11
Digitized by
KjOO
9SV ir*n [ Bk. V. Ch. II. 5 9*
indicates that this ud&tta will never be changed Into svarita, as other udMtai
are by rule VIII. 2. 6, as yfifofll n
^fai si H4«4m<uuftRr to% i ftwift^ JTifimR**^ «^**wt wuHuiuQi imf n
JifWui «n fflmH»3 t ft4»4 mr* u qnnFOT333re«rerm%g *r u m* u vmei^i ; %%
97. The affix lach comes in the sense of matup,
after the words sidhma &c, and optionally matup also.
Thus Rww or ftvrapfe nj^s or n^roi tl The word trereregTRL under-
stood In this sfttra, causes the employment of the affix Hg^ in the alternative
It does not mean that the affix «^ is optional. For were B^ optional, then
the affix {ft and v^ would come by V. 2. 115 after those words of ftfunff
; class which end in *c. But that is not the case.
! V&rti — The words differ and vnfH lengthen the vowel before vj, aj
t
) Vdrt\ — The words qnr» j!*r, *«*, toi* and in* take the augment u^ before
fl^ as ^TQ^t ^Wt5"» W*$P'-9 HWIJH*, «I$B* II
V&rtv— The word 3i*r, TO»qi?T and gj^r take w^r, when censure Is meant
as jkt<$, TOiftW* and ifizvv, but M<Mli<*u<W when no censure is meant
Vdrti — This affix comes after words denoting lower organisms, and
word denoting disease : as vscn*, qftPKftt, ft*tf*l<4ilc«> 9 Rmffaw :, Sjtfn* N
l flw, 2 113, 3 iiflc, 4 *riPr, 5 <hr (**), 6 ^oit*, 7 $«*•, 8 fsr«n* t 9 qig
10 qr$, 11 <?£(<reB). 12 fi 13 *g>, 14 im, 15 qr ft 'ji NH4>ffM*i 16 qw«tH<*wKi
«ng£ *r 17 wiuwidi^mi (3CT)3ft, 18 <r* f 19**^, 20*3T t 21 sffeir, (sf%*0 22 ^
23 €Tf f 24 ifhT, 25 VIPT, 26 RjF, 27 ft^r, 28 J*** (s*qj), 29 53, 30 *& 31 ijsg, 32 w*
33 qw, 34^5, 35^ft f 36 inj (35*5), 37 *P*r, 88 *•, 39 $*, 40 xm* f 41 **fa}
42 WI^ # f 43 *§«Hb 44^| # f 45 ft^qit*, 46 5*T # , 47 ygM^cimilfr 48 11*7, 49 q-?!
^ahanpri ^nw% ivi <i^nft n ^*ri *f empire, «HMd 9 («^) n
98. The affix lach comes after the -words vats;
and aftsa, in the sense of love and strength respectively.
ThusTOTO Moving the calf t loving, tender*. «fo**: 'strong, lusty
The word tot means 'calf; in 3*3<* there is no trace of its origin, for it
applied to father, master &c, as *^pf tCTfh *Wtf fair &c The word w
means 'shoulder': but ^BH means 'strong 9 . The affix b^ in these cases
not optional, but necessary and debars 13^ 11 In other senses, the matup on
[ is added as Wftroft ^*» •taCTf^sfa* • v
V
\
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Br. V. CiL II. § ioi ] ** ««:
99. The affix ilach (%&) as well as lach, comes
after the word phena, in the sense of matup : and optionally
the affix matup also.
The word ^ draws in «^; and the word H^HWHL understood In the
sfltra adds h^ in the alternative. As %ft<*t, %TO and 9ftOT( i
fnr! i Stunts ipnftHp ft^TftHpr Pr>^t «rtp*8r wrara*! * i iw^ f?ft ircrar *ihRi
100. The three affixes 6a (*r), na (*), and tsi^r
(%&) come in the sense of matup, respectively after the words
of these three classes i." e. lom&di, pdmadi, and pichchh&di :
and the affix matup also comes in the alternative.
The affix q comes after opni?' words as, sfap or 3prcn f hairy\
The affix if comes after wnf? words, as, qpFf* or qnn^ * scabby \ The affix
%tf% comes after fre^ift words, as, ftrc?<?* or fif*mi< * broth '.
Vdrti — The affix si comes after the word «rjf in the sense of beautiful;
as BPrjprr 'the fair one' i. e. a woman.
VArt\ — The words jrraft, 4^1 4) and jf shorten their final vowel before
«C, as W^PP^ 4 a field ', <THlf?FP*, WTO M
Vdrti — The word f%c^ (f*S+*nO loses its second member, before «r,
and the change caused by sandhi fa in to w) is undone. Otherwise the form
would be ftw*: (*^, being elided), as fi«ifs nq(fl gf^f (TOf-ftr** ' moving
variously*.
Vdrti — The effix s| comes after Rvfr» before which f is changed to •?,
as R^*flit*4iR<f -R^PT'
Vdrti — The affix ilach comes after ja{&, gha{A f and kalft, when censure
is meant, as w&r-, qfc?: «hlt** but *i*rer^ when no censure is meant.
1 Hrt*, 2 Sh*, 3 *$, 4 *ft 5 fiTf^, 6 *£*, 7 *ft, 8 gfa, 9 «* 11
.1 firm (fira), 2 to?, 3 5^? Gs*?iO, * wro (uror), 5 srerereap (tow
mvO, m, 6 *% 7 T^T, 8 If ♦ $ *3T M ^'. ^ . ^
X
D initi7Rd hv
Google
933 *r\n [ Bk. V. Ch. II. 5 104
. ^Pp t sgr wot s*tf isHMf «** srerefr *rcft igwtf 1
101. The affix na (±sr) comes in the sense of
matup after the words prajflft, §raddh& and archft : as well
as the affix matup.
As insr: or nam^ i 'SW or srOTTOfe *tpI s or *r*far*n The KAiika has
introduced the word ff% into the sfitra from the v^rtika f%w II
Vdrt : — So also after ffrT, as * xf : or ffrP iPt II
fr^s 1 tra 8 u4gti<uMi**if fafa ff% ?Sr§lr irar^F *nrat T**2f 11
102. The affixes vini (fircO and ini (%x) come,
with the force of matup, after the words tapas and Sahara
respectively.
The word friends in «r^, and therefore by V, 2. 121, it would have
taken ftft; similarly ^f^ ends in st, and by V. 2. 115, it would have taken
jft; it may, therefore, be objected, where is the necessity for the present
sfitra ? To this it is replied, that by the next sfitra, these words take the
affix wc% also ; so that, had there not been this present sfltra, the *m would
have debarred the application of fi% and ftft of V. 2. 115 and 121. The
affix *s( (V. I. 115) is also debarred after the word 53ft, though it ends
intfM
Thus n fls<mfaH qr nrot-trrfa* nom. fprrir U Similarly tfsfip* nom.
^Rp II W* *H*U**IIH UI *I !|?T% mfil I
qiffirani 11 *r»jRrc&r wu*hiR**i STriwM^ 11
103. And also a$ (+5?) comes after tapas and
sahasra.
Thus <ttop, STOFfr II The separation of this sfitra from the last is for
two purposes, 1st the anuvjritti of sj^ runs in the subsequent sdtras, which
could not have been done had it been included in the last stitra, 2nd the rule
of yath&sankhya (I. 3. 10) would not have applied in the last sdtra, had *T>r
been read along with ftf% and fft ll
Vdrt : — The words ^qfctrr &c, are governed by this rule and t«ke u*£
As imm fw^srer* TO- si&W: w ll Similarly ?TrPrer: (a kind of hell) *£r"TO:»
«&<!*••, W'. and WfalP ■
JDiailized by vg* ^
Bk. V. Ch. II. | 107. ] * * 934
104. The affix a$ comes, in the sense of matup,
after sikat& and Sarkard.
Thus fNfOT ^^t irr€t ^ ll These are the examples, when they do not
denote a place. In denoting a place they will take f* and g<^ of the next
sfitra.
105. When the sense is of c a locality', there may
take place the lup-elision of the affixes denotnig matup (with
the preservation of the gender and number of the word), or
there may be the affix ilach (*af), as well as a$ and matup,
after the words sikatA and garkarft.
By *r «n the sfltra, errand if«j^ are introduced. The g^ refers to hj^
and every affix in general Thus ft^RrrvTfcl^fttF% a f33varTO : or fiNifiw,
W*&n or finidUHL * a sandy country'. So also tr&I TO : or w£Ra: or *n4k: or
^(|^ | ^ 'a stony locality*.
Why do we say when meaning a locality'? Observe W*T 'a vessel of
sand', qjkx "honey or sugar". In the case of the elision of the affix, the gender
and number are preserved by I. 2. 51.
^?ar srera tt^ 11 $0$ n m^iPi n %$t sraftr *x% 11
^ftf : II T5HT ffit *HEI<T rt^ I {tfUMI&d^HinHil&fl ^^ro ***& *^t 1
106. The affix urach (it) comes after danta, de-
noting 'having projecting teeth*.
Thus ^fr *Hnr H** ^rf^T-^g'C: U The words in the sfltra are either in
the nominative or the locative case, but have the force of ablative.
Why do we say when the meaning is that of 'projecting? Observe
^OTPl 'having teeth*.
d/itifitflm > nvh r. n govs n q^rft it g^r, 5ft, g^,«*fh,r. n
ffrf : ii 3iT 91^ 3*^? *f% t^nNif v MtM«ii *nrftfr i**if 1
qtfSrepi ii qrercfr m&&*M groqqre* h qr» 11 hmhi^i^^^^ tobhii
wr% 11 m&p ***** *r u
107. The affix * comes, after the words usha,
sushi, mushka and madhu, with the force of matup.
Thus *m *HPl'a barren soil, impregnated with flsha or salt', gfat W*
•a perforated wood i. e. containing gft or hole', gest* ^y: 'a berst having
testicles or mushka'. 1^ ST: 'sweet sugar'. The word |Rr shows that the
words formed with c are names of certain things. Therefore it will not apply
Digitized b y VjOO ^IC
935 *M [ Bk. V.Ch. 1 1.5 no
here vftsfct^t^r f%?nr 'there is salt in this pot', we cannot say iror 1*:, nor
19*}^?* for qtqfcni^fe'ftiRt v
Vdrt: — The affix c comes after is, j^r and gpir, as lawHftd n s mffqq t
«npi-*sci 'an ass, lit having a wide throat'. *{mwuRfl fft ^rf^^K^-3^^
'talkative'/ $mnw ttP~$S9rct 'an elephant having tusks'. The word gpv
means the tusk of an elephant or the lower jaw of an elephant The word $4-411
is a common name for all elephants.
Vdrt 1 — The affix c comes after *f*T, qjg and qr»£, as «prcn, 'a city, 4it
having trees (naga =* tree) 1 , IT^tHj IPS**, tl
Vdrt: — So also after q^gr, the vowel being shortened: as CTsgTO N
^r^prf ir. II I©* n q^rft n !£-fFrrac *: B
fftn 1 ^&*i*ii**ir v *r?rtr mfl h*^3 i
108. The affix w comes after dyu and dm, in the
sense of matup.
Thus $nr: and J*r: 11 These are primitive words f and therefore do not
take hj^ in the alternative.
fi%s ii ^wiy qgrfr *ro5 tor> sararcn* 1
nTfti^i^ 11 vra*r* v^huPJ OTnfif «rto^. 11 *i* h *vfait §ww u
109. The affix ^ comes optionally, with the force
of matup, after kega.
Though the word n»*MWim was understood here from V* 2. 96 (see
sQtra 97); its repetition shows that in the alternative we have not only Hjfc but
the affixes fft and s^ (V. 2. 115) also. Thus we have four forms : %*TT,%*ft
$tffci: and %W* W
Vdrt: — The affix * is seen after other words also. As inTO 'a kind
of serpent', f^TO** € a kind of gem', qrctr?*, $1H4:» JJ^ta*!, $53ir*:» fB^5fP M
Vdrt: — The final of b*S^| is elided before *, as stop II
Vdrt: — In the Chhandas, the affixes $, qfH^ , * and 13V come in the
sense of H%% II Thus { : — ffttg^t <|A<4l-ft nfatr (oftO» IJH#<<lRil ^; qfa*: — «IW-
«rfW>; * and *$* t as ^cr or *%ki N —
Vdrt : — The affixes ^ and |^ come respectively after h^t and c*T
as. w hnr 9 iftr: M
fjfa* II IF^f 1HJ|«I f3wi**tt *: RcTOt mfif *t<ii«<i R*fa TOflf I
110. The affix ^ comes after gandt and ajaga, in
the sense of matup, when the word is a Name* ■
\
, -^i#ge€^V5ciQOJ f ^Zl
A
Bk V. Cm. II. §. 1 14 1 *f* a 93*
AsiWNr the bow G&n£iva of Arjuna 1 vnifi'the bow Ajagava of
Siva 9 . There is shortening also, as *n&*i II The sfttra is so framed, thkt the
word irp^Y and «nf^T are both included*
111. The affixes Iran (Lfc:) and Irach (t*)
come in the sense of matup, after the words k&ijda and a$4*
respectively.
Thus qfpffo and vffb H Another reading has 9TPV and *Tr**to M
ffrf* »l CSFirafifaf: y l(<NR3i*3fr W^ McL|4l *T*fit H^T •
qiRi«ht ii WMiift saNftfir tvwRi ww u
112. The affix valach (^ra?) comes, in the sense
of matup, after rajas, kfishi, dsuti, and parishad.
As csnsrcr ^t, «*fta* $3*<V, *rrfpfta* *nf*wp, iftrcft otm The
lengthening of vowel in $Pr and STTgffr takes place by VI. 3. 118. The affix
^35^ comes only under certain senses and conditions, as shown in the above
examples. Thus in <4l3j**H <tift fiw%, there is no affixing.
Vdrt : — The affix valach is seen after other words also. As qrfTOt
113. The affix valach comes in the sense of
matup, after danta and gikhft, when a Name is formed.
Thus ^n^RT» ^pt* vdn<5i f nr:, ftrarra «nrac, ftrar^ ^pir 11 The final
vowel of ?p?r is lengthened before to by VI. 3. 1 18.
ff*F II S^ftFTTTO: TOtf H*& RHW^ TO*f *R!Wf WJ|I
114. The words jyotsnd, tamisrit, gpifigi^a, tbja-
svin, tirjasvala, gomin, malina, and malimasa are irregularly
formed, in the sense of matup and are Names.
They are thus formed. **rfir^+1-5*>cOT ' moon-light' (the f being
elided). tppi+Csftftar € night', (f being added): it has other genders
than feminine as tiFrtr TO 'dark sky*, Iff +n^-'Z% f s U The augment
Digitized by
M7 OTSti BicV.Ch. II. 5 117]
«ig^ is added to «^ f and then the affix f%ft and **r* ; as an*+*m+ft*»i^
feRt? «nirw n nr+ftfir-tfrPni; TO+n^«»jfo?n; ro + front- iritar: 11
115. The affixes ini (^) and than (J—js?) come
in the sense of matup, after nominal stems ending in short «rj
and in the alternative matup also comes.
Thus rf^«i, <*Pm<*:, &ft^ nom. ipft, cn%^P II The word 9TO9TOPg,(V,
2. 96) is understood here also, so we have Hg* 9 as **TTP^ 5TOPI U Why do
wc say 'short «r* ? Observe tyrant Here there is neither f^ nor ¥^ a
These two affixes fft and s^ do not come after words of one syllable,
after words ending in kpt-affixes, after words denoting genus (j&tiX and when
the constuction is that of locative. As ^ and *sr form only t*rar*t sm^fl Kpt:
as,*snsiTOlli Genus, as, cqnrar*, ftrf^U Locative; as T^T STTOT sfo=- <FT-
**ft vm II There are, however, some exceptions to this, as kfit: — qnf$3,3iTffcip
*!#$ W&ffT- « Genus G*ti) :— qpgfo*, wqfitotf II
T%: 11 tftaiEw mflrrtl*** *fi*3i Whr *wSr *ro$f m
116. The affixes ini and than come in the sense
of matup, after the words vrihi &c; as well as the affix matup.
Thus #f|* (nom. jfttf), rfh^H, Jft$HF* *nft. mfoft. totcp* n
' These two affixes, however, do not come after all gftarft words. Accord-
ing to Patanjali, the affix fi% comes after ftnsrft sub-division, and the affix
f^iH after ^TORTR sub-division, after the remaining words, both %jft and s^
(-1^) come. The ftrcnft after which *ft only comes are:— I ftrar, 2 tost.
3 jEfaTi 4 qrarar, 5 , n^r 6 4brr. 7 *sraT» 8 *re^r, 9 Tctrrt. 10 srss, 1 1 ^r$^» 12 far, n
Themrcr? &c. are the following 1 qrctt, 2 fnrft, 3 tt; they take j^ only.
The rest take both. The word rfHf will get these affixes by the next sfitra
also, why is it then read in this class? The word jftfif in the Tundadi dass V.
2. 117, does not mean the word-form sftfo but words synonym with it Thus
W5§rsw Sf%-*m5?*, *rnft f snfcqr- , *nfaHT* ll The word tf$ preceded by the
negative particle, takes these affixes, as arcfftf and mflftfctt* II The remaining
words are rftfy, irit, OT3T. 3faJT> *frfc $gT, 4r9T W
fftr. u 5^nrft*^ : wRmlwi** f**^ *<h«Ji *to% i^5r 1 ^sroflfas^ig^^ri
117. The affix ilach (^) also comes in the sense
of matup, after the nominal-stems tunda &c.
Digitized.
^CaQgle,^
£k. V.Ch. il.§. il$ j • inC» TjjS
■ -*■ ■— — — -*
The force of <? is that fPr, z* arid ijg^ also come. As %fam* S^ffc
^1^*:, <j^r^. Similarly s*ft«**, s*€h 44R*:, 3?rorat *.
The following is the list of gp^rft words I g**, 2 $f*t f 3 ft^T, 4 q?r t
5 **, 6 jfif?, 7 w r ftifiU^ft ^r 11 That is to say, the affix f^r comes after words
denoting parts of one's body, when the largeness (ftffa) of those organs is
implied : as R<j>Tr $F*ft *TC?l ^f'-qii^irt:, qtfi, ^iffap, SFTO^, U .
118. The affix %h&ft (± — fc%) comes always in
the sense of matup, after a stem, which in composition is
preceded by n^ or ifr II
Thus IWrtlSHWlftrf -qsfrefift?: ; »faim3P , *TraWS ; • • " 1
The word ^Rf: of V. 2« 1 j 5, is understood her"d also ; so that, stems not
ending in 3? are not governed by this rule, such as S^flmlriwufef, no affixing.
The wordVMiR* 1 : is an apparent exception, it being formed by adding vsr to
the samftsinta word q^prpr (V. 4. 92). How do you explain farqtffeg: formed by
^from ifircroft? Here TfrqR* is taken for qrarffc both being synonyms. (N. B.
This opinion of the K&Sika-author is not in harmony with that of Patanjalf,
Who does not read the anuvritti of 3Tcp into this sfttra. According to him Hfar-
*f^T is formed from «TRRrft; and fpfrftSTPT &c, do not take this affix, because ft
is against usage. But the author of K£sika says— *TT»* ^nr W&idfai ; ^fmTT-
•1WI1 f$ra*ra*ra— the anuvritti of tup must surely be read, for the sake of sQtras
like V. 2. 128, though in the sQtras, like qiqifiquim f &c there is no
necessity of reading the anuvritti of mp) II
The word PicHH. • always', is used in the sfitra to indicate that 1^ does
not come in the alternative. In all the previous sQtras ijg^ came in the alter-
native. How do you form iptr***^ in i^MM^n ? This is not a correct
form ; or it may be said to be a compound of ipff and gmqm^ 11
119. The affix ^hafi comes in the sense of matiip,
after the words £ata and sahasra, when they follow after
nishka.
Thus PiWiAWHWiRrf «%c5*roiW> sreragfefr 11 fiut not so after gqftf-
ft***ld> it being never so found in usage.
*yKi*dM*i«^iii &• 11 q^crft ll «qrat *ns<x f vtarafc, *n*»
m f ■ rr — ,---,--.„.,„.._.-. DiqitoGLto V^ QOg U
3)39 iWh \ " [.Bk. Y. Ch.IT. §!2i
*lRt«hH> W TOirt S^t^tfl C^RIfRr * s iTORl *
120, The affix yap (5) comes in the sense of
matup, after the words rftpa, when stamping (coining) or
"praise is denoted. \
Thus *Wf$ ^TOl-S^fr tffTC: "a Dinara having stamped on it the
form of some king &c\ w&F %*TO f ^t skt^Mt^ . Similarly ira^T VJHbqiftri -5^l :
j^p 'a lovely person*. The form impressed on a din&r &c by hammering &e, is
palled w^r or stamping.
Why do wc say • when stamping or praise i$ denoted ?■ Observe w-
^ , having form'.
Vdrt: — The affix n^ !s seen after other words also, as ffy*W qristtv
qjfip 11 wdi»ifl}mfaM*mAi ^iw ^5 f£ul*w RPn *r*Ftt *T*ri% k*p$ 11
121, After a stem ending in sns^, and aftep mftyft,
Xnedhft and sraj, comes the affix vini (firaO in then sense of
'matnp.
Thus *mt— wfi< tRWL— wrffc*n «rorfH» WH *F**« The
word HHjr being Included In tftaTft class, will take fft, and ** also V, 2, 116.
% ^ftp 11 c^ftr ft^c ■tfpi ftPn nuwt *m<l hm^ i • i
Mlfri*H.M tf*<% RPUMWfll ^|{|)U5l<4ll3l'UI44lltM4Hi #$** Vet *rR*m W
; qrf%^L» M*frfllWJ Wlu *?• ii g^rm^^rro^pr^ h m* n ^i^i^ihk****^ n
. *r« 11 Am^ng^TO* BinOTSP*^ 5 * 1 11 *r* 11 ^rsr ^Kdtic) f^ra^ n
m* 11 ^st^T^ u st* m qmrergg ** 11 *r« n TOTfa?K*f **g««p it
m* 11 *nftwn% ifM^sw b
122, In the Chhandas, the affix yini is added
diversely in the sense of matup.
As f^f^rfl^ll Sometimes it is not added, as Q<$ rfaplll
* : V&rt:—\n the Chhandas, the final *? of jpi, *** and 5** is lengthen-
ed' optionally before npr ; and it comes after *TgT, "*HH<sr and **IT also: as
sqjHVi TOHl^h Vfi$$t TTO*Ct, if^lltt SfsiFft H
VJrf : — So also after irf, as *rtHt »
Virf : — Always after «rpra t in the sacred as well as secular literature*
As**PWft li . ■ , ....... j . .. ■
•-
Coasle=
-Pi y i tLuJ U) VjOQQ
[B*. V.Cn. II. 1 15^ 1 uroand.meg W»
Vdrt .-—The affix mm< comes after ^qf and ^f; as yiv*i, l^ 1 ^ 4 *
FJr/ ;— The affix r^ comes after to and 9$; as qrfftft and *fj* a
K4r/:— So also after ***; the affix «9|3 comes optionally/ as, f^njC
**#,Wfoir-,WTO5 The^ismbyl.3.7. *
K4/*.-— The affix sn^ comes after tfhr, i«r 9 and yr, in the sense of
not being able to bear that As <htm ww=ffffcng* •shivering from coldi
Vdrt:— So also after f|* comes the affix qg in the above sense : as
Vdrt : — The affix 3^T^ in the same sense after **?; as %tf n H^- W^r-«
Vdrt:— So also after *nr ; as ?rniFff «2JPi or *rt * «$r - TO?P »
K4r/; — The affix fr* comes after q$ and TOfc As fin: and h^T H >
F4r/ : — The affix tf% comes after 9p$ in the sense of 'not having that 9 ,
as wlfi 'a beggar, who has not artha or wealth 1 . Otherwise »rf!IRt '1?^. AU
these are obtained by wjf** II
123. The affix g^ is added to &sft in the sense of .
matup, (in the Chhandas). \
The 5 of 3^ makes the word apuf a *j (1. 4* *6); the result of which is
that rules applicable to* Bha do not apply; e. g. VI. I. 148, by which the final f T
or f, 9T or btt is elided Thus WSP M According to some; 5^1$ is to be read
in this sAtra. The author of SiddhAnta Kaumudt says that this is reasonably
for if yus is added to br%k in secular literature also, then there was no neces-
sity of this sfltra. The word fir&& could have been read along with aham
and gubham in V. 2. 14a :
^frP U IT^nK^PHPr: V3TO H*l% 1**?f I
124. The affix gmini (faj) comes after the word %
vftch, in the sense of matup.
Thus *r*ft, *lf*r^, *rF** J. The affix is not ft^, for had it been so, the
form would have been qntf%\ by VI 1 1. 4. 45 VArt
125. The affixes Alach («ra) and A^ach («nf) come
in the sense of matup, after vftcb, the word denoting *a
talkative 1 .
Digitized by
W . ifir ti [ Bk. V. Ch II. 5. i2$-
This debars fn^ 11 . Thus ^I?r 'garrulous', qrw 1 H .*
Vdrii— These affixes come when contempt is expressed. An orator
C^F»ft) also talks much, but to tfre purpose. He will not be called OTTO* or
126. The irregularly formed word sv&min denotes
'Sir or Lord*. •
The affix bttPt^ comes in the sense of lordship after the word w M
Thus ^H^iftd ^ q^WM^ -reifoU! Why do we say when meaning 'Sir*,
Observe, FOT% II
127. The affix ach (lr) comes in the sense of matup
after the words arSa &o.
Thus BjsffjTT *TO1 ft«l%«9TTO : STO* &c. 11 After a word denoting a mem-.
ber of the body conjes the affix 3r*, when defect is meant As *3??n <?f*renfl& -i
<3V^ , WT M So also after words denoting color, as g^rwirffcc =■$**<*: q** II
1 **l&t> 2 to£» 3 g?^, 4 ^rgt, 5 qft?r f 6 5rt, 7 ^prr, 8 *nsj*, 9 sre (*ra)t
10 qfa, 11 ht** (sim), 12 f^rai, 13 CTgreffrre , 14 ?tifcj. ungftiro; II
IRTOT ^rf% ***** | *r* n w* fm u
128. The affix ini fcj) comes, in the sense of matup,
after a dvandva compound, after the name of a disease, and
after anything denoting £iujt, when the thing is found in $
living being.
Thus Dvandva:-r^?3ft3f^ft 'a wqiqan having a bracelet and a zone',
q <<M^aR^ <a woman having fiankha and nflpqr ornaments*. So after diseas-
es :— z§& 'a leper', f^ref) 'a white leper*. So after names of faults:— qR^ftprf^
tfrWHjfrd Jl
Why do we say ! when found in a living being ?* Observe a*4<tnMI«t
^H a . it The affix, according to a V&rtika, does not come after words de-
moting members of a living body: as, . mftmm^fr il The word mp V. 2. 115,
fs unefcrstood iq this sfttra, so that the affix does not cojne after 3Vords not
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Pic. V, Ch, II. 5. 13O Ift H $4*
ending in it; as ft i mr*<4lR*l 3ft M Though Dvandva compounds &c. ending
in it would have taken fft by V. 2. 115, the repetition of this affix In the
present sftta shows that Dyandv* compounds &c, take only jnf f and not
vqt&c ■>.'''"
fRr: 11 <iMif<toK%u4i*4iiAft : irertr HiRir, *i«*jPi4iH«f ^ s^t« $*n*r4r frf% h
120. The augment kuk (^) comes before jr;
after the words vita and atisara.
The words qnr and gtfqrarc being names of diseases, will take fpf by
the fore-going sfitra ; the present aphorism only teaches the affixing of the
augment. Thus *nraft , gtf grerc^ M Another reading is m<ft«iufl H
V Art :—So also after mire, as RronniftVsW 'the Kubera*.
This is when the words qtn and «TRf^TR denote diseases. Otherwise;
130. The affix ini comes in the sense of matup/
after an ordinal numeral, when age is denoted.
Thus M >H4HiW»fcf fTO ^Wtf *r - R^rfiRt ' fi vc months or years old \ as.
q*T*ft*gul Similarly sreft, ^pft &c. By V. 2. 115 the affix fft would have
come after these words ; the present s&tra is a restrictive rule teaching that
js\ does no come in this sense.
Why do we say tow 'when age is denoted'? Observe, <hnm*
WTTO*P U
timflyw 11 \\\ H <T?rft II tiqiQ w, ^, ( *ft: ) I
J 31. The affix ini comes (to the exclusion of other
affixes) in the sense of matup, after the words sukha &c.
Thus gR*n* nom. m*fr; 5:1^ &c. When censure is implied, then
f^ comes after m^x $ to the exclusion of H&Z, as mft 11
The following is the list of tpsri? word :— . »
9 srt, 10 inftr (Jrfta), n*ffa,i2 $<*, 13 tmift, Hpn*, 15 qur* (uto} 16 *<*\
I7wr*n
y4*n<A4ufiedi*i II WR II *J^rfa II vrrir, sffo, ^milrd i dU sj f ( jfa ) l
ff^ II VfRnPf* JP^jf^T^, H*ifa^ll^lQ4R^|RPt ; IRTO PPP?ft ft .
v^oogie
Digitized by VjOOQ
94> fftr. [BK.V;Cn..Ih3 I3S|
132. The affix ini comes in the sense of matup, .
(to the exclusion of others), after nominal steps ending in
dharma, gtla, and varija.
ThuswnpiPif *rf*-*nrwfcf €wmfta - swnrtt u a wrimftf*nit kto°i-
nwi^idl R **3 R *p&ft n ^Ecirac, arra*, ( fft* ) »
.133. The aflSx ini comes in the sense of matup,
after the word hasta, when a genus is denoted by the word?
fco formed.' *
-Thus q^wlffe T^ffert f elephant '. Why do we say when meaning a ?
*rf% f a genus'? Observe TCramsro *
qftp ir qflwiRPi * irerSr *nf5r *reff qg^flrr ^fjwifl w*fo n
134. The affix ini comes in the sense of matup,
after the word varna, when the word so formed means a
Brahmach&rin.
Thus tftni'aBrahmach4rt'. The first three ^ or castes, who are
entitled to the investiture with sacred thread, and lead the life of a Brahma-
student are so called When the meaning is not of Brahmach&rt we have ^ih^ II
^n ii 5p5Rx |di4*ui<^q: HifSiR^^i fPrs *p*to! *nfir *nr?ftrc ^Jvk spi*fl**j u .
qiftrerct ii fffrrercfr qrtisj^^UHMiKiHqL ii qr«u*4ft?tftrTOPnttt
135. The affix ini eomes in the sense of matup, r
after the words pushkara &c f when the word so formed
denotes a locality.
Thus a^Rufl 'a tank', q^fWfr &c. Why do we say when € locality ' is
expressed ? Observe flM^K TCft M ~~
! Vdrt: — The affix f^ comes after w^ preceded by *T3 or 3^, as qgqfi^
Vdrt — So also after words preceded by qft\ as, tfqfri, M^fiUL t
Vdrt :— So also after vpf when meaning ' not near ' ; as *?f{pj meaning*
mlfcttftUMlm • distant from wealth \ Otherwise vnfani f having wealth '•
!. ' y$ri~~So &lso after a compound ending in vpf, as qrorffr, ftTOPlf B
1 S^K^ 2 TO, 3 TO*} 4 OTFJj 5 53*, 6 «rr, 7 qrf^nr 9 8 fta f V*ft *0 %fa
__; Digitized by
Googk
■ - - - - .->..■»... «^» » . ...... — — —
11 JJTgair, 12 f*rt, 13 wtK H ftrtto 15 m 16 JTO? ( ircra ), 17 ffcw, I8%w, 19
iffim, 20 **•, 21 *rtr, 22 qg*r», 23 stfrV, 24 <nft*\ 25 nrfNiV 26 s?fcf\ ?7 g*c t
28 **tf*5?\ 29 *t**t*\ 30 *raf, 31 *&**, 32 <raff •, 33 *TO. II
136. After the nominal-stems bala &c, comes the
affix matup optionally, as well as ini.
The affix {ft will come in the alternative. Thus *rHT% or^ft (▼.
5T^l) ; ^gT^Tlor mn$ (y. TOirfa) If
1 **, 2 tou*. 3 tow ( TOT* )• 4 **TO* 5 ^m # f 6 ftrar* 7 $3, 8 ^IT*. *9
g**, 10 sgH # , li strip*, 12 «n^nr, 13 *wr, 14 *nlr?, 15 «rqftf, 16 sft«i^ f 17 3% 18
'^ni, 19 fWro, 20 SJT2j*, 21 tff. u
137. After a nominal-stem ending in n^or it, comes
the affix ini, in the sense of matup, when the whole word so
formed means a name.
Thus irf^+*Fr-jrf*jHt+r* (VI. 4. i44)-*Prf*Rl fenmfrrfipft tt So
also tfP^ft II Similarly $fa, frfoft *tlft«ft II Why do we say, € when meaning
a name'? Observe, 3fTCT^, frm* H
sffr* h forfffic H^iiiti w^a^a j> 41^^ qrar * * gw ft g tr inttaft ot vwrr «rc-
ftr | ra*ri
138. The seven affixes ba, bha, yus, ti, tu, ta and
yas, come in the sense of matup, after W* 'water and happiness',
and srn € happiness \
Thus 3T**s f ^W, *5p, SJRtf:, 3F5£, *RP, 4W* f *!***, *I*** f tfij*, Ufa*, ^,
*RT» to* M
The W in 3^ and ^, make the stem, a Pada (I. 4. \6\ the result of
which is that H of ^l and jp* is changed into Anusvlva before these two
affixes by VIII. 3. 23. When denoting a Name, the fotms will be qpq: and
tpq: II
<g£l«ir«Mft$p n ^^ n *Hift b g^f-^i^-^s, «?: a
sfir 11 3^ *i$ *rf* fw$**fr *n sraifr *ro8 iwfr n
M .Goo g le J
-ik. ,
945 3*« [6K.V.CH. II. j. 146
139. The affix bha (*r) comes in the sense of ma-
tup, after tundi, Vali and vafcL'
Thus ffirHi 'having A pfotubefent belly 1 , wfw and *nr*r: H An-
other form is qfm % ; because *f% is included In the Pflm&di class V. 2. ioa The
forms 3R3: &c 9 are Valid by V. ± I \f.
140* The affix yus (3) conies in the sense of
matup, after the word aham l V t and the indeclinable fiubham
'good*.
Thus ?ryy » *mHJm< , •selfish haughty 1 , sprjt-tfcWjUMH 11 'auspicious*,
The ^of g^ makes the words *t3*£and jpn, Padas ; and * is changed into
Anusv*ra (I. 4. 16 ; VIII. 3. 23). See V. 2. I2j.
Digitized by '
Sk. V.Ch. il.§.ii$j • *€» T)3S
- - ■ • 1 ■ m* • ■
The force of ** is that fl^r, zn arid iig^ also come. As gfSjtp, gsfo
gfa^T:. fl»ffl% Similarly 4iRw, S^fo 3?ftSv 4«AHttf
The following is the list of gp^Tf? words I g**, 2 $f*t f 3 f^T*r, 4 **,
5 ^ 6 jftft, 7 HiftlKl^Tl *T M That is to say, the affix f^r comes after words
denoting parts of one's body, when the largeness (ftffc) of those organs is
implied : as fit*** $F*ft *TC*l *r—«w , *i« : i qtf$, <*f<W, «n«w«* M . *
fRr: 11 qth^uftiyjiNi munf^rf^ s^ifc^ «rtftr to^I 1
118. The affix \h&n (+'— fc%) comes always in
the sense of matup, after a stem, which in composition is
preceded by n^ or ifr II
Thus qchUd H^| fid -^qrcrflrtp ; «farfNp, fliWfiMP . . * f
The word «t<t: of V. 2* n 5» is understood her"d also ; so that, stems not
ending in 3? are not governed by this rule, such as H^ftufawufef, no affixing.
The word Ti^*iR^ : is an apparent exception, it being formed by adding y$f to
the sam&sinta word q^prpr (V. 4- 92)- How do you explain frsrqtffeg: formed by
y^from nnra^? Here TfrqR* is taken for ^R^t, both being synonyms. (N. B.
This opinion of the K&Sika-author is not in harmony with that of Patanjalf,
\Vho does not read the anuvritti of step into this sfltra. According to him Hfaf-
Srf^T is formed from nreRrft; and fpirttsrPr &c, do not take this affix, because ft
is against usage. But the author of K4sika says— *TT** ^Rf ffl^J* ; ffrTOTO-
iTwi^C l?nm«4 *ra— the anuvritti of a^j: must surely be read, for the sake of sQtras
like V. 2. 128, though in the sQtras, like qifllfomum i &c there is no
necessity of reading the anuvritti of *r?f *) tl
The word Pran^' always', is used in the sfitra to indicate that 1^ does
not come in the alternative. In all the previous sQtras i|g^ came in the alter-
native. How do you form q*g*nm in q^g^tiFt ? This is not a correct
form ; or it may be said to be a compound of ipff and ffmq<3l«t 11
fr%s 11 HimtiK^^M^ nifa4R*K*^ii?mr **trf nwf 1 St^CTrapravil ft^rcr-
119. The affix ^hafi comes in the sense of matup,
after the words §ata and sahasra, when they follow after
nishka.
Thus PiMiAMHmifcf - VMlftw » sreregfefit H fiut not so after gqftf-
ftcqTCffl, it being never so found in usage.
12
»# :|Aft« v : LBk. Y.CH.ir.§ 12*
iftr; if mwuitUI wg>^4i ^ ^iWM^MiftR»gi4<i^»*Hi|4^«twH,H«i*i>Hqffi *re^ ii
*ll?Wi4l TOirt S^t^tfl c*^nftr * s *otri n
120, The affix yap (5) comes in the sense of
• matup, after the words rfipa, when stamping (coining) or
"praise is denoted, v
Thus *Wf$ W^-S^fr affair- "a Dinara having stamped on It the
form of some king &c\ wnp SftTO, ^ sKreMp*. Similarly ira^r **SlWlftd -*grei :
j^qp 'a lovely person'. The form Impressed on a din&r &c by hammering &e, is
called w^r or stamping.
Why do wc say 'when stamping or praise i$ denoted ?■ Observe w-
mn f having form *•
Vdrt: — The affix «^ !s seen after other words also, as f&m* tftfrf •
U U| R wtwip m
q^n ii •w*dwrtiwR*i*HiAi ^wr $R5 f&£Mv RPn ipsiiir *r*ri% •rapf it
121, After a stem ending in «n^, and after mftyft,
")nedh& and sraj, comes the affix vini (firaO in the sense olf
Wiatiip.
Thus ****— <roft**, Wi— «rafa*u «rorfH» WH *F**R The
wor4 HHjr being Included In tftatft class, will take |ffi, and ** also V, 2, u&
*5& s^ftr n w « f i^ n *s«rc, s^tffcr ( &fo ) R
% ^ftp ii c^ftr ft^c *5<$ ftPn *wrft «ro^ Hsrfr i s
; *rfWlM ifri*ifite*i>*m ii *?• ii fr^RrRtrrroqFTs , h *r* fl ^jK^i^UHivt**-* 1 *' n
. *!• H ^T^fg^TOW fOPlfOTg^Rf^: II *T* II OT «fTO^ ftHH^s 11
^•M^i^nr%u ?ctmi ^nmsgfc ** ii «• ii^^^jwt^i^i R
it* I! *nftwn% iR4^*w ii
122, In the Chhandas, the affix yini is added
diversely in the sense of matup.
As ¥T^f %stf^ U Sometimes it Is not added, as ^pif T^T^L H
Vdrt:— In the Chhandas, the final *? of jpi, *** and f&* is lengthen-
ed' optionally before fipf ; and it comes after *TgT, "fcsffsr and **IT also : as
•rgrfti^i^rfti wrfk 4*i*u«ft, ^srrfV, grotf} w
Vdrt : — So also after irf, as irfrtt ll
Vdrt i— Always after *nro f in the sacred as well as secular literature,
\
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
[B*. V/Cil 111 is* 1 *n* and .me i W*
F<f r/ .-—The affix mm< comes after ^qf and ^5fi as %p^P, |w* » ■
FJr/ .•— The affix r^ comes after to and «$; as qrfftft and *ff* a
Vdrt:— So also after ***; the affix «*ra comes optionally.* as, trap?
W*r Wfirar, WWT5 The^ismbyl. 3.7.
Vdrt:— The affix sn^ comes after tfhr, iwf f and yr, in the sense of
not being able to bear that As <&tr if *W=tffcng* •shivering from coWi
Vdrt:— So also after f|* comes the affix qg in the above sense: as
Vdrt : — The affix aag^ in the same sense after nm; as in* 1 sft - wgj*HI
F4r/; — So also after qnr; as *TOFTT srgjP» or qtf * **lr - TOF » "
Vdrt:— The affix *r* comes after vA and TOfc As fin: and for » >
(^fr/ : — The affix tf% comes after *nf in the sense of 'not having that 9 ,
as wrtf 'a beggar, who has not artha or wealth*. Otherwise *T*fapl 'rich 1 . All
these are obtained by wfftf U
123. The affix g^ is added to gpifir in the sense of .
matup, (in the Chhandas). \
The 5 of 3^ makes the word «^nf a ^ (1. 4* *6); the result of which is
that rules applicable to* Bha do not apply; e. g. VI. 1. 148, by which the final f ~
or i, *r or *tf is elided. Thus 3T*rgp M According to some; s^i$ is to be read
in this sfttra. The author of Siddh4nta Kaumudt says that this is reasonable^
for if yus is added to ArQ& in secular literature also, then there was no neces-
sity of this sfltra. The word fir&& could have been read along with aham
and gubham in V. 2. 14a :
^frP U qi^MmnPHpf: V3TO H*l% «OT^ I T
124. The affix gmini (faj) comes after the word %
vftch, in the sense of matup.
Thus m*$t, qfi*H$t, *rFw. The affix is not ft^, for had it been so, the
form would have been m^ft% by VI II. 4. 45 VArt
125. The affixes Alach («ra) and A^ach («nf) come
in the sense of matup, after vftcb, the word denoting *a
talkative 1 * ...
*--- c
<^OOt
P4J . iftrti [Bk. V. Ch II. 5. 12$'
This debars fn^ 11 . Thus OTTO?, 'garrulous', irq& N
Vdrti— r-Thcsc affixes come when contempt is expressed. An orator
(^T"ft) also talks much, but to tfre purpose. He will not be called *r*ns or
126. The irregularly formed word sv&min denotes
'Sir or Lord*. •
The affix bttPt^ comes in the sense of lordship after the word w ^
Thus gwmftd =* q^ JWHllfe f - reife% W Why dq we say when meaning 'Sir*,
Observe, FOT^ II
*p%: 11 aiim.tSwHiiVv MiRmR*% swro^r *nri^ i^f 11
127. The affix ach (5c) comes in the sense of matup
after the words arSa &o.
Thus H^^ffirf *TO1 ft4j%««n{rcr. *TO* &c. 11 After a word denoting a mem-.
ber of the body coiqes the affix 3T*. when defect is meant As *gpr*; qrerenflf^
mszFi ^fPT M So also after words denoting color, as s rsfrsrarfer ^gW q** II
1 sr^i:, 2 ^, 3 g^, 4 «ergt, 5 qfar, 6 srt, 7 ^rj, 8 tn*j # , 9 are (*?*)*
10 nrH 11 *T*S (3*T»0, 12 t^pi, 13 TOyreffora , 14 W^. STT^fiPF* II
ffrf : 11 fl^s qHiqs i 4<mi3i ^pt: i nft Pt?«i f trft^ra* ^>q? mfawnfarf^rHi fl^l
irerac *reft Wf 1 *r* u sr^ijfnr u
129. Thp affix ini fcj) comes, in the sense of matup,
after a dvandva compound^ after the name of a disease, and
after anything denoting £iujt, when the thing is founding
living being.
Thus Pvandva:-r^,<£4i4t4&;ft 'a wqnjan having a bracelet and a 2qne' f
q ^H^Ruft 'a woman having fankha and nflpqr ornaments'. So after diseas-
es :— $# 'a leper', f^T^f) 'a white leper'. So after names of faults:— q^fprf^
q»l*«ld*fl M
Why do we say • when found in a living being ?* Observe a*4<lnMI«t
^lf: 11 The affix, according to a VArtika, does not come after words de-
moting members of a living body: .as, mftmm^ II The word *nr* V. 2. 115,
fs un4erstood iq this sfttra, so that the affix does not cojne after 3Vords not
\
\
■ Oig i t i iiod .l a^Vj QQQ L€ . .— — ■
J
Bic. V, Ch, II. 5. 13O Ift » 04*
ending in it; as f ^ mrVKR*l lift M Though Dvandva compounds &c. ending
in •?, would have taken ffsj by V. 2. 115, the repetition of this affix in the
present sftta shows that Dvandv* compounds &c, take only jnr f and not
fRr: 11 <tMifttoi<Ai*4iMiiftft : iwir *r^filr» ti<*iftiit*i ^r wt« 9111*?% «i^ft •
120. The augment kuk (!£) comes before jjqr;
after the words vita and atis&ra.
The words qnr and mfami being names of diseases, will take |f«j by
the fore-going sfitra ; the present aphorism only teaches the affixing of the
augment Thus *nraft , H fiwwfl II Another reading is m<ft«H4») H
Vdrl: — So also after prarr, as Rroi^raft VffW f the Kubera*. .
This is when the words ^ra and *T MW denote diseases. Otherwise;
130. The affix ini comes in the sense of matup/
after an ordinal numeral, when age is denoted.
Thus M>Hjj{|!>t4iftcf »fTH.* g^TO *r — R^rfiRt ' " vc months or years old \ as.
q*r*ft *%'• ll Similarly sreft, ^pft &c. By V. 2. 115 the affix %fH would have
come after these words ; the present sfttra is a restrictive rule teaching that
3^ does no come in this sense.
Why do we say ^m 'when age is denoted'? Observe, 4^reTO
HTTO*P U
rtfw ll \$\ H <F?rft n t^qiQ w, ^, ( *ft: ) r
»
J 31. The affix ini comes (to the exclusion of other
affixes) in the sense of matup, after the words sukha &c.
Thus §ft*n nom. g*sfr; yra^ &c When censure is implied, then
f^ comes after H&r, to the exclusion of H$*, as mft n
The follQwing is the list of gonf? word :— . •
ip,2 5*3, 3 gw, 4 3^, 5 btpjt (srnr), 6 «nsr # , 7 **#*, 8 q^or («roX
Digitized by
Googfe-
94> fl% »V I BK. V; Cfl.. II; 3 13SI
132. The affix ini comes in the sense of matup, •
(to the exclusion of others), after nominal steps ending in '
dharnia, Stla, and vanja.
Thus RliMHX trfs-HWTO&f UI^HURrf - AI<lJU|V|4f M m VTfTOftfc^t W^flh
. - .133. The affix ini comes in the sense of matup,
after the word hasta, when a genus is denoted by the word"
fco formed.' *
-Thus «t3tst3ffcr a «ft<ni ' elephant'. Why do we say when meaning a ?
mfit f a genus'? Observe TCftPlSTO II
Sf^P u qdiwiRPi* RsrSfr «iqfir i^f yftifiw ^liflSl^ld *I**1% It
134. The affix ini comes in the sense of matup,
after the word varna, when the word so formed means a
Brahmachftrin.
Thus tffri'aBrahmach&ri'. The first three ^r or castes, who are
entitled to the investiture with sacred thread, and lead the life of a Brahma-
student are so called When the meaning is not of Brahmach&rt we have vfaT^ll
fFr* 11 5p5Rx t^Hii^q: sufttaR%**i fPrs sennit *nfir *wf*H ^fWt sft*fl4it u .
*r* M- iwwrafirf^l u *?• 11 tf^rofir m&n
135. The affix ini eomes in the sense of matup, f
after the words pushkara &c f when the word so formed
denotes a locality.
Thus gc^ifrft € a tank * f q^fWfr &c. Why do we say when € locality ' is
expressed? Observe gcCTOTlt^ft M ~~
1 . Vdrt: — The affix f^ comes after ro preceded by m$ or 3^ as wjwre*
Vdrt — So also after words preceded by *A\ as, tfqfri, s^ftftn*,
fl4#rtftl^H '
Vdrtv— So also after mf when meaning 'not near'; as srfSr^ meaning"
1 distant from wealth \ Otherwise snfan* f having wealth '•
Vdrt: — So also after a compound ending in «nf, as qrarfr, ftrontf tt
1 S^K^ 2 to, 3 TO*} 4 OTFJj 5 53*, 6 «rr, 7 lrf%*Tj 8 firer, V*ft *0 %fa
\
Digitized by
*#^ ">•*.».-.« ~ ***,., _-*. J.-* . ^
Sic.y,Cn. n/f.13* \ **" S44
tiiTHi'in t rf r*
11 jjrgit, 12 ftnt, 13 *tfK u ftrtto 15 wm, 16 jm? (ircra), I7ffc«*,l8%w, 19
*WR, 20 **•, 21 atir, 22 qg*r», 23 stfw*, 24 <nft*». 25 HTtfNiV 26 «ttn*,' ?7 J**;
28 **tf**f\ 29 «m?t* # , 30 9*ap 9 31 9JTO # # 32 <row», 33 TOT. II
136. After the nominal-stems bala (fee, comes the
affix matup optionally, as well as ini.
The affix {ft will come in the alternative. Thus Vnr^ or^ft (▼•
*m) ; **mwi or sramfr (v. totto) if
l *&, 2 «ctii^, 3 33?rar ( *scr* ), 4 s^ra*, 5 ^ra* f 6 ftrar*, 7 $h, 8 ^ir^t *9
g* # , 10 seh # , li sTRjpr, 12 «sript, 13 ;rwr, 14 *nlr?, 15 «nftf, 16 qft^, 17 jsk, 18
SOT, 19 fb*3TW^ 20 jtr^ 21 **. II
137. After a nominal-stem ending in n^or *r, comes
the affix ini, in the sense of matup, when the whole word so
formed means a name.
Thus irf*l^+*Fr-jrf*TO+ri (VI. 4. 144) "-9M** fennfrrf»nft U So
also tfP^ft II Similarly $fa, frfofr, gftfoft II Why do we say, € when meaning
a name ' ? Observe, 3frcn(, fOTFt II
*5hP?f w^i^fgpnro: II \\* n q^rft H *-sropmi f q-w-31^-5-
PcT'i^ri
138. The seven affixes ba, bha, yus, ti, tti, ta and
yas, come in the sense of matup, after W* 'water and happiness',
and srn € happiness \
Thus qr**s, 3jw, *y, wtfht:, 3F5£, *rsn, «tWi *&***• *i***i tfcfo ufo *, w,
tRn, to* 11
The *f in 33 and 35, make the stem, a Pada (I. 4. 16X the result of
which is that H of ^l and ^p* is changed into Anusvlva before these two
affixes by VIII. 3. 23. When denoting a Name, the fotms will be qpm and
m*m II
tf^T* M 3^ *l$ ^ft !&$**& *P JTO^t «TO8 iwfr II
digitized by VjOO^LC
945 5^« [fcK.V.<jH- II. j. 146
139. The affix bha (*r) comes in the sense of ma-
tup, after tundi, Vali and vafci/
Thus UP** 'having A pfrotubefent belly 1 , wfw and *TW M An-
other form is qftOT*, because *f?j is included In the Pdm&di class V. 2. 10a The
forms gf^<: &£, are Valid by V. ± 1 \f.
140. The affix yus (3) conies in the sense of
matup, after the word aham i V i and the indeclinable gubham
•good 1 .
Thus «Tfy - mfolWi t 'selfish haughty', 5*5: -sawiPTO* II 'auspicious*,
The ^ of jr makes the words *t**t and Tpr*. Padas; and * is changed into
Anusvfltra (I. 4. 16 ; VIII. 3. 23). See V. 2. 123.
Digitized by VjOOQLC
BOOK FIFTH..
Chapter Thikb.
1. The affixes taught from this aphorism forward
as fax as V. 3. 27 (exclusive) are called VibhaktL
The affixes herein taught do not change the sense of the word, L e,
they are wnf affixes which leave to the word their own denotation, the rule
IV. I. 82, extends no further than this, hence the words formed by these
affixes do not produce epithets connoting the sense of the primitive and denot-
ing something else.
Thus V. 3. 7 declares, that after the words ft* In the ablative there b
the affix tff%^, as $*p, «*:**: N
The purpose served by designating these affixes as Vibhaktl Is (a) to
debar the elision of final «*and « of the affixes as ^ (I. 3. 4). Thus In the affix
JPfkV. 3. 18, *is not VL, had it been so, rule I. 1. 47 would have applied: (b)
to regulate the accent of «*, thus R*+nftpi-tf« here by VI. 1. i/r, the
affix gfta. becomes udatta by virtue of its being Vibhaktl, othewlse the accent
would have been regulated by the indicatory ^ (VI. 1. 193); (c) to make
applicable to these words the rules of aroft that is, the rules given in the Sutras
VI 1. 2 102 and those that follow. Thus «^+ !utte-«W, the f being replaced
bytrby VII. 2. 102. - .
a Th e affixes now to U ^"S 11 ' Wng-rtfti«, the anuvp'ttl of" wrfm*
and gtrox of IV. i. 82, does not apply to them. The word *r of IV. 1. 83
however applies here, so that these affixes are optional, thus we may have ff*
orTOn^,5*or«ftr*«.
13
n iai «,.Hh„(-.nno|p ^
—
I
947 **» [ Bk. V.CH. III. $ 5
ffxT ii jjiPw ffinr i f^rc* ti^m*nl *3*iHra *nFw* ironr^fiRrafi i
2. These Pr&gdiSiya affixes come after the word
kirn, and after a stem called sarvan&ma, and after bahu ; but "
not after dvi &c.
The words ff &c, though cr^VPf are exempted Thus $*, ^h qtp»
Why do we say «T5JTT* f not dvi &c f . Observe grant, JPfr* M Why do
we say f%n &c? Observe f^ffit, ftf &c The word f^n, is a S^TTO,
but it being included in the dy&di class, would have been exempted from the
operation of this rule had it not been separately mentioned.
Vdrti — The word w% here is a SankhyA. Therefore, the affix does
not apply here, *$: qjraj, *fr qgr R
s^w x*l ii $ ii **%rft n c^pr., to, n
3. For idam, there is the substitute r^ (*)> when
a Pr&gdiSlya affix follows.
The word inf*?*P is understood here also. The ^ of m is indicatory
of the substitution of the whole (I. i. 55). Thus TO+* V. 3. 11, -If R
u^cft ^itj nan i^nfa n ***r-^, <-*$& n
ffir* r l^raro^ mtMfft s*ft tot w* qnareftsh *ro • rtmr* 1 f
4. The substitutes qsr and f?r come instead of
idam, when a Pr&gdiStya affix beginning with *c and *T respec-
tively follows.
This debars (qu The.«r in * is for the sake of euphony. Thus !**+
ff*~ Wff (V. 3. 16) ; ra+*5-n?re(V. 3. 24).
^dj^H ■ H n q^Tft n na^:, «t^x ■
ff* r infarct 1 wft irfNtfft <rcSt sftrsrorfWr *ro% 1
5. The substitute ^r comes in the place of *&%
when a PragdiSiya affix follows.
The ^ of bth causes the replacement of the whole (I. 1. 55). Accord-
ing to Patanjali the substitute is «**and not *T^R Thus WT+*«P*-Bnr* V.
3.7; *mV, 3. ia
Vdrtx— This sfltra must be divided into two *n*, and «T^, the mean-
-Digitrzed-by
-Google
Bk. V. Ch. III. § ia J ft S**
Ing being, (i) The substitutes qw and %n come In the place ofq^when
affixes beginning with ^and *r respectively follow, as qff^+nN- *mf (V. 3. 21)
*TC + *TI - f*** tt The * must be the ^r of «J1 which comes after idam (V. 3. 24)
for the application of this rule (i), and not the tf of ^(V. 3. 23) before which
the substitate will be 1*3 II The word j&i will take q$ by the implication of
this rule. (2) The substitute *r^ replaces ipj£ before other Pragdifiya affixes.
6. The *r is substituted opionally for H# before a
Pr&gdiSiya vibhakti beginning with ^ I
Thus sfo or s*T II When the affix is not PrAgdiitya, there is no
substitution : as, ta$ TOfir-SRST *TOI*fr ' a BrAhmanl who gives all 9 .
U>x4^4|^dUHI<^ It V^ II M^lT«l B M^^W|2 f dl^|o^l
qf^fs II T^THp%Hi: f*(J?HIH^5^4^lftlrH«45l HWI% I
7. The affix ( — 1*^$ comes after the word kirn, a
sarvan&ma, and bahu, when ending in the ablative case.
As f%*+srf§3-$+w^(VIL 2. 104)-$*:, us*, hit, *!*: «
<r§w n * H 5^iR II ?rcfc, ^ II ^
8. The affix tasil ( £<rac) is substituted for a*^
(V. 4, 44, 45) when kim, a sarvan&ma, and bahu follow.
Thus $*., *&:, SHP, or W5?f simr- II This substitution is for the sake
of accent ; and for giving it the designation of vibhakti.
ffa* 1 *ft *rfa inform? *ifii<i iwSlr *nRi n
9. The affix tasil comes after pari and abhi also.
This affix comes when qft means • all f ; and btpt means ' both 9 . Thus
<*ft<r- - SPRi: ; • all round '; *tpt*P, **TOT: 'on both sides \
^Pt* 11 f*y5niH^s*«i: cnraRtas ^ irerar ^rcftr 1
10. The affix tral ( — i^r) comes after kim, a sar-
vanama, and bahu, when ending in a locative.
Thus$* (VII. 2. 104) • where \ ir* (VII. 2. 102) • there \ *pr 'in
many places 9 .
vtfi *} 11 u n qr^rft n r**r. f r- >
Digitized by
{jOC*
Ji-
949 i» [[Bicy.CH.1rr.sif4
11; The affix * comes after %&t ending in the
locative.
This debars w$ II Thus if (V. 3. 3.) 'here*.
fori* s<* n ** n vprfk n for. *<* «
fi%* u fey uwm»qnen<qii > <wf» i < Rfe^nr t ^
12. The affix z^n (st) comes after kim ending in
the locative. -
This debars ^ u Thusi^+«T^-$ + «?(VII. 2. ios)-*as ff*rtw%
1 where will you eat '. g»lQra% I According to some ^ also comes, as fg% 11
This is done by drawing the word m ' optionally ' from the next sfltra. So
that this sfltra becomes an optional one.
*t * ^d^fa n w n q^ h *ir, s, % *mi$ n
iRr* u fe*n uhhmiv f « n<swi *raft *?«?& ft^i 1 mrrcrt? ^ 1
13. Optionally the affix 5 also comes in the Chhan-
das, after the word kim in the locative : as well as the
other affixes.
Thus 59 (VII. 2. 104), «, 5*. As in Rig Veda VIII. 62. 4 : gtftg*
^M J H^ : $# ^N toj: II 'Where are ye two? Where are you (or did you)
going ? Where do you fall like eagles ?*•
14. The above affixes are seen coming after kim,
a sarvanama and bahu, ending with other case-affixes also, '
besides the locative and ablative.
That is to say, the affixes 3^3, fr^, f &c come after kim &c which
are not in the ablative or the locative case. By the employment of the ex-
pression 'are seen', it is hinted that this may take place not on every occa-
sion, but only when in juxtaposition with such words as npr«j[ • Your HonorY
4ta?3F • long-lived \ mym< 'having long-life', and ^nripR 1 ' the beloved
of the Gods'. Thus: 4
Nom. f(3t??^nortpr *TOFl SB 9*raT^II
Ace. ITf H^^HLOr TOt H^^T«l,— ^T H^^R.11
ins. tm qn>n or TOt xr^cn > «%^ *ranr w
Dat. ir^^%or^>r^-^*n% 11
Gen. irift iron w m **w ~qm **w 11 v
Loo. fmr^Rr or^?f ^rf^-^ft^^^fir » .
■- w; ^/fMu>.^ -b *
Digitized by
; Google
:Bk. V. CH. III. J 19] fm 95*
Similarly with the "words 4Nt3* 9 tnj^RRl and **nf POT II . :~i
«^*l^4f^^xl4: W§T 3T II IH H M^lA n ^i qfli, *F*T f fan, *nfc
15. After sarva l all ', eka ' one \ anya « other * f
kim ' what \ yad ' which \ and tad ' that \ when time is de-
noted, conies the affix ^t, the words being in the locative case..
The word *nran V. 2. io is understood here and not the word f^p^t
of the last This debars m$ II Thus s*Nr orinr (V. 3. 6) *at every time*
or • always \ q^r 'once', u\*m\ ' at another time \ 3tf (VII. 2. 103) • when \ to
1 when ', inr * then '. .
' Why do we say qrfk * when time is denoted ' ? Observe 9*TOr (where
although the case is the 7th, the affix is not V, because the sense is) • in every
place ' or * every whei e '•
16. After idam c this', ending in the locative case,
comes the affix rhil ( — XffO, when time is denoted
The words ot*3T: and 5rt% are understood. This rhil debars ha. The
5 of ffo is for accent Thus stRj^ SRT%«q<rff (V. 3. 4)/ at this time*. Why
♦when time is denoted'? Observe, \$ 'in this place V as f*^*U See V. 3. 4.
*v$*tt II *v* II q^ift n vregn K
?f% : ii «T*Frf«r frrrsfit 1 i&t s^r*rrtr g^rr ^ to** V*
17. The word adhuna is anomalous, haying the
same sense. . .
As STf^^TH-ST^TT € at this time'; *r|j is substituted for f^ and, yr
affix is added.
• • . • •
^nft ^ h t< 11 vwfa n 3T*ta, «r 1 . '
y%? 11 wy qMm«di*hft q^HH i <i«fc ireret *n(ftc t *
18. The affix d&nim also comes after idam, end-
ing in the locative, and denoting time.
Thus sift** ^1%-nnfK (V. 3. 3) « at this time*. ' ' ". " "
^r^r^n^ii qrn^iiicf^:,^,^ b ..
19. After tad, ending in the seventh case, when
time is denoted, comes the affix ^T, afid &lso dfa'fcft'-*?-' '—*'. :
)igitized by VjOOQ 16
9$i
ffatt [ Bk. V. Ch. III. $ 2%
The tpft*Is read into the sfltra by force of the word ^ *also\ Thus
nf&* snfc-inr or**?** € at that time V This sfttra, so far as it ordains *r
after the word ifl[ *» useless, because the word AT already takes tff by V, 3. 15.
trarhc?r3&t ^s^!% n ^o ■ <wprft n x$t: f v$ ft^» % u^fe n
20. After these two (nominal stems idam and tad),
come respectively the affixes dft and rhil, in the Ohhandas,
and also the other affixes.
The affix *r comes after nn.and ff after *xi H Thus f*r (V. 3. 3), «rff
(VII. 2. 102). So also nrffa and fRPffetl AsWft JS'H^ROT SPtrt S*k4
(Rig Veda VIII. 27. u>
^Hiwlr fife ipswr Mq«HW<wuL 1
21. The affix rhil (_J.fi) comes optionally,
in denoting time not of the current day, after the words
€ kim, the sarvanftma, and bahu &c/ in the 7th case/
The anuvptti of ®*fm is not read into this sfttra. This is a general
rule. Thus srff or ^r (VI I. 2. 103), *ff or u*r, aff or HfT II
X&W-, «nt^:, ^nsRW, ^nraf ., sixK^r: H
Ufa 1 shwit: ssrafft q^% 1 ot-.ipjfwotst Pmw^f *$finfnra nftat gsmPfiretfft
22. The following words are anomalous : sa-
dyah, parut, par&ri, aishamas, paredyavi, adya, pdrvedyus,
anyedyus, anyataredyus, itaredyus, aparedyus, __adharedyus f
ubhayedyus, and uttaredyus..
The words TOTOT: and qnH are understood here. The base, the substi-
tute, the affix, the paticular time &c, must all be deduced from these forms.
Thus «H: is formed from *THPTt by substituting ^ for sr*fpr, and adding the
affix «nr; in the sense of 'a day'. MHH^M ^?: ' the same day '. The *$
and vfcrc are replaced by qt, and then the affixes gr<t and snft are added, in the
sense of 'a year'. Thus ^TTOT^ tfqraft»TC«l 'last year', j$tft tfo*rc = TOTC
1 the year before last*. The w replaces n*, and affix ot** is added, in the
Digi.tized.by
Google _
BK. V. Ch. III. § 25. ] *%* 9S*
sense of • year f . Thus iTfon ttTOt =»^TO * during this year *. To m h added
quit in the sense of • a day ' : as, MiRHMfft -frrift • the other day*. The *W
replaces n* and the affix fflf is added in the sense of • a day*. Thusuftw
Jft -HH ' to day'. To the words & v&f, «T*iRK, flR, STO WO VW and TOC is
added the affix ff^^, in the sense of 'a day' : as yRHmtft - fflfflC ' on the day
before', «FqR»m#r-«T^? 'on the following day*. iFHiffftWfft - TWRftg:
•on either of two days'- wtffcrasft-ftffcg: *on another day*, tmfemfft-
wpfta: « on the following day \ * W(frimR -grqftg: 'on a previous day*. Vf-
^R^r: - WR?: * on both days '.
ffrP I £mj2mI*H j*3r Sfqrf^l ffifr »Nl% • *!*•««* WRTfft R^MHI U1HIAIHI ft jNl ^it^»
23. The affix thai ( — lut) comes, after the words
kim &c V. 3. 2 f when we speak of a kind or manner of
being.
The sfltra V. 3. 2, Is to be read into this. The anuvpttf of cnran and
qn% ceases. The word q^K means the differentiating quality distinguishing
a species among the genus: it means 'sort 1 , 'kind', 'mode', 'manner' &c-
Thus^sfiraTW-fPIT 'so, in that manner'. Similarly m, *&m M The affix
strtrI, taught in V. 3. 69 has also the same force, with this difference that j4-
tiyar applies to words which denote things possessing such a quality ( n^KlH„
while th&l denotes mode itself. Therefore, one does not debar the other, so
that we have forms like traratfta:, and qqnmfty •
^^rog: n vi « q^r n %%*:, **& a
24. After idam comes the affix thamu (*m) in
the same sense i. e. in denoting manner.
This debars m?; thus: 9ftHTOTb>r-fKPl V. 3. 4, 'in this manner.
The ? in *J3 protects the n from becoming fij (See I. 3. 4.)
25. Also after kim, comes the affix thamu in the
sense of manner.
Thus qpr infiOT « ^n f how ? '.
Digitized by
951 *maw3t* f bk- v. ch; n i: % 2ff
: -'.".— -."-■-* ^6/ The affix ni comes in the sense of 4 cause ' •
also (as well as; ' manner '), in the Chhandas, after the word'
Jam.
. The word irjt^ ^ft is read into the sfttra by force of ^ u Thus swr.
wherefore ? yrhy ?. for what reason ?\ ^niT 'how'. The. former is an example of
fj 'reason or cause 9 , the" second of jt^k 'manner'. As in the following
sentences : qr^T^ ^ ^5to=^t^tt *rt «c ^sftr 11 snrrl'CT **ra*snft*i w .
Here end the affixes having the designation of VibhaktL
ifrT. i f$vi w ft^s^T J %**ir fi«5jU*?^T R*34Nil3*l ^tWA**: UH*fl4^*il. ipwi^r
21. After words of 'direction*, ending in the .loca-
tive, ablative and nominative, and referring to 'direction',
'locality 1 or 'time 1 , comes the affix ast&ti (<M*tfl<0, without
change of sense. * •
The word f^^r^x: means Svords denoting directions 9 . Thusgrom^
has all these three significations in the following sentences, ^miWlffi *he Hvej
eastward', grernnnp 'he came from east* JCWHC wfNft. 'It was delightful pre*
viousl/. Similarly with BT^tfr^ U
Why do we say 'after words of direction? Observe qpEjf ftftr TOfif II Why
do we say 'ending in the locative, ablative and nominative' ? Observe t^,
ilTH T^s II Why do we say when the sense is 'a direction', 'a locality 9 or 'a
time'? Observe qjifVH gfr TO1<! 'he lives in the presence of the guru*.
This affix is a **rf*N? affix, like the affixes taught previously. The
words denoting direction must be primitive words of direction; and not de-
rivative words like q?jft &c. which also denote direction. The rule ofqqtfm
does not apply here.
28. After dakshinft and uttara* (referring to a
direction of a locality or a time, and ending with locative,
ablative or nominative) comes the affix atasuch («r^0 U -
This debars s rcq i ft II The word qfiFW can never refer to time, so with
regard to it direction and locality are only taken. Thus *f$f*mt TOft, Vffiftw
«rnnn, *firosftWfa*M 4*u5iqqfi f, srrnr stpot, *rcroirnpffa*M * The «? of «nr^
is for the sake of differentiating this affix from ff^in sfttras like IT. 3. 3a J
Digitized by
Googk
Bk. V, Ch. hi. 5 32. ] trenft r 954
29. Optionally after para and avara, comes the
affix atasuch, in the sense of ast&ti,
^Ir&M ** « *uft 11 *^p, 5^ ■
30- After words of direction ending in eis^, there
is luk-elision of the affix ast&ti.
Thus sn^or jw^; as, unaff Rrtr TOft=UT*£ TOfa inrnnp, ypMtag i
The feminine affix of muftis also elided, when the taddhita affix is elided by
g^ll See 1.2. 49.
^MJMltto^ mt II q^ 11 ^rft -4Mftmci B
31. The word upari and uparishtat are anomaloua
in the sense of ast&ti.
These words are derived irregularly from the word itf, by changing
it into st, and adding the affixes Rw and ftnfijwil Thus trcfcif ftfrTOft
"^R toRt So also ?rofrnr:, wftfjpfarcji vritenrafir, 3qfter*nnn, ^MRgfinuflmm
<rsrrac n ^ n q^rft 11 qarrac I
ffrrs 11 <n*Tftora tott f^mq^ s*?mft$ 1 *nwi wir* *nfirw jtwr: t
*rf*ra*» ftoyjMmmm <nrorcr m&v, mftrw v«ot u
*r» 11 f%*rrft fmsf <prortr ***«*: u
32. The word pagch&t is anomalous, in the sense
of ast&ti.
The word is formed by changing «m into <nr, and adding the affijc
F4r/:— So also when «m is preceded by another word denoting
direction, it is changed into paScha and Ati is added. As *fim*nj, ^rfm^ It "
Vtf r/ :— So also when *nj follows such a compound, apara is changed
into pafcha ; as, #i^, ??itot$ U *
Vdrti— Apara is changed into paJcha, when followed by ardha, and
not preceded by any other word. As, *n*re* II " ' ~ ' r '
^ wwr^a ^rim ^^Tf^iiwr f q»rr f ^ f 5^ftr 11
14 -
^^^^^Dicjitized
d b v Google
>x
951 9H%* [Bk. V. Ch. III. | 36
33. The words paScha and pa£ch& are anomalous
in the Chhandas, having the force of ast&ti.
By % the word Wfif is also included. As ja **rafr ^WRwr, <P*» W or
TO* ftft M As **m S UshluilflUm (Rig Vcd X. 87. 21) s*nF*tf*2*l*K
(R. V. X 149. 3>"
^tI<im<^^iuikiicI : ii vi n ^rrft it ^nrt, **rc, ^ftnirnj, «nflr n
fftn 11 ^UMiifiJww*^ *nf3r* tra^t Td% BrorrifaSf 1
34. To the words uttara, adhara and dakshiita is
added the affix &ti, in the sense of ast&ti.
Thus *w&d ftro toRc * ^nrowni ; **rcnPTO:, ^rojwfhwL 11 Similarly
tflhiu$ an< * ^Rr 1 !!?! w
35. The affix enap (5?£) comes optionally, (after
the words uttara, adhara and dakshina, in the sense of ast&ti,)
when the limit indicated is not remote, and when it is not a
substitute of the ablative case-affix.
The affix mdlfi and the other affixes taught above come with the
force of locative, ablative and nominative. The q^ comes with the force of
locative and nominative and not that of ablative. The adverbs so formed
refer to objects not at a distance. Thus nftor or TtTCPI or ^THdl TOflr or w
vfcpl u Similarly srat°T, *TO*nj, *PMslll TOfit & c > so also sfirfa, WT'TTft, qftpnn;
TOfil &c, • He lives near by in the north-ward or southward*. Why do we say
• when not denoting distance \ Observe gvmmfi r ' he lives far away in the
north*. Why do we say • when not having the force of ablative ' ? Observe
TTCnnnn 'come from the north 9 .
~ The word grqs^TP governs all the succeeding sfttras upto V. 3. 39,
exclusive. Some do not read grerc &c into this sfttia : according to them this
is a general rule applicable to all words denoting direction. As sjfa WHKj
•rft^f nmXH. 3- 3 1 )- The T in ena P Js for the sake of acccnt ( III# *• 4>
36. The affix &ch (aft) comes after the word dak-
shiijta, in the sense of ast&ti, but not as a substitute of the
ablative case-affix.
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Hk. v. Cil in. §40} «t*nm« 9$tf
H\
.j. j
The word «rj* of the last sfltra is not read into this : though the word
«I4Vmiiiii governs it Thus *to*it TOf% or crftal, but *ftn*H «nM : » The ^
in «n^ is not for the sake of accent (VI. I. 163) for the simple affix wq would
be udAtta by the general rule III. 1. 3. The ^serves the purpose of differ-
entiating this Btf from other affixes in Sfltra II. 3. 29.
37. The affix &hi (srrnf) comes after the word
dakshina, in the sense of ast&ti, as well as ftch, when the re-
ference is to a distant limit.
Thus fftrrrff TOfa or ?m"iTTOKr 'he lires far away in the south.
Similarly tftrarf? SHOT*, tfm *pftu* «
Why do we say ft 'when tlie adverb denotes a distant limit' ? Obs-
erve *f$PT3T TOflr M The word *HMV«t*q|: governs this also : as, *fe«rcr «fFRT II
^rera 11 ** 11 q^ifa n ^rrrac, ^, (vr^-mft) a
38. The affixes *ir^ and «n% come after uttara
in the sense of astati ; when the reference is to a distant
limit.
Thus ^ro or TiTOft TOfir or crffcra, " He lives far away ii| the north :
or the northward far away is pleasant •*. But when 'distance* is not meant we
have *rft<* *mn H The word «f<J4*4<q|: governs this also : as 3HIU3PT3: «
4*w<n<juiu<i§ srsro^ni n ^ n q^ift n ^-«!vre-«rTO^ira-
39. After pftrva, adhara and avara comes the affix
asi (arc?) in the sense of astftti; and pur f adh, and av are
their respective substitutes before this affix.
T he wor d *n*TOT does not govern this sfltra. Thus j& **%, J*
*TPnr, SH *T<hnui Similarly «n^r and *r*^ with wfir, *n*W* and *pfa*il As
*r3rraffr sny-Bmnr:, BrOrerefaq, gretrofa yr^rnry: and sreftrWfa^ u
sre errfgr ^r « tto fl q^ifo It 3rerri%, ^ 1
ifa 1 ^w^m^tta i ircnfaroft top ?fr$;ri ipnro* sura iritar mi*«
40. The same substitution takes place when the
affix astdti ( <mrfi<Q follows.
7--
Digitized by \jO05
,957 VT n [ Bk. V. Ch. HI. 5 44
That is s^ for *$, *r* for *nn and m for m* u This sfltra indicates
\xy implication that the affix (Httdfi! V. 3. 27 is not debarred by *{*? after these
words. Thusjt!^or*niHlT^or*TO^
41. The substitution of 3ra for sra^c is optional
__ - when ast&ti follows.
This declares option when by last it was compulsory. As mwn<^ or
.mwi^TOfif WW, or mi/Vtai*
42. The affix dh& (vit) comes after a nominal-stem
denoting a Numeral, when it means the mode or manner of
an action.
The word mT and tor have the same meaning. The adverbs so
formed apply to every kind of action. Thus q^ptf 3f% * he eats once 9 , ftm
*l*5ft • he goes twice f . Similarly fipir, ^JT, q^WT II
Bff^o^n^ ^ II *\ 11 MtfiPi n ^i^i*<ui-ftxn^, % ( *ir ) n
43. The affix dh& comes after a numeral, when
the sense is a change in the apportionment or distribution of
substances.
The word jfegrap is understood here. The word ST ^ re ^ means
•matter, stuff, substance', ft^re* 'change in numbers*. Thus to make one
into many, or to make many .in to one. Thus?pftafr T^^T^ 'divide one
heap into five*, nwr 3^; ui^Nitaqr «E* II
, 44. After the word eka the substitute dhyamufl
(+/ — xmt) comes optionally instead of dh&.
., Thusq^Mf uftrj^or ll3ra$*; ?*ren3^%or $3^*3^ D The re-
t petition of qT in the sfltra shows that the substitution takes place when the
.sense is that of firar, as well as when it is that of srfvrejr* fircro II Had ^?
not been repeated, the substitution would have come in the sense of mfi|<Wl
^ ftpin* only, as immediately preceding this sfltra.
j ' . - •
* Digitized by VjOOQLC
.....m....«^ ^-
l >.\
BK.V. Ch. III. 5 48, J «r*r 958
fl% : I ^fT {3T3TO3 I ff*4fri *HP^I TOFTO* ftmififiMiWfalfa ^ WfiTW NUMlWl
45. The substitute dhamufi (+' — >ro) comes op-
tionally, in the place of vrr, after the words dvi and trL
Here also it comes in both the ftqra and tHpjifcim It^B senses. By
% the word ' optionally ' is drawn into the sfltra. Thus ffipff or V^L IW, or
Vdrt : — The affix qr (tfa, with the elision of the final vowel) comes
without changing the sense, afterwords ending in dhamuft. AsV?t Vf, in
TOT f^TFT 'BPWtft wl % } mH flWW H
ffin 1 fcsqf: (nPw3( *iijjhww tpinn^ct ^roRirom^i
46. The substitute edh&ch ( , wr) comes optionally
in the place of dh&, after dvi and tri.
Thus Vir (VI. 4- 148) or Vf*or fitfr, Vff, Vf* or flmr N
47. The affix p&Sap (SIF) denotes something as
insignificant. s '
The word qi^ means 'contempt, trifling 9 &c Thus qpqr %m*wm
" WsKTfqre - 'a very bad Grammarian \ So also qri^rermP M Of course this
will not come in denoting a person who is a good Grammarian, but bears bad
character, or who is a good performer of sacrifices but immoral
qW^TPl d1<4K< II «* II ^T^ H 4<UHdL t Wfr-tffaraC, WJ R
48. After (a nominal stem being) an ordinal
number ending in tiya, comes the affix «nj (1—**), (the word
retaining its denotation), when a ' part ' is meant.
This sfitra is made only to teach accent, for the word to which «pj is
added undergoes no other change of form except in accent Thus fipfrp (V.
2. 54) has udAtta on fft (III. 1. 3) but when «r^ is added, the accent falls
onff (VI. 1. 197). Thus rf^rSr *TO* - ¥ fifaffa: the moiet/. Similarly jpffr f the
one-third'. Why do we say when 'part' is meant? Otherwise, there is no change
in accent The affix ifhr always comes in forming ordinal numbers and for no
other purpose, for the fft* in words like jfjufa is not significant as it is not an
Digitized by VjOOQLC
959 «*u [BK.V.CH. III. § 5 f
i
affix. The employment of the word $c°f in the aphorism is useless for the
purposes of this sfltra. Its anuvfitti, however, runs in the other sfltras, and that
is the only purpose that it serves here.
^IrP I UVII4MI{4M I *JI?N>I4*I*«P <K*4I4(fr»q: <|im<liKU«3'«it *tfit Tfaft»*s CT^f S*
49. After an ordinal numeral upto eleven exclu-
sive, comes the affix qpg, the word retaining its denotation,
when a l part ' is meant : but not so in the Chhandas.
This is for accent also. Thus $$$*, $s^gr:, §rm: f ***:, |*pr: II Why
do we say siHtallW ' before eleven • ? Observe qqffTO ; > *T^h no change of
accent (VI I. 223). Why do we say 'not in the Chhandas'? Observe,
q ***Hl*iPgWUMI*IH<l (s**(H has acute on the final being formed by t?; preceded
by i^V. 2.48,49).
50. The affix iia (+ — n) also comes as well as snr,
after shastha and ash tama, when a 'part* is meant, but not
in the Chhandas.
The words *n*T and mu^fti are understood here. By % the affix «^
is included. Thus fe: or qfai, $ZH: or Jfreip II
^frfS H «Pfp^ I TOTCHPSjf qqTCTS? 3P&*ft <* HTOf ^HSHj^lJU^^IJIKR^irap I TO-
61. After the words shashtha and ash^ama there
may come respectively 5^ ( l—*z) and 5^ elision of the
affix, when the meaning is a division of a measure called m&na
or grain, or the part of the body of a beast respectively.
The word ijpc means a grain weight (sftft Tftfotf &vh). That is to say,
q^l comes after to when a division of hr ' measure ' is expressed ; and g^p
comes after ¥JC when a part of VSJF is denoted. Thus fe^St *rpr: 'a sixth
of a grain measure \ *nf*lf VT*v ' an-eighth part of the body of a beast '. The
^ here takes the place of the affix xy as well as «r^ 11 By ^r, the affixes
above mentioned are also employed : as to : or to : i *TTOTs or *w. 11 When
a measure or the body of an animal is not denoted, this rule (though
optional) will not apply.
Digitized by VjOOQiC
bkv.Ch. hi. 5. 54] *t* u seo
52. After the word eka, comes also the affix &kin-
ich ( arrive), (the word retaining its denotation), when the
sense is 'without a companion \
By the word % the affix qp^and the elision g^f also take effect : the
elision being of ^ or snfttf^ II Thus f g ^iff^h^ ( nom. q^jR» ), VXHi or q^F if
By using gmgHT, it is indicated that the word ^ here is not a nuireral meaning
•one 1 , but a noun meaning 'alone'. q*ft*4ltf JPIR <*, **&, %*% im II cmm^T, SRI%
S^, CTFTOT *T JTIfq% ll So that this word will have dual ^ifon r , and the
plural qqsTftFE II
53. The affix ^^ (with the feminine in sfpj}
comes, after a nominal stem, the word retaining its denota-
tion, when the meaning is 4 this had been before \
The word 53$$ is a compound of *5f and ijir. the compounding being
by g*S<TT, and denotes something done in a past time. Thus *TTWf ^prijf* ■■ *
«TC5Tft: * once opulent'. a^HKMi : II The ^ indicates that the feminine will be in
rf^, as, snsreft II The ^ is not f ^ in «q^ though required by I. 3. 7. This
proves that 55 rule is anitya. The sfitra V. 2. 18 might have been read after
this, with the saving of the word «RfJ*:, but then 19^ would have debarred *mr
which is, however, not intended.
m^iv^ ^ B W B q^rft II tb^t:, *fi: 9 ^ b
54. After a nominal-stem ending in the sixth-
case, comes the affix ^<aj, and also ^T*, in the sense of
4 having belonged formerly to somebody \
The word ^jrjfr here qualifies the sense of the affix, and not the sense
of the base, as it was in the last sfitra. Thus ^**W* 1*3$ ^° W^HW
' the cow that formerly belonged to Devadatta*. Similarly qiSM ^ l II
srftsmiSfr dw^a4t B V\ B qrrft ■ stfcrorcft, <nrr, %s& B
ffas 11 grRPTO*T*rt%OTFt «rai: 1 Rqi*Hnfl4s 1 nt>m<to\M %** 1 *?fircrra*tftWtflr
Digitizedby - ^,
\
961 m<r 11 [ Bk. V.Ch. III. 5 5>
55. When the sense is that of surpassing, there
come the affixes tnr^(*ra) and ^gjj ( 1— US), after a nominal
stem, the word retaining its denotation.
These affixes form the superlative degree. The word srftTOPFT is an
irregular form of VfftRPtf, and it qualifies the sense of the primitive. The
CTffar affixes sometimes qualify the sense of the primitive. Thus «n*RPP
-^0 terror* imflmnRnflHlW 'the richest 9 L e. ' these are all rich, but he
surpasses them all in riches'. Similarly V^HtaOT: € most handsome \ g$*TIt-
ipr: &c Similarly q}— qfcffi, 55— nft**, B^—oft?* (VI. 4. 155). When
among superlatives, further excellence is indicated, then these words may
take additional affixes: as *ta, though a superlative, forms stepp II As^ftw*
fcfcpar II \% R *j^ift II Erf:, ** R
^Np 11 fira r 5?irof«rort% tiri^ w^m*^ •%<*{% n
56. So also after a finite verb, comes the affix
tamap, when ' surpassing ' is meant.
By WIHfllRlMfVhll IV, 1. I whose force runs throughout, the taddhita
affixes are ordained only after nominal stems ; they would not have come
after verbs; hence this sfttra. Thus M^fttHK , (the *nn is added by V. 4. 1 1)
-H?ri%^Rftftt wAmifttA*! *^ft, * he cooks surprisingly*. qyqffiqmH &c
The affix |gn never comes after a verb, as by V. 3. 58, it is restricted to
adjectives.
jfir- ii retofotret firm i fiw^Rggr ffrrey 1 Rm«HW<t 1 gifr fonfr ■frrft uifirT-
R*ifli*Hiwii8qKft a*<ta^»rer&»TW i <mflte«ik«wl > 11
57. The affixes tarap (h*) and iyasun ( _— fcre^)
come in the sense of ' surpassing', after a nominal stem or a
finite- verb, when it expresses (comparision between) two
things, or when that which is added to it (upapada), is to
be distinguished from another.
' The word ft[TOf does not mean 'dual 9 , but means an expression for two.
ftTOI is irregularly formed by *<(. and means ' that which is to be distingui-
shed or differentiated'. This debars fRVandtB^ll The rule of qqiquq (I.
3. 10) does not apply here. First to take an example of ffr«R or when com-
parison is between two things: thus: uftHHIcdlN m«i*M*D<railiH -gnuKTC* 'both
are rich, but he is richer amongst the two*. Similarly y$*UUU', H^RHHUL ,
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
-~UJ.+^Z>-^
BK. V. CH. III. §. 60 ] ft* and fag* « 962
■-■-■■■ — ■ -•*-" - - 1 - 1 ■■ - 1
*«ift<Hi* (V. 4. ii): or with wg*: as, fiftft ^ t grererehiSftfa q^r-yffor*
•more skillful of the two', *4NK n Secondly to take an example of Pnrfk **»*•
^f L e. when a word in construction is to be differentiated: thus «ftgin mtMJt*-
%** grasftW* • The men of Mathuri are richer than those of P4taliputra *•
Here there are more than two things, but as the words atfe expressed in the
sentence! the comparative degree in plural number is used. Similarly t44hf *
*W, tflqfep t Mfalfa: II Of course all these words must be plural, as they refer
to more than two persons.
58. The two affixes beginning with a yowel (L e.
fcre^ and xs) are added only after Words denoting attributes.
The affixes fgsj and fan are restricted in their scope by this sfttra L e.
they come only after adjectives or adverbs, in expressing comparative and
superlative degrees. Thus Hfcflq|< , *$**€*, ^far^ , *fa& ; but not after words
like qr*% &c There we have HlM^W , 'fPftWT: M The word ^f 'only* res-
tricts the scope of the affixes^ and not of \\\z primitives. Thus qj^, <*5^*P
are also valid forms.
^frT: H Jjftfilf f^fr OTHF^PT KWl I MMI*i*»lRr ft^fo «H*H$ R^T& 1W* *
59. These affixes ishjan and iyasun come in the
Clibandas after a nominal stem ending in ^ B
The 3*. is ablative of $ which Includes both js* and §^ll This ex-
tends the application of these affixes to words other than attributes. Thus
arfirtfaf *ftf = *ft* (^f+f^-^+ftfby VI. 4. 154, y is elided). As sffgflr *
**%:, ftforefl $3* M By V4rtika under VI. $. 35, *tfN> is changed into masculine
frftf and then far is added, when $ is elided by VI. 4. 154.
60. For ST^rer is substituted w f when these affixes
ish^am and Iyasun follow*
Though sftfRj is not an attribute, it takes these affixes by the applica-
tion of this rule. The anuvptti of snirft runs here, but the word must be
changed into locative for the purposes of this aphorism, and which will read
thus stotori nhsmiip 11 Thus qA t% *IW aro^ptf^ffJfa irar^i:«»5wt t 7*uft*Sk
TOTOT, *nm*rcfir*&H TOW-iWl^n Rule VI. 4. 163 prevents the elision of the
15
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
&$ J8**ndfasi|;«» [BK.V.CH. HI. % 65
\
»T of*, which otherwise would heve been elided by VI. 4. 148 and 155), These
words are equal to TOC*m?* and mi WW * '
fftr : 11 irowvB^q twi i*mmffift **fir sranfo rov^t* top »
61. For praSasya; &t is also substituted before
these two affixes.
As site:, sqptyRt (sff is substituted for the f of fa**, by VI. 4. 160 )•
ffarer vim q^ 11 isrer, v (s^r) ■
Vfrf: II ^TO*f** *T 3*C ftWifrit H^WTiirq^ JR<l«rat* TOP I
62. *q is also substituted for I^T, when ish^an and
fyas follow.
Thus sfe* « the oldest \ *qrar* ' the older \ By VI. 4. 1 57, *ffr is also
substituted for ^y ; and we have tffc and *4fani also. The word q& though
not a gugavachana, takes these affixes by the implication of this sfltra.
^Pd*4itf^?rHr^ 11 %$ 11 qscrfa n srrerq?, qrerft, ^, *n*ft II
ff% s 11 ^fo*«i«i«wi<i<wi %* srq i*ildnft*h *rcnft surer tot* 11
63. For gTRWB is substituted %T, and for qr?T is
OT**> when these affixes follow.
Thus stf|gn,%#*P, STITCH and qpfclPl II mIdnqM l 3wft yfovrtRrcfov,
4ftnft%ii
gerreqqh m^duqin, II V* n qs?rfa H 3*, ^«m4V., v^c *HmAHiHj i
^frP H 34l**Mlfe1t(( : 3iftcWift4il »W««4WlWU*i*iiMS TOP M
64. Before these affixes, q^j is optionally substi-
tuted for 5^ and ^rsq II
Thus tfiHS:, Wftvi* or qfTO:, MfclP* ; similarly vmP^«, iT^ft^, or qrfSfc:,
qfae-. 1 qcftarv, 1 ^roftspqi: 1 aro^mf^r^r, «hfts s 1 TOiflHi4fcNiWH44itf44t4V«ii'Q«iia.t
ftro&r3& 11 ^ 11 q^ u for, JRfc, 5^ ■
65. The affixes fqflC and *?<* are luk-elided f when
ish^an and lyasun follow.
Thus vfiiHr- «nra*. m*0vhl ; ****!— **Pro*, h^Ihi< u sret% «Pw. «m-
^ffapiil This sfltra is a jftepaka or indicator that words ending in ft^ and H\
or ^i form their comparative and superlative degrees by adding fq^ andf^u
Digitized by VjOOQIC
[Bic v. Ch. in § 67. ] ir» » srf4
66. The affix q?R^ (???) comes without change of
'^ connotation after a stem (nominal or verbal) denoting praise.
The word TOOT mean5 • praise \ and it qualifies the sense of the pri-
mitive ; i. e. when the sense of the primitive is that of * praise \ then 5TCI ia
added. As a general rule the OTftai affixes, which do not change the denota-
tion of the word, serve the purpose of prominently bringing forward one parti-
cular meaning out of the several meanings possessed by a primitive. Thus
MlHdl ^rarare* ; q ^HHi W*H * 'a celebrated Grammarian '. So also <ui$HiVl l •■
The praise may be implied by the sense of the primitive, without being abso-
lute praise: thus ^K^f: *a celebrated thief, **35TO € a celebrated robber* ; a
person very expert in his evil courses even ; these word being applied to a
thief who is so dexterous that he can steal ' the collyrium from the eye-lashes ',
or • a horse from under the rider', without the latter being aware of it
The affix comes after a verbal word ending in f?l^, for the word fcrw
V. 3. 56 is understood here also. Thus q^favj*t , ^TOWkTO Jot M^fHVMI 'who
is celebrated, who two are celebrated or who all are celebrated in cooking*.
These words M^Etvm &c cannot take dual or plural; because the action de-
noted by the verb is only one, not many. These words are always in the
neuter gender, by the general usage of the people.
km, %11N^ R
fftr* 11 ^rfcrr, 'nnifrif OTrffr 1 Hi^HKi^d i, frwnirtli 1 u^rofircta** ^r^i faw
>nfiifiRu& s^^^HMirimumr^iri^Frq^l^i^^nq^f^^MHini *rtfai 11
67. The affixes tROT^(s^a),t^, and Trft^(tSwr)
come after a nominal or verbal stem which connotes a slight
incompleteness.
The word qmfil means 'fullness of objects*. A little non-fullness is
> called forererfS H Thus q^F? :. *$R& or fjttfta 'clever but slightly incom-
plete' i. e. 'toberably clever'. ^RFt:, *t***l ! , VSftifr tt So a,so after verbs, as
n <1OT 11 >
h
., ,„ , Piniii^ byjjQQglg
\
965 «nr*u [Bk. V. Ch III. |. 7*
68. Optionally to a declined noun may be added
the affix sr^sr faj\ but it stands before: when the sense is slight
incompleteness*
This is the only exception to the general rule that an affix is added
after a word. The affix ^5^ however is added before the word. The ^ of *f^
indicates that the ud&ttawill fall on the final vowel of the word. See VI. 1. 163.
Thus wjqf: *a tolerably skillful person*. *55f*» 3f3^l *TCTP II By the word 'op-
tionally 9 it is indicated that the affixes sjft &c also come. By using the word
QT 'to a noun ending in a case-affix L e. a declined noun', it is Indicated that
the affix is not added to finite verbs (fira^r) II
69. The affix OTcTPT comes after a case-inflected
word which expresses 'a speciality*.
That which distinguishes one thing from another is called tor or 'spe-
ciality*. When a word expresses speciality, it is called »w^fm : II This word
qualifies the sense of the primitive. The affix ^nfci^and the affix urejV. 3. 23
both denote inert, but while ^rnffat denotes i re s repfr the other denotes n^KHH f
I. e. merely mm. ||
Thus HjMHM : 'he may be reckoned among the clever persons 1 . So
also spmfhr, w«fmmw 11
The above Sfttra may, therefore, be translated in these words also/'the
affix ^refhe has the sense of "belonging to the class of \ "being of the nature of*.
mPicii<f«: II ^« H *\\\\k II xrr^ f Turret, *>: II
70. The affix ku (*r) governs all the sfttras, as far
as ive pratikritau (V. 3. 96).
Properly speaking qr extends only upto V. 3. 86. Thus In the sflrra
wrgm V. 3, 73, the word 5? must be supplied to complete the sense. As «rv*w
tTf^RP ll This affix 3ff docs not come after finite verbs (frrT^r). but the affix
«HT^(V. 3. 7.1) comes after such verbs. In other words, the phrase ft?w V,
j. 56, should be connected, by way of anuvritti, with the next sfttra, and not
with this.
my, ^ W
trpsr. II fiwWfa I <M«*wil MsHIHI ^T Hlf^fl^^i** 1 !^^ Vftfa, ^ IT^L^t f TOI- •*
Digitized by
Google
ex. v. Ch. hi. 5. 72] m^ « 966
9
71. The affix akach (are) is added to an Indeclinable
# and to a Pronominal, before the last vowel of those words; in
the sense of Pritgiviya affixes.
The ^ shows (hat the acute accent falls on the final (VI. 1. 163V
though the affix is inserted in the middle of the word. The phrase
m?wV. 3. 56 is understood here also. This vr^r^ debars 9 II Thusvfe*
«t^-«^+«T^+^: -«w%:; similarly «fls%: f *R$p from *ft%: and qft: II So al-
so after Pronominals, as q$fr, fro%, and *«m% from of, ft>% and **fl| N In
these last examples, it will be seen that the affix is added to qqR f words L e.
to declined nouns, and not to sm<nf|3i or crude-noun: as was required by IV.
I. 1. Sometimes, however, the affix is added after a Pratipadika also. The
usage will determine when the affix should be added to a Nominal stem (Prati-
padika) and when to a Subanta word. Thus in yrerffr , srefCTft*, gerag;
HW>lg, J^i*, «n^wn f the affix is added to pratipadika viz to joifc «ra£,
giving gofti^, stfr^[ which are then declined as Pronominals. But in the
examples fqqftiT, Hvm ***rf%, TOfa, the affix i?^ is added to the fem* to (the
Instrumental case ofg*^ and VfFrO> anc * *lft anc * *& the Locative singular of
the same. From the above examples, this rule may be deduced; the affix naris
added to the Prdtipadika % when case-affixes beginning with tfr, 9 or * follows; .
and the affix is added to the declined pronoun, in the remaining cases.
Vdrt: — The affix ^ri is added to the Indeclinable ^coffctl Thesis
indicatory, therefore, 5JT comes before the final vowel (I. 1. 47). As gc4fo+
W-SJwtfaiPI, as %wfra»rerar, tjwffaif firefir 'he remained silent 9 . When, however,
the meaning is that 'whose habit is so', then the affix 9 is added, and the ^of
rorafrl is elided. As ^rofap *a taciturn 9 .
The phrase fa*H (V. 3. 56) being understood here, the affix u^ comes
after finite verbs also. As to^— TOTI%. ^Fqnr-vqufr H
72. The letter ^r is the substitute of the final ^ of
an Indeclinable, when the affix akach is added.
The word srara is to be read into this sfltra and not eVTPT, because
no Pronominal ends in 3? h Thus ttf^, f|^^ and fq^ from f*r$, ft^f* and
5PHM Thus f|*3» + iT;-f?{ + v T¥ + ?? ta f?t$?» now comes the present rule
and the final ^ is changed into j, as fit^t or °n II
N-
Digitized by
L.00QR
9«7 n*n [BicV.Ch. 111.5 7jr
\
73. The affix « (V. 3. 70) and % ^ (V. 3. 71)
come after a word, noun or verb, when something or somebody
not known, is spoken of. •
This »rto or want of knowledge refers not to the object itself, but to
its relation with some other object As «TO3i* ' whose horse Y nfv^p « the
ass • (of whom is this) ? *%zr. &c Similarly in ^r%% * high 9 ( is it so ? ) «fta%*
€ Is it low' ? *$% • was this agreed to by all • ? So also fire% II Similarly
<TTcri% " He cooks, is it ? n gfyqafi i , ' He speaks, does he ?•
qf*v 11 $ftaqk nffafr Priori: 1 RS^nffrov* ^?j 1 fffwcraircif^ s5 q-JiHHiaiirti^ft-
fliTHsir^ iwiftif?i nm^ *wft ii
74. The above affixes come when the thing is
spoken of as contemptible.
Thus «rav ' a sorry horse \ ^r-, n***?:, **%:, «fH%* *$%, fiPW II
q^jfo 4 he cooks comtemptibly *. ^Pffifti * he speaks insignificantly *.
^IrP U $kti<f{dl4 I ^fHid^mift^ S*f ¥^TRfl[ mfil4R*l<t*tiHLIw5l *MfiJl*HU'HU51
75. The affix kan ( 1— vr) comes in the above
sense of contemptible, when the whole word is a Name. ,
The word $fso?fr of the last. sQtra is understood here also. This qpi
debars ^ fl vreCTOV*, 1$*r H
fKh 1 ^ry^pmrnTri * mw i iwi 1 ?rem «imiMni g^nf%y^Tti q*nfrf?* **rtr
76. The above affixes come when' compassion is
denoted.
The word ar^^T^n means 'compassion, pity, endearment 9 . Thus grot'
• the little child ', * poor child \ qnW t 5**^:, sgfira?:, fi rafadfa ' fie 1 he
trusts', wflflfi ff 'alasl he sleeps'. The two latter are examples of finite
verbs taking this affix.
Srafr ^ «*£ vrac n v*s if *i^rft b tfirafr, <*, d^xhm a
77. Also as an expression of courteousness, the
above mentioned affix is added to that by which compassion
is shown.
The word sjffir means • policy ' or 'expedient*, such as 'conciliation 9 ,
'dissension' and 'punishment*. ^tK^ means 'joined with that, L e. with gift
V^OOQle
Digitized by VjOOQ
■£ Sg/y * m hl ' jbw 1 .
Bk. V. Ch. hi. 5. 73 ] ri« S? 68
-
■
compassion 9 . In other words, the things signified by the bases, are connected as
means of relief with the persons or things that have been objects of compassion.
Thus, f^f % MH4>I * • alas ! here are barley for you', f*r fT firW5T- * alas ! here
are sesamun for you \ qtf%, «T^en% * O dear! come and eat \ (These words
are supposed to be addressed to a person who is starving, by one who wants
to relieve him. Iytngai). Being moved with compassion, he entreats cour-
teously the object of sympathy, with gifts to relieve his want In the last
SOtra, the affix was added, in the sense of compassion, to the name of the
person or action that evoked pity. In the present sfitra, the affix is added to
the object or action by which pity is shown. The word q^ftr is from qtt the
Imperative second person Singular of \ *to go 9 with the upasarga «TT II
*r% : n «T5^iraf *ft& <* qq^ifift *3% 1 ***** »uraMfHiwi4UMi*fl«iii **&tit
78. The affix thach (%£) is optionally added to a
word of more than two. syllables, being the name of a human
being, as an expression of compassion, or of courtesy joined
with compassion.
In the alternative we have ^ also. As sr«S3tf*r3t ^fTrr: -^fop (^TTf
+ W?* + Hi V. 3. 83). When 3^ is added there is no shortening of the
base, as ^W^ : M Similarly Ufa** or HOTTOP II
Why do we say ^f^: 'after a polysyllable?'* Observe J^RP, Jjraft II
Why do we say 'being a Man-name' ? Observe if^rpr, Hg*lg^ which are
epithets and not Proper Nouns (*nfr ¥!£ W); or these are names of quadrupeds.
fT^: H IN 14*41 4lP)44lft tt m^q Tin I Sjfa sfa ft^i^f «rf& ^*P*I *T*fr N4**MI«t ^l
%<*% f^t^r *ra3t *ron •
79. Also the affixes ghan (2_^) and ilach
(%$) come after a word of more than two syllables, being the
name of a human being, when compassion or courtesy joined
with compassion is expressed.
The force of *r is that the other affix *pj also comes, as well as *^ 11
Thus from \^tT we have: \ft*:, \fvr* t ifaR; Vu-d*: M So from iWM ? — 3%**.,
«rf|n* nf|ra* :, HS^FE: M V. 3. 83.
uMiyM$<j«£<ft ^r n <o n q^rft n sranc, ^n^: f 31^,5^ ^n
iw5t h^t 1 *Miiut qfto^ jrtot w i ** *r i
F
- -^..^ w ,-Qi^toe€Ub-y i«=q QO.I ■ ■
\
9«? *** [BicV.Ch. IIL $.8*'
80. According to the opinion of Eastern Gram-
marians, the affixes attach (*i£) and vuch (zr&) also come
after a human-name beginning with the word Wt B
The *r shows that the former affixes also come. The sense of the
affixes are the same as above viz. compassion or courtesy. Thus from the
word ^qpHf, we have, I. Ji»g*H4r (kan)i 2. *&<& (thach), 3, sfq?*: (ilach), 4. *ft*:
(ghan), 5. 3to* (vuch), 6. 3^: (attach). The shortened forms are by V. 3. 83.
In diminutives, the forms are generally shortened* The word qr^TT is used as
a sign of respect (pujartha), for the word qr was understood in (he aphorisip
by anuvptti from V. 3. 78.
81. The affix kan ( J.—m) is added to a Name of a
human being, which expresses a special idea : when compas-
sion or courtesy is meant.
The snfcRPEt are words like «ro &c which are well-known names of
particular species of animals &c f but which are come to be applied to men by
way of metaphor. The anuvritti of *$*& does not extend to it This is a
general rule. Thus cqnror?. tfNST-f* TOW: u The word *T being understood
in the sfltra, the previous affixes also come, as cqffrnt, feffc* II The word
TO^is used along with toRTi to prevent the affix being added to the word-form
*lft (I, 1. 68>
gyft *reft are * $\w\w\v i
82. The affix kan (J — qi) comes in the sense of
compassion, after a man-name ending in «tf*ra, and this second
member is elided before the affix.
The words 3ft and *iam*UH ' are understood in this sfltra. Thus cur-
W& from «nraiftpf', and f%?3j: from foflfsFP II Vy&ghr&jina and SinhAjina are
names of men.
AMKii^ r fecffar^r : n *3 n <i^n*r n z 9 sren^, v&k, Outturn , «ra:n
ff^n 11 $r? f?T3^% 1 »tRh»!j-m&i n§r ^«tiR** totos nw*4<?p u$%fv?isrT*r 5^ *f&-
«nfW^n ^gqfrr a^fei Srcr **s**i 11 *r« 1 *h*iiii form Sror *?Rsqi 11
*?• 1 ftro* i^n^i *r sntfirrniTfr t TO**** n
qr» 1 f^fT srr ***wft ^5HK4i*uf4*um ^rar <t^«i s n *r» 1 «W* f«wi ^ m
. Digitized by VjOOQiC
>>
Bk V. Ch. III. $. 83 ] Elision, - :9?o
Kdrikd ^&*Awm\1l *T 9RT* vfsWI ^ •
mf%^^H WWtfHWltMWHNl ****** M
83. When tf*a (V. 3. 78) or one of the affixes
beginning with a vowel (V. 3. 79, 80) taught above, follows,
there is elision of all that portion which comes after the se-
cond vowel of the name of a human being.
The word nfa is understood here from the last sfltrau The word
;g^TO indicates that the whole of that portion of the term which follows the
second vowel should be elided, otherwise, only the first letter of the third sylla-
ble would have been elided by I. 1. 54. The illustrations have been given above.
Thus ^IT^+f^; here all the letters after the «T of Yf should be elided : as
Vfo J . so also tftip, tfc** •
The affix r is replaced by |Q£ or q* (VII. 3. 50 and 51) hence its spe-
cial mention in this sfttra. For had it not been used, the sfltra would have
run thus. ' When an affix beginning with a vowel follows &c '. This rule
would have applied to f^j substitute of r, but not to S? substitute of 9 which
comes after words ending in 7, «£. H, I? and 73 II But it is intended that q*
(and not f^r) substitute of r should be added to words whose second syllables
end in 33^ (? or q?) vowels. If it be said that {3? substitute of Y would be
sufficient for words like qra?^r &c also as it will cause the elision of the third and
subsequent syllables; and when such syllables are elided, 9 would be the pro-
per substitute to add to *F& and not f3t, which we can do by the rule of sthanl-
vat; we say, it is not so. For if it were the case, we should add the 3? substi-
tute and not ^ in the following: irfU<r+*^(VI. 4. 5i)»*rfHr*+*^(VI. 4. 148),
because, after elsion, intends with nil But we know that Sf is not added but
f^f, and we have qftl<Ni: U Hence the emplyment if s in the sfitra is proper
as qiyj-d: — *!gqp 9 ftynr*— ftf^P H
Vdrt : — It should be stated that the portion after the fourth vowel
is elided in certain cases. As m^ipqjtffgmflw* — «ygtf?rep, f?*rf¥rt* t fSFTfiPT it *
Vdrt : — When an affix not beginning with a vowel follows, the elision
is optional. Thus ^frf ^^-^TOWF or \&r*t if&Ftt: or *Qqp II
Vdrt:— There is elision of the first term, when these affixes s^r &c
denoting compassion, whether beginning with vowel or not, follow. Thus
*ftw*i *fat*, sPtOT, T^^P from TO^r or TOTO or *13T*I &c
Vdrt:— -The dimunitive of compassion or endearment may be formed
without adding any affix, by simply dropping either the first or the second
term of the name. Thus f^: or ** from Vl**T s » TOTOT— HPK or *m 11
16
f
Digitized by
^kwr-
>x
r $?\ Elision; • f tBlLV.Ctt.1ll;stf5
Vdrt: — The affix ft* is replaced by if after a word ending in * as,
*TT3^: from *ng?fp, *fj«*i — ^3^P M So also after a word ending in m as HTPJPP n
Vdrt: — When the second vowel is tfr, «fr, ? or ^, then this is also
elided. Asftfjpjp from sfhn, 4i$3»s from HffrT: II
FJr/ : — When the first member consists of a single syllable, there is
.elision of the second member : as *rf*ro: from qpffclT* ( the n changed back tp
^because the stem' is now * and not <u, and rule VIII. 2. 39 does not apply.)
So also; ffarsif:, mfrqr* II The form qrTfr (and not OT3P from q^r) is an excep-
tion. It is dimunitive of s*<Uffrl*| : II
: ^Rt U ^PBT?t^t H4«WIH? HMtfl HH&l TOf : ftftaT^ 3>*$Hl SWl' HqJ% I I^Rl'TRnn •
JlfrWl I ^llrtlflll tf a?*U4*il BTT s *f "NUtwWWtollSifil 1^R«WHI
• 84. • There is elision of that portion of the word,
which follows the third vowel, in the case of a man-name begin-
ning with Sevala, Supari, YiSAla, Varui^a, and Aryaman, when
the above affixes $ia or those having initial vowel follow. .,
This debars the previous sOtra. Thus ST33if*TO* *taP$*xfi«iWSklP, fa-
i?w. foffry ; gqft^P t gqffci*! g^fcr- from gqirfiT:; so also fttnftfti:t fanftrc*
fonfifc*; **PW:, ^f&RF, ^ftff:; *T$FW:, nlPto, and *rift?* II
Vdrt: — The third vowel must be the original third vowel, and not
that which results from Sandhi. Thus in tRH^ftrr: and nqpfaftfa* ; though
the apparent third vowels are 7 and vrr» but they being the result of com*
pounding between ^pr + f^T and 5pnft + «rrthr; the original vowels are taken.
Thus tafifcR: from Sri^T^T:, and gqftap from gqrahftfo* ; and not V^fiTO
and Qtfte H
^^^^^^^^L ^^^^^^^^^ ^tm^mt^^ *A
fstfW l|«A^4l ^wf H
85. The above-mentioned affixes v (V. 3. 70) and
the rest come in expressing the small quantity or small number'
of anything. :
Thus 9t*i §<*«$?&& * a little oil', qfen, *W3ft, f%***J* f <r*li:, sfhr%:
•a somewhat high, a somewhat low &c '. TOtrfifr ' he cooks a little '. ^fqtffa
• he speaks somewhat \
5^r n *\ R mift n f^ ■
_ Digitized by
Google
BK. V.Gh. IH.-§9i::)f rW^i Sf*
86. The above mentoned-affixes (V.3.70) come in.
expressing shortness of length or diminutive. •'-" " %
The *** here is opposed to 4tf or 'long \ Thus ftqtf^F-^pPEt'a
small tree', nrr, ^W M
* %*Fif «qcii^li q^f « ^^rnini, ^c ■
ffo i grerfrr i gw^feg^n nr fear nm uminul qs^irafr **<% t «|jiwi www* «
87. The affix kan (JL_«) comes when the short
thing is a Name. • . . * * • / :
Thus *w?: ( ^, v^R: a This debars qr tt
^frP i swjfiw i srgnw* irgprrrSr, otp^ f^JFPi, i $21*141 a u *i*^ iswi*f- l^A ** *
inawt *wi% i *hu*ww* i
88. The affix * comes after the words kutL 6am!.
and Su$d&, when shortness of length is meant.
« The word jjft is understood here, but not #^rr tt This debars *? Vi £
70. Thuss^rgfft-fpffr*, jrffa: and jpTir* M The derivatives are masculine
names ; though the primitives are feminine.
fi%'» 1 gWrfo < ^j5iMij[wtjt 5rfr yrqpuft »wft i qremwg > ' ' ' '
£9. The affix cjupach (^) comes, in expressing
diminution, after the word kutd 'a jar\
This debars *i II Thus «f3TS, from $j$ the long 3? being elided owing
to ¥ ll It means a small leathern vessel for oiL This word is neuter also^
as, $3TO.n •*
'- tfv i ggrr*W i ch i a/iiuft^^im t i^ frfr graigft *wft t «**nww*i
90. The affix sh£arach (crt with feminine f IV.
1. 40) comes in expressing diminutive, after the words kasljt
and go^i. # . ?
Thus ***r *T^ - m^O f a small lance ■; «Tt°faft - a small sack \
Trte^fm ai^r R m ii <mfa n ^r, **, «**, f«^nrt: f
*Fr i *s*ifir Ft^i* i tot w* w* **** |ftklniwi$ *Jt*3t ec^mwlr *wfir i ^
91. The affix shtarach expresses slenderness, after
the words vatsa, ukshan, a£va, and fishava. ;
f
"Digitized b;
r&®
. *
\
S7j: **«r*ii [ Bk. V. Ch. HI. § 93
The anuvptti of **j ceases. Thus remtf ' a weaned calf* becoming
slender In reaching the second period of its age. 3*rcrc • a slender bull - :
being the third age of a to M *TOTO ' a mule *: fo* flgWMfiQ**!); VI*WC* 'a
slender bull or that cannot draw the load 9 .
figqpg^ Erafkft spntsrei *dv< B \* w ^fT^f nftt 1% ?nr: f
*r%ifo^iiiif<*^:iinftqf!^^^ i ft*i«Hi<Mt-
92. After the words fa*C, ^[ and 3^, in determin-
ing of the one out of two, comes the affix datarach (srerc with
the elision of the final to and zt%)
This affix comes in the sv&rtha sense. The differentiation of a portion
from the whole by means of its peculiar caste, action, attribute or name is .
called R3TTCT or specification. Thus qR?rer *Fraft 5**-. 'amongst you two, who is
Katha \ q&ft n^TT: qgres* ' amongst you two, who is the agent \ srafr *nniin
qy • amongst you two, who is clever \ gjtrer *TOft* fjm» € which of the two
amongst you is Devadatta '• Similarly irr 1 'of the two the one who', irk*
• of|the two — that one \ as irk* *w5r WW * *r<TC grnresrg • of the two, let that
one who is Devadatta, come '• The taddhita affixes being optional (IV. I.
82), this idea may be expressed by a sentence also. As, «Rt traft^TOftt •
WW & ' who amongst you two is Devadatta, let him come*.
jfrTs i f%*ni? ift T^r. Prefab it«ht3i<i <* i *$furfi<t firoW* qik i ^pi t3i ij^*
93. The affix datamach (srht with the elision of
the last syllable ) comes after kim, yat and tat, optionally,
when the object is the determining of the one out of many,
the question being that of caste.
The words- Ami*: and ftTOTCT ipra* are to be read into the sfltra. Thus
*Eftr TOT! *^ 'which of you, Sirs, is a Katha Brahmaga?' *Rrft HTOT **:, ITO*
WWItf 'that one of you, Sirs, who is a Katha, let him come'. The word *f
"optionally 9 indicates that the affix «^r^(V. 3. 71) also comes, as n^gfr JTOtfav:* ;
fra?s» WTO3 II This idea may be expressed by a sentence also, owing to the
»Wft*IM I (IV, I. 82): as, SRt ***! «&*:; ^ h^T 3**, * *TI»TO3 M %
Why do we say 'when question is that of caste'? Obserye, ^t H^ft^-
f^f:. Here the question is about a Name: and not j&ti. The word qn^T applies
to fen 011 '/* ^ c pronouns q^and «rj not being interrogative prononus. But the
lyord sitft applies to all these three pronouns.
-P.igjtizacL&
Copgle
HjcV.Ch. III. §97] **• 974
According to some, the affix ?qt has also this force, after the word
as, qnfft ?roti qpr: 'which of you, Sirs, is a Katha Br&hm&na?'srad «mi «Hnr- As
may be inferred from the sfitra c§ii|i«bd*h 5WfiTJfcp% (I I- 1*63)
qcwisr umih b v* n nqlf* n n**Rfc % mmih (s?rc^ f ga*ng) ■
94. After the word nsji according to the opinion
of Eastern grammarians, may be added the affixes (Jatarach and
(Jatamach in the above senses.
The *r draws in srcrc^ u That is *9t*t comes when one out of two
is to be specified ; and x^H% when one out of many is to be specified. The
word Hlft^HMft does not govern this sfltra : it being a general rule. Thus
The word rttoi is for pujirtha ; the word *T being already under*
stood in the sfttra.
95. The affix kan ( 1—m) comes after a nominal
stem, in expressing scoffing.
Thus sqRftoftP 'Grammar 1 used in a derisive sense, when its study pro-
duces pride. As cqran?t%3 HIH ** «Tf$r. ' thou art proud, because thou hast
read grammar only \ qri%5H^! 1PT ft iffsr M Here the words uu<MUNi and
mi8*m> are used in a mocking sense. When, however, the derision applies to
the person itself, then qj^ is added by V. 3. 14: as^r^p &c
So far the governing power of q* V. 3. 7a
96. The affix s^ means also ' like this f ; when
the imitation of a thing is to be expressed.
The word 5r* is understood here. Thus *re fTOPrMflf*TCfir:«iFTOt
• an imitation of a horse ' in wood or clay &c *jf*P, MJ»W II Why do we say
• imitation ? ' Observe mft* 1**: "The gayal cow".
*nrrai«iv»R <r^ifa II fcsrroni, % (^) n
97. The affix kan comes in the sense of 'like
this', when the whole word so formed is a Name..
f-
WipzScl
zeci : by G oOglg
<J£5> *Ft ELISION. [ ?k. , V. Ch. I II. §/ ipOf
. This applies when imitation is not meant Thus NHM(V1^ ^rwwv
•a thing reminding a horse 9 . *g3t*t ifav ■
5**3**n<*n q^ift it 5?, Jis^r i
98. When in the same way a Man is denoted, the
affix is elided by lup; the word retaining its number and-
gender.
Thus ns^rr ( M^q*t4*n: ) f straw-man ' i. e. an effigy in straw. So also
jrefc ^KgA * For accent see VI. 1. 204.
- . Why do we say € a man • ? Observe «TO3t:, Sg^P &c. This sfltra may
be considered to be an enlargement of V. 3. 10a
99. A similar elision of the affix sac takes place
then also, when the figure is made a means of livelihood, it
being presumed, that no traffic is driven thereby.
That which is bought and sold is called qvq ; that which is not so
dealt with is HT^ M The rule applies to the images of gods which are made
means of subsistence by a low order of Br&hmanas, not by selling them, but
by exhibiting them from door to door. Thus ^rg^T- 4 the idol of V&sudeva *:
ftW * the idol of Siva \ *&?, fa&, BTlfta* &c
Why do we say «tf*C ? Observe, qftrf^H ftnHl% * he sells the images
ofelephent*. bt^^T^, W^JT^H
This rule is also an amplification of V. 3. 16a *
frtwjifryjsr n 1** n <repfir 11 ^ W^yr. wi
100. After, the words devapatha (fee, there is si-
milar elision of the affix kan, (V. 3. 96 and 97) expressing
an image or a Name.
The ^*TO class is w*f?RW: H Thus ^FP, fcTTO* U
l^nro, 2^rro, 3^if^nr f 4toto, 5 f^t^qw*, 6 ^»ftw # f 7 tnrro*, 8 <nr-
to 9tow, lOvynr, 11 ftpgw (ftryro), i2ftrc^(tfN*rfir), I3*pft*(*g-
<fcr), UTOTCSg (^PTCf^), 15^T f 16 Pf. if *"T, 18 5«? f 19 1WW, 20 *CTW,
21 Ctg, It is intfipw II
>v
f Bk. V, Ch. III. | 105. ] W • '§76
-~W
Rarikax — The affix *** is elided when the imitation bun image of a
god that is worshipped, or a picture, or a design on a flag. As f|Wt ft«S* aire
examples of gods, «r|pr: * the picture of Arjuna', sqfcsft the picture of Duryo-
dhana' » qrffc • the flag having the figure of monkey \ iron the eagle-flag V
tffr* t &z& ift, re raft rerar qmFfrf H^ar *fitefr nntffrg& ■* \ qfta nm^ii j
101. The affix (Jha* (± #— f) comes after vasti,
in the sense of i like this '.
The word f% is understood here. The affixes taught hence forward
come in a general sense, and are not confined to images. Thus qftffcr— qrtfrc
fern. qi&jQ * like the abdomen \
102. The affix 4^a (*&) comes after 6il&, in the
sense of ' like this \
Thus fa5fr a faSfci *fip 'curd, hard as stone 9 . According to some, the affik
*s^ also comes after fipw, as ^91 W
103. The affix 1^ comes, in the sense of 'like
this \ after SatkhA (fee.
Thus wig* -firap, S*W (VI. I. 213), *re*T: &c
11 ftrc^, 12 «nr, 13 to^ 11
104. The word J^t is anomalous, meaning ' beau-
tiful'.
The word fs* is formed by adding u?j to the word J M The word Tf«*
means 'nice, excellent, proper, fit; having or containing in himself all the desired
requisites \ As f^ts* anyr. • how nice is this Prince \ F%s* iraqr tf
105. The aflSx chha (fa) comes in the sense of
€ like this \ after the word kufi&gra.
~-^~ m
'977. «TM '[ BK. V;Ch. III. § 107
Thus $OTfar ( framfta SVWni) Sfifc " Intellect sharp as the point of
the kuSa grass ". $OT*ffqTO*ll
106. The affix chha (£r) comes, also only in the
sense of 'like this*, after a compound noun which contains
in itself the force of ' like this \
The word HI refers to f?, and ^f^ro means CTraftTOU A compound
which is formed with the force of |7» takes the affix far, when a second fif is to
be indicated. In the chapter on Compounds, no samAsa is taught with the force
of f* ; this sfitra, therefore, indicates by implication that such a sam&sa of two
nouns can be formed, having hidden in it the sense of f* ll Such a sam&sa
will come under the head of g^ gqr W*P& (II. 1. 4>
Thus ^hlchdltJI^H, *HWIH<UHL * ^«K<lrtri{l«L »
The word thi<h<u«fln means 'like the crow and the palm-fruit ' : 'the
unexpected and sudden fall of a plam-fruit upon the head of a crow so as to
kill it, at the very moment of its sitting on a branch of that tree ; and is used
to denote a very unexpected and accidental occurence 9 . Thus Devadatta
happens to enter a village, and on that very day, robbers happen to attack the
village, and in the fray, Devadatta is killed, this coincidence of the robbers
and Devadatta is called *hMidMfa*HmH :, and the killing of Devadatta is like
that of the crow by the srn* fruit The first case of OTPra: will form the com-
pound, the second case of w will give rise to the affixing of or, as ^iftnrnftfr ^f-
f^TO q>j: (the compound 9ft3ffin? meaning «hNi<lltt*lll<i'UUWfrc SRPTO: ) and the
derivative word 4tl4)<tl<4ta meaning <ti|chWUJiAiO :
Similarly grargqpffq means "like the death of a goat (aj£) by the
accidental falling of a sword (kj-ipftga) as the goat was passing". Similarly
*H«*WtTl<<ft3 means "like the accidental falling of a vulture (vartikA) in to the
hands of a blind person who thus captures it". All these are unintentional
( atarkita and curious (chitrlkarana) coincidences. In short, these words mean
f accidentally ', ' unexpectedly \
w&<ifr»q1 sm 11 govs n qqpfo 11 w&<ift w t *n( n
107. The affix art ( + _**) comes in the sense of
* like this *, after the words fiarkarft &c.
Thus *l4tl4 = ^ll^iMLi ^rnff5^WL u
&**$&** 6*Rnw» 7 •UrtlH'i, 8$t*m* 9 9*tij*& t 10 srcNt (srcrf?*), 11 «i$t* (^i**rX
12 Rrorr h
v^oogle
Digitized by VjOOQ
BK.V.CH.III.S »*] fty* W 8
108. The affix tfiak ( + — ** or ^) comes in the
sense of * like this \ after the words angull &c.
Thus «mprJ^ ( -«n?qtfhf ), trotf*** m
8 *ft # , 9 ^jft, 10 5R # f 11 Sf*, 12 <sr<**, 13 stf 5 **, M i?F#, 15 TOO 16$fi** t
*WIH R
109. The affix ^hach ($*£) also cotncs optionally
after the word ekagslla : with the force of € like this \
Thus q< *qif? *3»: or ^Mlfi**** by *5g W
NirfJ>ftdKl*Ht ■ K° ■ 'ftffo * **• grflgrrac, {*^il
110. The affix +— {« comes in the sense of
€ like this \ after karka and lohita.
Thus cK i ctf^ g: 'like qHi or white horse 1 . HitCTfti : *4»fe<fts 'a crystal though
not itself red, appears red, owing to the reflection of some thing behind if.
M<rf^4fe£*nc^K^fcj ii ui ii JRT, ^, ft**, CTrat *n% ^^rftrl
111. In the Chhandas, the affix thdl (_lnr)
comes in the sense of ' like this ', after pratna, p&rva, viSva,
and ima (idani).
Thus :—
(Rig Veda V. 44. 1). 'Him (Indra), as the ancients, as the piedecessors,
as all creatures, and as these living men have worshipped &c '.
^TTST saff SUMuD^iTdL II U* 11 **ofa H ^nret-sar., «iimrift-^hi *
tf%* " renf iftR^Ki Hreranfon iiiPmtxiiD sfrsrorereT: tren gin i jjnif^it
112. The affix fiya (+'-«) is added without
changing the connotation, to a word denoting a horde, but
not when the word is derived from the name of their leader.
The anuvf itti of f* ceases. The word s*T means a crowd of men of
various castes, having no fixed livelihood, connected together with the object
12
K
DigitizeH^y VJjOO-QIC "
i—
\
979 flyat* [BK.V. Ch. IH.J 114
of acquiring wealth &c Thus 1%p?H|: ' the trident bannered horde '. dual
Hl**4*tU» /'• Bfa^PIF: II Similarly, $tnn, foijlr, ft**** ^IWP, *lltwh f *R4<M* H
In the plural, the affix is elided by IK 4. 62. ..
Why do we say MMI*i"fl^f<t ? Observe ^TWOT: (V. 2. 78) 'a horde
whose leader is Devadatta \ From this sQtra, commence the fTTHf affixes &c,
the affixes that have the sense of ' King thereof 9 . The affix &*(, therefore, has
this meaning also viz. ' the leader of the horde*.
?f%* II HMI^NcOm *lPl4dl , «l44<SlM^fiA«|: OTT SHOP I HIOTlWW "^^nfaplirRmfVk*
»*w gutter* «ra3r «HwflnnL »
113. The affix ftya comes after the name of. a,
wild band, and after a word ending in chphafi ( + — ?yppf IV.-
1. 98), without change of sense ; but not in the feminine.
A collection of persons of different castes, having no determined live-
lihood, and living by violence are called tmr or 'wild band \ Thus ^1MHM I «HU
• a wild band living on pigeons', 4il<iltWl*4k and tfi4i<mi4il«, SfrS*!??:, SKIf^//.
<ff<gHdl s II So with words ending in ^jr^ f as fft*4||i|<4|*, jfrmiinft, pL <£|mwi: ,
nrwRPP wr^mRn' pi- wwhtj 11 •
Why do we say " not in the Feminine ? * Observe qrfonreft, sftftttft
«fl**u««0, wrenEft it
114. To a name expressing a multitude living by
the trade of arms, is added the affix fiya$ ( + — *r with the
fem. in i), when it is the name among the V&hika, bat not
when it is the name of a Br&hmaga, nor when the word is
R&janya.
The anuvptti of mffaum does not govern this sfttra. Thus qhi q ^l«w ,
4WU*ft pi. ^Rtptfrprr:, fem. ^ftftflr; tfapRP, wjpfr, pi. onp fem. m&Gt, hfw 9
1W*W pi. HftW fenu Htftft u
Why do we say * living by the profession of arms * ? Observe itrp,
tUPW II Why do we say • a multitude *? Observe ott^ 11 Why do we say
f amongst the V&hlka? 9 Observe OTtT:, sfo^P \\ Why do we say "not a Brah-
maija or the word-form Rajanya n ? Observe nrn^T mw, W^jni^T KWtt* U
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
1
Br. V. Ch. IIL 5 117] *q« 9*>
115. The affix te^yan ( + — <T*r with the fern, in
i) comes after the ward Vjika, a class of persons living by
trade of arms.
Thus mzfa: *T$t"5ir» pi. J$n* fem. *ratft II The affix will not come, when
qpg means 'a wolf. As *iH*p3t Hi^l«lj *SlfaclI& S^Rrfirf II
*h t afa«t iwift«i wyqilnr *refy 11
116. The affix chha (fcr) comes, without chang-
ing the sense, after d&mini &c, and after the six warrior-
stocks called Traigarta shashtha.
The following are the six warrior races of Trigarta : — thly^mv, tTOrf^
qjTfitaj, gfOTTft, *&&'- and ?IFlfc: *
Thus *MN* jppfNJr, pL traro; fatfto: *lntftfilr, pi. toto; frWmtfly p l
^PfRWT:, «°¥9iN: pl rWW 1 . AlHlU* pL ^TCPCT: ^gTOHPfop pl. ^JFTCTW, Vgigifa:
pl. W3RJKT, *PR{N: pl. *?**>* :l
(**3irf«r)» 7 *n*3*tfnr # («rq!T^f ), 8 mfrdfa *, 9 mifaiRf , 10 4tefa # , 11 to*-
^Tf* ( W^f^f ) f 12 OTt^fiT. 13 qiJQftf, W ft?j, 15 Vtf* # , 16 gpw r 17 >fc*OTt, 18
HtHiPl t 19 snfWTjW, 20 q» | <Mfa 21 f^rft, 22 «rrqpr^T, 23 sssfif, 24 fto* II
^.%: i Mi;imflftyMif?ul* i TO^fft*^ ftflSwRm mfirtfl^l tugiJAPMmqift'^i
wiifyiih n«ulfc *w •
117. The affix a^ ( + — w) comes after pargu
&c, and the affix afi (+'— «r) comes after yaudheya &c f
without changing the sense : when these words denote warrior
classes.
Thus qro*i pl. <ra* s wg*s pl. ngtft St^nn pl. iftm* «
1 <nf, 2 *rg*, 3 ww , 4 *tftai (mNNr )t 5 **^t 6 *3» 7 wit 8 w^[, 9
*0T? 10 fronr, 11 3TOPT, 12 ^rcfcr* «
l*ft*, 2^fiw, 3&**, 4ft**, 5*|ft* 6 *fl?fa 7 *HRPl* (sUTCli**),
8 Apt*, 9 to, 10 *tf*rc ll *ftn, 12 *rkn ■ See IV. 1. 178.
*tf*f*^ ftroft wwwj fiwin wft^t stfrerac, ^pnj, *n*: f *w 1
< — K
D \g]&2e&&r&Qi 3j^j
* 1
J \
981 *** [BK.V. Ch. III. 5 119
mflM
118. The affix yafi ( + — *r) comes without change
ing the sense, after the words abhijit, bidabhpit, fidl&vat,
gikh&vat, Sainivat, ftnj&vat, and firumat, when those words
end in the Patronymic affix z(B I
The anuvptti of ma^flRtimfr ceases, Thus ^piRi J lvnw snftftnr,
add «pj to this, mifltfaw ; pi. gnrefiErr :* frre a n pLtann, tnamv pi. Jiraprcrn,
tare** pi. *Niranr, *rnftosis pi. siritam, ^ft^v iSWnrrr, %m& and 4hran u
The wrn here is Patronymic Otherwise miM^Hl gf^« and gnftrnry tmtfhnsp,
the affix here is ?nw of itfr* $**: sep* IV. 2. 3 and of 3TC$TOr IV, 2 24
respectively,
119. The affixes fiya &c, (V. 3. 112 &c) are call-
ed tadr&ja.
The illustrations of Tadr&ja affixes have been given above. The*
\vprd f^nr occurs in SAtra II. 4. 62.
Digitized by VjOOQLC
■V W Tf V* -i-.-w-kj*.^
'\
3W Hv4HU\mi# ^Tfl: qr?: I
BOOK FIFTH.
Chapter Fourth.
1. The affix viin ( 2— *n?) comes after the words
p&da and Sata when preceded by a numeral, the sense being
that of distributive relation ; and the final of the stem is
elided*
Pr&tipadikas preceded by a numeral and ending in the words qif or
tTrT take the affix 3^ when a distributive sense ( 4tar ) is to be expressed : and
by the addition of this, the final Is elided
By VI. 4. 148 the final *? of pAda and fata would have been elided
before the taddhita affix vun ; even if such elision was not taught in this rule.
The repetition of the word 5ft in this rule, therefore, indicates that the elision
ordained here is not one caused by the affix. For if the elision had been
caused by the affix, then by I. 1. 57, such B^nta or "substitute" would be
equivalent to the principal (sthanivat) ; and would thus debar the application
of the rule VI. 4. 130 by which q^» p&d (and not pada) is changed into ^11
In other words, the lopa taught by qtqft *f is q<Mf*H* or caused by some
thing which is subsequent, namely by a taddhita affix or by f or f affix ;
therefore, this lopa would be sthani-vat for the purposes of the rule which
would apply to something preceding it (I. 1. 57). Therefore, pAd becomes
Sthani-vat to pada. Therefore, the anga or base ending with ' pada/ will be
called w, and not the base ending with 'pad \ and therefore VI. 4. 130* which
applies to h bases will not appl/t &nd there will be no substitution of q^[ for
l.
-Digged fey GoOQlg
"— T!
A
983 **» [ Bk. V. CH. IV. § 3
qifc as there is not in the form qra*. But we want such substitution and
hence the employment of words "the final of the stem is elided".
Thus ft ft W TORT M he gives two quarters to each"=ftqfaCT TOW
(TfqiT+Wft^C+W-ft^t+5R VI -4- i30-fttf*CT VIL 3^44 by which ht of
*T$ is changed into f ). Similarly \ f *HT TO^T ~ finifa*i TOW M
The compounds above formed are taddhit&rtha Tatpurusha com-
pounds, viz. compounds containing the sense of a taddhita affix, by rule II. r.
51. After the compound is formed, then the affix f^ is added. Thus first we
have ftqtfand fi^Rf compounded by II. r. 51 and then the affix is added.
The words qnf and TO when not so compounded, take f^ affix only in the
feminine.
Why do we say "of the words qnr and ot M ? Observe ft ft m$t TOtft
no affixing. Why do we say "preceded by a numeral ?" Observe qr* ITf
TOW M Why do we say " in a distributive sense " ? Observe ftqTlr TOfir " He
gives two quarters : w l[ to TOfiT «
The enumeration of mi and *rt is useless, as the affix is found after
other words also. As, fipfnfeFfit TOfif u he gives two cakes to each *. ft%ftr-
qiTTOfttt ^ *_^
2. Also when . the sense is of a punishment or a"
donation.
The word r^r means M punishment", and «irotf means "gift or do-
nation w . The prfttipadikas qj* and *rcr preceded by a numeral, and convey-
Ing the sense of punishment or donation, take the affix 5^, and the final «T
!s elided. This sfltra is begun to show that the " distributive sense " does
not apply here. Thus {r qrlr SfaRT- -fiflf^R SlfaRP M punished with the in-
fliction of a fine of two Padas (a quarter coin) ". fr W s*^3tnr«»ftqf*35t **-
*3^T9 "he makes a gift of two Padas ". Similarly itfifttfit jfrro "punished
with a fine of two hundreds w . ft4IH3iT «wrq^rf% &c
fpf: II TOlft^s n*iwrt W** ^ ii«u& *rcfif I JlltftJHIHJW II '
3. The affix kan ( 2_wr) comes in the sense of
" like that or specialty ", after the words sthflla &c.
. This debars the affix JOiitatCV. 3- 69> Thus tqttrorc-f^f&i* "bulky.
So also 9^^i, HlM^s 11 .
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
BK.V.Ch.IV.5 5 ) «*« 9*4
Vdrt : — The words <TT?t and jjpi should be included in the list of
•sthfiladi words. As, <ta>3P, ff^r: M According to one version the words are
*TW and f^r and not n^[ and ^j. So the derivatives will be ff^: and t^V
the words that end in long vowels *n, f or if, shorten their vowels before this
affix, by VII. 4. 13. As, gtr + q^-gTOP M snake-like ". The word $cor takes
^P( when tila is meant ; as $iunj4iUlftc!3r ■» ^jR>n n q* takes qp^ when mean-
ing jftft as iRPWr: 11 15, fin*, *TH» tRF*, and *TCITO take this affix when wine
is meant, a wftftiT, STrfiWir, mj l faqi f " a kind of wine", iltyr takes this affix
when meaning a covering, as MI^M*' : * a covering of the colour of cow's wine,
or go-mfitra may mean a certain arrangement of colours such as white'and
black ". 5*1 takes 9^ meaning a snake, as g^T: (VII. 4. 13) M a kind of snake
of the color of wine* 9 . ^W takes it when meaning sali grain, as ^hfap-*ft*t-
^qr OTW ,11 The following is a list of Sthuladi words.
yu^iHi, 8 11155 *JnsOT^, 9 gn *r*r. 10 *ft<* w^5, 11 to$j* <j«mui<3r t 12 $nrffcj*,
13 $110*4 }}<. ( $HIK, **3J* ), 14 irfof. a •
' ff^r? 11 srsrernfcrafr* sfa^i* i ctthtSt vitiwuft: 1 *<«i«wt«idt huwhiju tisrorar-
4. After a participle ending in kta, comes the
affix kan, when the meaning is something not yet wholly
^completed.
The word n<a*d«ifa means an act which has been fully accomplished ;
*FTCRPlfir therefore, means, an act which has not been fully accomplished.
Thufe ft?T + ^=Pra^ " not yet wholly divided * So also fbvftr &c
. Why do we say " something not wholly completed " ? Observe font,
" totally divided ", fe** f totally cut \
> ^rrftn^r^ B Ml q^rft n *, *nf*PFft R
5. Not so when a word in the sense. of "half 9 \
precedes such participle.
When the word snPr or any other word having this sense, Is com*
pounded with a participle in ?R, the affix Sfs^is not added to denote the sense of
incompleteness. Thus mPhMHL , mftifrW , &c (II. 1. 27). The word T^f shows
that the symonyms of sift are also to be taken. Thus *rfew*,Vr$KF*&c
Objection : — It is redundant to have prohibited gj^ after a word pre
ceded by 'half ', because the word "half" itself shows that the action has not
been completed * • • - • •
"Digitized by
G<
985 * t Bk. V.CH. VL J 7
Answet : — The prohibition contained in this sfltia does not refer to
the 9F* of the last sfitra, where it has the sense of "incompleteness* It re-
fers to that q^l which comes after a word, without changing the sense of that
word (^nr^i)H Thus the words ftmtK and fSftcA (the comparative and
superlative degrees of fro) show by the very fact of their comparison, that
the action denoted by them is not complete. These words ftvffit and ft^KPf
also take the affix ^ without change of sense. As ranttSP and TU fltf uy* H
and ^ScTCff &c as used by Patanjall himself in the following sentences i — *ft
ft ggpiftnrercsi ***fif, ^ffif W&tlsk «n«lt II This ^ is also prohibited in the
case of compounds with srrFt II In fact, this stitra teaches by implication
(Jfiapaka) that *i^ comes also in the sense of svarthau
6. The affix kan comes after the word bfihati
when it means " an article of dress ,f .
The word «K^ is to be read into this stitra and not its prohibition.
The force of this ^ is nil, or it is an example of fmi 9F* II Thus £**fr+^
*»f5RTCR? (TOR*) (VII. 4. 13 by which long vowel is shortened) M an upper
garment or mantle "•
Why do we say "when it means dress 11 ? Observe ffft 5^1 "the
metre called Bphatl ".
fRr? n *toto MifAidu *iA«hH •iAjjw i^wr*«lr s^sptcto^t ct9 *ip «w% *i*ftr w
7. The affix kha (fo) comes after the words
ashadaksha, ftfiitafigu, alankarma, alampurusha, and after a
stem ending with adhi.
The force of or is WpJ i e. it does not change the sense of the word.
The word trqnm means ,r that which has not six eyes M . q<re is compound*
ed from q^+Brf^ji by adding *PJ (V. 4. 113) "having six eyes". The affix
Of is to be added to this word already ending in the affix shach. Thus *TRT-
iflfifl H*qi u a secret not having six eyes ". i. e. M a secret known or determin-
ed by two persons only to the exclusion of a third ". Similarly tTlftltl<l4)4
«^oi^ B BTTftmr nTfftfrrercgq - «T£<l*mr " a forest where formerly cattle had graz-
ed n . The augment 5H, is added to srrftnr by nipAta, or irregularly. So also
st$3rffa:»?t3*p& ^^TTOfff 8 - competent to do any act, clever. So8f3 35-
«ft*r:«*TO m$* 3*TO - HfilHWiR: « fit for a man.
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. IV. §. 9 ] 9'n 986
A word ending with *fo 9 will be a Tatpurusha compound, by II. 1*
40, as the word vrfir belongs to 3auirf&di class. As frartN* II
The affix kha in the case of these words is invariable (nitya), because
the word ftnwr occurs in the next sfitra ; and it is a maxim of interpretation
that a rule occurring between two optional rules is nitya. The above words
always occur with this affix and never without it while in the case of other
words taught hereafter this affix comes optionally. There are other affixes
also which are svdrthika and nitya. Such as f[H% &c up to the affix *T^
(V. 3. 55 to 95). v* &c upto fs^ (V. 3. 1 12 to V. 4. 1) *n* &c upto iw^ f (V.
4. 11 to 21) and affixes taught from V. 4. 6 L e. m to V. 4. 9. (or), ending in
snfif and all Samasanta affixes.
8. The aflSx kha (fa) may optionally be added
without change of sense to a stem ending in anch(w^r)\when
it does not mean a point of the compass used in the femi-
nine gender.
Thus hp^ or uHN* "old", *r*fa* or W*frp* "new".
Why do we say "when not denoting a direction in the feminine?"
Observe unft ft^ "eastern region", ir^Nt fa* "western region." Why do we
say "a point of the compass'? Other words in the feminine will take this affix.
As unfaT WWfti *T*Wfar fma M Why do we say "in the feminine'? A direction
or f^R ' used in any other gender will take this affix. As ivHHr R^HuflqH,
9, The affix chha (fa) is added without change of
sense, to a stem ending in the word surer, when it means ap-
propriateness.
The word WJ means the substance or substratum in which j4ti or
generic quality adheres or any thing by which a thing is regulated and indi-
vidualised (qurcr finmKT *W*ft fira%). Thus **£ means that substance by which
the genus Brahmana, Kshatriya &c is distinguished Thus mgpnmfty M appro-
priate to a Brahmana ". tfPRPTnffa 1 , VwmfN: &c
Why do we say " when meaning appropriateness " Observe nigra-
arrfip WW •* the Br&hma^a caste is beautiful "
18
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
j>?7 *m.9 [Bk. V. Ch. IV. § II
gftn h HiwwiqiiflmH^ift<imi g* raft ^f»^m»r^ HiMM**^^ni h
10. The affix chha (fa) is optionally added to a
stem ending in ^TFT, if it is compounded with something
with which another is made to take an equal place.
The word *rcn* means s*ipf WMHH ' whose place is the same ' or |JR|
or equal Thus ft^r gwp- Wy*ll*Tw or fcjTOFP (firgft* CTPPTC3 whose place
is that of a father). Similarly lT9?*TP?ta or 1THWP; crererpftg : or cnrcqpr* ll
Why do we say "when it means equal to". Observe «*n*qM*l "cow-
shed n 8TOWTTC " stable ". The word |fir in toh^ is for the sake of dis-
tinctness. The word 4W4M as a Bahuvfihi compound \s the appropriate word
to be taken here, and not when it is taken as a Tatpurusha compound like
SHPI ^T ffH WFT *C II The word ^n" when " f is a conjunction : and joins the
two meanings.
The rule 9 occurring between this rule and 8th rule, both of which
are optional, must be taken to be a nitya rule, as explained above. fqtffcT-
V&ft«U ft>W* II
faAfii^<^uKi+*ift«<wqfl nun q^if^q^fe^,«rsOT v qr»
^Rn 11 ftn? v^hiiiHuRii'^muA^ii ft ftf^t m *r faMM*«uw:, tr?*3P*nf*nf^Rf?»
11. To the affix cTC and cW fa I. 1. 22) ordained
to come- after the word fa*c (V. 3. 55) or after a word end-
ing in n (VI. 3. 17) or after a finite verb (V. 3. 56, 57) or
after an indeclinable, is added the affix ftm («ff**), but not
if the excess belongs to a substance (and not to an action or
quality).
The ^ or src* and <p?^ affixes are employed for comparison (sftrf € ex-
cess ') of adjectives and adverbs This rule applies to adverbs and not to
adjectives : i. e. when an adverb qualifies a verb or another adjective, but not
when an adjective qualifies a noun. The f«f denoting word by itself has no
•excess' &c, it is the adjective which qualifies such substance that is capable of
excess or comparison. The prohibition in mg^iw f therefore really relates to
the quality of a substance; i. e. to adjectives, gssreqrenfosreg * f%^TT^%g^r I {
Thus fcrcnt or RiHHIH. " how excessively " s^rf <m or jftj <T*TT*, to-
IddilH^ or 4^ftdHI*i " he cooks surprisingly ", sxraPCT*, rosrant " more or most
loftily or loudly ".
But when the excess belongs not to an action or attribute, but to a
substance, the Amu *Wl is not added. As ixtmm w* " a most lofty tree".
V^iOOQle
Digitized by VjOOQ
IBK. V. Ch. IV § 14. ] «IR« 98»
12. In the Chhandas, the affix amu (*nO also is
added after the above, under similar conditions.
To the word ftft, words ending in ?, finite verbs and indeclinable^
when taking the comparative affixes m and f& is added the affix tpt, in the
Vedas, when these words are used as adverbs. By the force of the wprd *r
1 also ' in the sfttra, the affix *n3 is also included. Thus SRTOTO'P H or hwt
qTCH: I to* means q$E?rc tt
The words ending in *n* and «nare indeclinables as they are includ-
ed in the class of Svaradi (I. I. 37).
13. The affix ^hak (+ — **£) comes after the word
anug&din, without changing its sense.
Thus gr iamffos " repeater or who echoes back ".
W*i fcmuiH II ?« II ^I^ « «W.,.ftl^lHf *R ■
^nn 11 qifeqfireft «r^fa*nffiiW «ift*ff3 : r m«tUHii<f s^ s?rtr **fa ftnrf flrc% »
14. The affix afi (31) comes without changing the
sense, after a word ending in the affix $ach (+' — si), when the
word is feminine.
By III. 3. 43 the affix «r? is ordained after feminine words denoting
reciprocity of action. The affix *T^ comes after such a word without chang-
ing the sense, when the thing denoted is feminine. Thus uu<t<N*f)» «0Rfr^ TOir*
Q. Why the word «ft a feminine" is repeated in this sfltra, when we
already know from III. 3. 43 that *i? comes only after feminine words ; and
a svarthika affix like ht^ coming after a feminine word will keep the word
feminine ?•
Ans.— The repetition of the word «ft in this sfltra, teaches by impli-
cation (jft&paka) the following " t*Tf*faiP JTRWP ilfJcltir G>«m^iiW<taTrqaA " :—
u Sometimes it happens that bases which are derived by means of affixes
that do not convey any particular meaning of their own, but leave .the mean-
ing which is conveyed by the original to which they are added, unchanged,
do not take their gender and number from those original bases from which
they are derived". Thus fnr^Fqrj^fT.^H^qT TOST (g*T faSwOformed by adding
the switrtha affix *&* (V. 3. 67) to g* and fo the resultant words being in the
feminine gender. Similarly from **-3*cTT is derived without change of
meaning, but change of gender.
T.
Digitized b y VjOOQIC
989 ff^g^M [ bk. v. en iv, §. 17
sif&igun II IS R u^ifa (I sftir, *3*n I
iRp 11 fftlwr ^n^fj^nrf^tWcn^fRCTt^ 55 spirit* *nrtf 1
15. The affix an (+ — 3?) comes without changing
the sense, after a stem ending in the affix inu^i OnpO*
By III. 3. 44, the affix 13*5 is added to a root to express a condition
resulting from a universal co-operation of the action denoted by the root
But a word formed by f3«f is after all an imaginary word, it requires the
further addition of this affix *i*f to make it a complete word. In fact, all
sv&rtha affixes generally complete the not fully developed word. Thus uRliquiHL
foMiRuh*k<a B \% II q^rft 11 fomfcm :, *&&, (w»r) 11
^Rn ii ftoflft l^nft 1 R*uR<jUMiHqi*f sw msm *rcfit t^i swft 11
16. The affix a$ (+ — *i) is added to the word
fa«lT<< when a word expressing " fish " is to be made.
Thus TOlfb** " a fish n . Why do we say u when it means a fish " ?
Observe ft&rfr **T*T: " Devadatta who is gliding out*.
fRr: ii (hwwSw ft»^i^niiri | i ,j rt f^r^n ^i9 ¥^g^^ | ywl , *rcfir w
17. The affix kjitvasnch (&&Q is added to a
Numeral, when the repetition of an action is to be counted.
This is also a sv&rtha affix. The word srai^frT* means " again and
again or repetition ". The counting of actions belonging to the same class
and having the same agent, which occur again and again is called $qrar4frr-
iPRH.il Thus*rrercr* 5?% «***$*%£* "he eats five times". So also *TT-
W &c.
Why do we say " after a Numeral " ? Observe *frl *KF* *J% " he eats
many times".
Objection : — Why do we say "action" when we know that an € action f
alone can be repeated, and not a substance or an attribute? Reply : The word
faqr is employed in this sfitra for the sake of the next sfltras, into which its
anuvfitti flows. Thus in sfitra 19, q^^q 3^*7 when the affix does not apply
to count repetition, because it is impossible for a unit to express repetition ;
but merely to count the * action " only.
Why do we use the word " repetition " ? The affix will not apply
when merely "actions" are counted. Thus ^TOTOP "five cookings", ^rrr-
Why do we use the word "counting" when we know that a Numeral
is nothing but counting ? Had the sfttra been merely q$qrar: fa*imu^«ft ¥*?-
j
Digitized by
Google
Bk. V. Cii. IV. $. 20] m 1 990
g^r, there would arise this anomaly. The numerals upto ten denote only the
thing numbered (*fciifrC, but the numerals above those denote both the counting
(CTTIPT) and the thing counted (ctsto) U If ippf were not used, the affix would
come only after the numeral denoting sankhyeya and not saftkhy&na. Thus
it will apply to iidiHK 55% -JRRF*:, but not here *rJ *TU*lf 5^K; because here
the word tot does not denote repetition, but merely a counting. By using the
word iranT it applies to both.
uLf*M<i*fc u^ 11 \* 11 m<ih 11 far, nr, Mjjvi:, 5^ n
fl%* 11 fif r% ^TsJ^fSl^**: ^WTO«f^* f3Ml^llilTl | l u IH «* fining g^t JT^TO lift •
18. The affix " such " (*?) is added to the numeral
dvi, tri and chatur, in the same sense of counting the repeti-
tion of an action.
This debars &*&% II Thus ft— ftw, fir— x*% ^3^— ^31 in ft$^3*
f^HR%, ^g%^> H The *j in the last example is elided by VIII. 2. 24: but ^TJH
meaning "four", and ^5^ meaning "four-times", are differently accented:
the ^ of u^ indicating that the accent udAtta falls on the last syllable. Thus
^5t (^"rlMH. Un V. 58, beieg formed with the affix 'uran* added to ^f) 9 and
^tl(withg^).
19. The word ^WH is substituted for *&: before
the affix u^, when an action is to be counted.
This debars $*33Pt II The • repetition ' being impossible, the action
alone is counted : so the anuvritti of f^r only runs into this sfltra and not
of ar ^rfm : ll Thus ?5Tf^np r % "he eats once ° *Tg?*ftft II The ^ of 5^ is
elided by VIII. 2. 23. But not here in q^r* TOP as being against usage.
fe*rrar gretafi sf ^gOT^ u ^0 n vprfk 11 ikw*r, vim, w, «rt%-
hjUmjA ll
20. The affix sit is optionally added to the nu-
meral *rg, to count the repetition of an action, occurring in a
not distant period of time.
This debars grerg^ which comes in the alternative. The word tifor-
^Z " not remote ", qualifies fammi^M: ; i. e. when the recurring of the action
takes place within a short time, it is STHra$S3tT3 M Thus w&n or Wg$*r ftTOBt
H^% "he eats many times a day". But when a renjote time is denoted then
*n does not apply. Thus vg$*3ir *TO^| SH^* lie eats many times in a month,
not daily, owing to poverty &c'
h
Digitized by
Google~
_j
99» **^ M [ Bk. V. Cii. IV. $ 22
d<M*cH^ *p^[ K \\ II t^TFT II cRI, H»d«w3 , *T^ H
HI*WI*f iq^TOWfiTOSf II
21. The affix maya^ (*pr with the feminine in grave
i) is added to a word in first case in construction, when the
sense is "made thereof, or "subsisting therein".
The translation of the sfltra given above is according to the rendering
of Prof. Bohtlingk. According to K&sikA : — ^ signifies that the word in cons-
truction to which the affix is to be added should be in the nominative case,
(IV. i. 82) the word !T$<ri means "happening to be in abundance". So that
according to this interpretation the sfltra should be translated, as done by Dr.
Ballantyne, "The affix maya{ may be employed after a word denoting some
substance, when we require an expression for it as abundant". Thus *tst y<t«\*{
■■araTOW "abundance of food", st^jftoh, "abundance of cake". According to
others, that in which there is abundance of the thing signified by the word
to which the affix to* is added, is denoted by the whole word. Thus snr UW-
*rfwj=»ST5PWr*l*p "a feast in which there is abundance of food", m^nq tf, q^-
qpTORPn' II Both senses are possible, as the sfitra is constructed,
"The word ^rt in the sfltra has two senses. It being made by the
affix ra^ conveys the force both of the nature (III. 3. 1 14) and the site. In
the former case, (taking, ^ iWiT*M to mean "the mention of that as abund-
ant)", we have snPOT£ "abundance of grain". But in the second case, (taking
it to mean "that in which something is spoken of as abundant)" we have tronrair
«T?T: "a sacrifice at which food is abundant". (Dr. Ballantyne's Laghukaumudi).
22. When that, whereof something is made or
subsists in, is a multitude, then the affixes expressing a great
quantity (IV. 2. 37 &c) may also be employed to denote
" made thereof, subsisting therein ". '
The ^ shows that ira^ also comes in the same sense. Thus 3np=KT :
TfESJ- m*$*t JTEjrTn-HTffo^ (IV. 2. 47) or *u<4iH4hl; so also ^rr^fe^^ or *i«g?-
tfrRPlll In the second sense we have, %^r: *$<tt: BTf^q*r=«ntf^Kr °r %W
«ror ^:; m*«frfo* : or m»fl<flw 11
WFcn^T^f^ff^nrra: S*V II ^ II q^lfa II SHFcT, ^NMM , %fa f
^Rf: II BTTSrnft**: t*nf S*F ***** *rtftf H
Mfc^y/
Bk. V. ClI. IV. |. 2$ ] Vf 99«
■ ■
23. The affix fiya ( V— T) comes, without chang-
ing the sense, after the words an ant a, ftvasatha, itiha and
bheshaja.
Thus BTFrp^nL-BTTFnt s*TTOUWL-*UTO*ri 'a dwelling place, a sanctuary
for sacred fire'. IfcfiWl-ffif f 'traditional account', the affix here is added
to a word which is not a pr&tipadika. The word {fir 9 means tradition, as f<%
It is optional to add this affix, owing to the general optional nature
of all taddhita affixes. See IV. I. 82.
^dkdMK*wJ TcJ II ty II q^rf^ II ^RrFgRt , dK«3, ^H N
fl%s II ^idm^MKMlffisfl^i^liltffaHtjf^K l^ Hfr R?Wt **<% I
24. After a stem ending in the word ^crr being
in the fourth case in construction comes the affix *r?C in the
sense of " appointed for it ".
The word tnrwfa has the same meaning as g^J " for the sake of that 9
(II. 1. 37). Thus 3Tfafafrft n^srfJf^Psl* " offering &c, sacred to Agni w . So
also f^TO*, ITSf^** II
m<(itfiyit ^r II *\ II q^rft n qi^ f ^vj1v4IH , ^, (i&O A
f frT II <TT?W[Snn I m4l54ll1l*qf ^ti^UlHtfrnf <rro2iPf^ u«to% n*fa 1
^rffrare 11 ^iami^u^m^(\^^^^MHL u *r« 11 qpresw^giremfrresgg r •
*r* 11 to* % nftqm«tfMSimw jp*rar: ii *t* 11 f w jot upj u
*T« II HTT^RTH**^: Ifiirtr *^**P M *!• II P>MW»<Ri II 3To I BTT^fhj^PffmTTR It
25. The affix *m ccmes after the words VJ% and
are, being in the fourth case in construction, when the mean-
ing is f for the purpose of that \
The word 3r?u$ is understood here also. Thus <JI4l*?!i<4 — TOPI " water,
meant for washing the feet w . So also sre^t ll The accent of these words is
governed by VI. 1. 213, the ud&tta being on the first syllable.
The ^ in the sfltra implies the inclusion of words other than qif and
st$, not mentioned here. The affix *T?j applies to other words also, as ipq , \
UHWIffCTOeRq: rantf*: I So also ^ f ^it, ^fo 9ifo OT» Z&R, ri*l* P**%TOt
^W, ^pt, *$ TT, ^C, *rf, nftg ll These words take m( in the Vedas. Thus
TO**P. 3TOTO : , ^:, 2R*sp,V*T : »3^t:, *^W, PH^WWI, ^R(?WU f T&t, 5*$*, *TO, ^"ji*,
1cfr: and qf%gq: in *ituQ3iqqmm I bt*K% WWP (ft tftoN 3^^13*1 I Brft TORT iwrfs)
w^fN^r i qgoftrf} 1 $r«rc* *Rnt 1 jijHw 11 ft*%*** ttaT% i *^tir toftr 1 *Rtrni*ft i
SPIT fatf: I ^t h^h^HH TO* I q$: I TO: I *(faW: H So also the words miflmmL
and gffS^sfirai M
h
Digitized]
993 ** » [ Bk - v - Ch - l v - §• 2 9
F4r/: : — The affix stTOJ comes after the word OT; as srcroj TOf?r> *RTO[
F#r/: — ^is the substitute of to, and the affixes 8^, tpr^ and or sire
added to it ; as, qjPL ^JTOL, 'rffa* M
Vdrt : — To the word IT meaning f old ', the' affix *f is added as well as
the affixes er, tff and ^e.g. JTHH, and W£, q <HH , and iffaPl ll
Ftfrf : — The affix $i| is added to the words *n*T, *CT and *TPT» e. g. *nn-
>fan*, ^WWL, »inWWLll This affix comes after ft*r in the Vedas, as, Pn^fa IcR* H
F4r/: — The affix *n^ comes after mi'-fta and srercor, as, BTT^flryr^,
iJIMK^HL M The feminine is formed by tft* as srn^taT, SfT>m<tt ll All these are
illustrationsof the option allowed by IV. I. 82, so that sometimes these affixes
do not apply, as sn^hlT JITHT, STW1T f* U
Vdrt : — In the Chhandas, *TR comes after 9raro and *n^, btopTCT and
ITSi in 9TTO& f?l% HTCT TOP M
«ffe^J: ll ^ n q^ifa II srflr*:, sar. n
26. The affix flya (+' — *r) comes after 3tt%pi in the
fourth case in construction, in the sense of "for the purpose
of that"-
The word flm£ is understood here also. Thus «rftra3t n*=**rri%ui^il
ffrP II qi^fi fn%fin I VWMI4. W*f ^5 TOrff Hfftl
27. The affix cp?[ comes after ^, without change
of sense.
The anuvritti of gr*Uc does not apply here and ceases. Thus fW"
^P tt This word is always in the feminine, another example of the rule that
a word derived by a svArthika affix does not always follow the gender of its
primitive.
*T%: f *r. II V II Vljft II *&:, *>: N
Stf^P II *kR*IMI<1 S*I^ **: *stfr *Wft II
28. The affix q? comes after sjpr, without change
of sense.
ThusBTmn-«rft:w
*miftvi : ^ II ^ I ^Tf^r II *iwiftw y («*) 11
fWs 11 to fSiwrtt^ : **nf *i^ro*t *wfa i
29. The affix sfj comes after the words ira &c,
without changing their sense. *
Thus *retp » *!*, irf^RR; - nfifw
Google
bigitize^y ' VjOOg '
Bk. V. Ch. IV. § 3x ] ^n 99*
HtHii^*^, 10 <rcfc ^ftvm ( faan% ), u «rs ftjfr 12 3* fsftft, i3>rm ^nft, 14
^prftj, 15 *pt $fl*Rir, 16, *3 ^r, 17 few ( w&s) 18 snr, 19 **3nr\ 20 $inta&-
iV. B. The affix qp( is added to ^wj and jffcf when denoting a season: as,
d^l* «C5^i tftafti 1RJ: M Otherwise 3«>Trcffep> tftcttR3& H ^ a*d ft*OT take qR^wnen
denoting an animal, as gs^: op f^HRI^n <TO : » otherwise 55fTT*tf *, fkmtit *fh*, n US
takes ^j^ when meaning 'clever', as *n33P W*F£ otherwise *T»J only. J5T takes
^ when meaning 'artificial', as, J^Pfit Hiq i RPllSfa : H OT^ takes ^ when denoting
a student who has completed his study of the Vedas, as ^THT^ II TOJ takes 3FJ when
meaning empty, as 44«hlft*!l forfcN*: \WW» otherwise *p*: 7*03* h *• TOJT4 tfa* fl
fR takes ^ when contempt is meant, as $fw^Pt"^PRi^ II IT3 takes ^ when
meaning thread, as ?rw^r ^jST fr yrergjf , otherwise ffj: tffc^ II The word ending in
feg^ takes ^1, as OqfeK: U The words denoting play things of girls take ^\ 9 as
15*5^11
30. The affix ^c comes, without changing the
sense, after the word srftffc, when it means a precious stone.
Thus <4i<3«*: - $rf^: "Ruby". Why do wc say 'when it means a pre-
cious stone?' Observe, Sift*: 'red'.
*of ^rft& 11 ^ II q^rft ll *3f f % *rk&, (**0 »
l^f : II SIFTO *°T *^HMI*lfoWM i «W l if qpsreraT *TO% i
31. The affix ^ comes after gyrfgg , when it means
color which is not permanent.
Thus HlQctti: SRfr^r "red with anger." girf|33F <fhr5f II
Why do we say "not permanent" Observe m$$l t)r. "a red cow". AfM
*&foc* "the red blood".
Vdrt\ — The derivative of <$rft«r may not take the gender of the primi-
tive, as tflftfou or fjtftPRST *i^r II .
*%r n w n *F&ik n ^r, (^) n
32. The affix srqc comes after the word <£)it£<r mean-
ing a substance dyed red.
As.«iift«M|-: t&w or ^: II Similarly HTrlfrPKT or tftf^PTOT *n# I
*sraro 11 33 11 q^rfa n ^rarac, ^r n
19
f.
Digitize d by VjO OQ 16
995 " *wr w [ Bk. V. Ch. IV. 5 36
33. The affix 9^C is added to the word *ffas, when
it means a passing color, or dyed with color.
The word ^ifa gtf^pSi and ^ arc both understood here. Thus m<&[ g^f
^f^PI "the face black with shame or confusion". 4H4»: qr- 'a cloth dyed
blue-black'. tEfftftn Jlrffr II
34. The affix ot& (+ — lr or + — *#r) comes without
changing the sense after the word fk^t and the rest.
Thus Vrft^P - ftTO*, SFri^Tll The *rr of *qn* is shortened, as, ^ttftCT It
The word srawtni should be read as M^h^i l l in order to apply |« and not 3*, as>
mHiRw & The fSr is elided, because it is # an Avyaya. See VI. 4. 149. The
affix is optional by IV. 1. 82.
f*T*, 7 3?^fHni, 8*rcnm f 9*TTTC, lOspranm, 11 ssWfTCt 12 *m&, 13*3*^*,
14 ?5T2? f 15 Rrew, 16 bhto, 17 «rfw, 18 qpj.
35. The affix 3Tf> conies after ^P* when it means
the purport of the message spoken by another.
The word sqrga means c declared, expressed '. That which was spok-
en formerly by another, and which is carried by a third party as a ■ tiding' or
• news \ is called mu£<u4 II Thus *tf^? *\*W $i ' he relates the verbal message \
3TPTO *S[jyf II Some say it applies to written message also.
Why do we say " when it means a verbal message ? n Observe, w&x
qrt? $yfrr^l ' the speech of Devadatta is sweet '.
d^Thlc^iin sm || 3$ || q^TFT II d^Thldl, SsW, *flB II
qrrfcs»Ui *rq*rercfr s«*mmftM i 4«h4K ^ u 4i^difta^w^*a«i<wiH«i ii
36. The affix sn^ comes after the word *£&? occupa-
tion', when it occurs in connection therewith (i. e. when it is
the result of an oral message or commission). l
Thus ^srt^»^r 'an occupation of a commision agent(?)\ i. e. when an
act is done in pursuance to or on hearing of a verbal message or commission.
Vdrt : — The words ?gr*re, TOT, fro*, ^rftt, *V*sm, P^r and Bn^T take the
affix Bpi in the Vedas. As 4iHlt4:,»f^F?:; so also 3TC?*»%qT? : i <h\H\V, ^FTTW,
The following words formed by ^without change of sense, occur in
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
Bk V. Ch. I V. §. 40 ] «r?« 99*
the Vedic and the secular literature:— qrengy, gTTg^lPfC -, 0H4M I W & WSS^F (*I3-
*mr afar 1 *) ^TTgjH-t *?rg*jjr**P, (^gtffc iral - A6ui*t) fntrpip. Cwfra' ¥•*•*! ^**OVira:»
^f*p, qiftq*ftd^ (qftr* qft*Rtf *q[9ft¥fr) snurnqn, mmnuw , qrem: i
37. The affix «nff comes after sttoto when it docs
not mean a species.
Thus «tftra fW% "he drinks medicine". sft^>t *RTi% "he gives medicines' 9 .
Why do we say "when not meaning a ^ift or species". Observe, iTTTW <ff*
^rr ^nrf^r 'the herbs are growing in the field'
miiKViasr II ^ II M<tifa II M^jif^vi:, ^ f (snjr) H
Jjfa- U SJMHIttfft TO : I TO (Uftllft**: MUtwf^tq: ^yif y* snipd *f*fa W
38. The affix sror comes after the words si* &c.
(the words retaining their sense).
Thusm^n-TO* " a wise person " feminine unfr; while HT5P "a man
possessed of wisdom " with feminine in^r comes from TOI " wisdom " by the
affix or having the sense of Jfij^ ("being possessed of"), taught in V. 2. *oi. The
TO of this sfttra comes from the root iniFlTfa-TO : " he who knows fully".
The word ft^j occurs in the list of TOTft words. It is formed by the
addition of the affix ^pj*(III. 2. 124} to the root,as,f%^+^P|=ft^nom. s.pt^H
The very fact that we have such a from faf^ shows that the substitution of ^5
for *p| after the word ft? taught in VII. 1. 36 (by which we get ftopO is an
optional substitution, the word " optionally" being drawn in from SOtra VII.
I. 35. The word 'Jpr takes sc^r when meaning 'body', as Kmn\ otherwise 4r*H
'the sense of hearing', ^npi takes «^r when meaning 'a black antelope*, as W^T M
The word $«dc takes w$ when meaning 'a black antelope', as, in*** II
1 to> 2 ?rffcn» , 3 ^ftni, 4 sfcor^ ( tri^r^, 3f*m ), 5 ip*rcr f 6 fanjt 7 f%^, 8
qnr^ 9 Rrw, 10 ipr^, 11 «j?pr *rtft 12 ^f^, 13 $** ^r, 14 FrtH*, is <tnc, 16 q%
( TO* ), 17 **, 18 *rg^ ( **TQ ), 19 *g ( *$! ), 20 q^ ( q*! ) 21 if^, 22 q^r ( 9-
? ) 23 *n*?g ( ST^, ^^cT ), 24 ^rfc 25 to^, 26 wirfKT*. 27 **g* ( Bngti ) 28 «w f
29 frore, 30 *urft, 31 srirr* ( set ! ), 32 f^rr, 33 ^5, 34 qnra, 35 ^, 36 <nir. u "
mftci<h< u ^ u wfa 11 *&:, fcrtac n
f^F II ^*MI<HI*f firer*ro*it *rcf% II
39. The affix Rre^C comes after ^ (the word re-
taining its sense).^
Thus ^frrar-S? c mud', Of couise this is also an optional affix not a
ititya affix like many of the sv&rthika affixes enumerated in V. 4. 7.
l
■ DiOJJi7ftrLby
r; ° r> g Ip
s\
997 VQ* [ Bk. V.CH. IV. 1 43
40. The affix ^ and <R come after ^ when it
means € excellence \
This debars the affix s^n V. 3. 66. Thus TO^rr qz^ym or q*m II
4 These two affixes are nitya or invariable, i. e. whenever superiority is to be ex-
pressed we must add these affixes. The reason for our calling it nitya is that
the word m^wni 'optionally' follows it in V. 4. 42, so that this affix is not
optional c V. 4. 7, 10, &c.
i^rsnRTf foc*difo<al ^a^fa n *\ n t*r, Jibwuh , fctw, ar-
fast, *z 9 ***4fa n
•ffrf: 11 sfotu^iftdt? i <t*"5rqyr«rf Jrir$nnRi%*f qrWMimr «wroirt ftrtiif*k£t ufnrat"
41. In the Chhandas, the affix nftr( — i-rer)and crfra^
come after fw* and ^nr, when excellence is denoted.
The word u<im*UHt is to be read into this sOtra. This also debars ^q^
V. 3. 66. Thus feint: or yrofib as, *r% TC3T f«nfil«H< : (Rig. Veda II. 34,
9). Similarly wadlltj: II
Mi'WfcMU 4U-qd«^m »
42. After a word signifying much or little, comes
the affix snac optionally, when the word stands in agreement
with a verb (as k&raka).
No especial 3TTC3fi being mentioned, all cases such as accusative &c are
to be taken. Thus q^fo *5nft a *53f ??Tft, ^gPl5^lRt = ^l^t **Tft II So also 95*9:
9tt*n&ft or wpr 8Tnr^i% &c. Similarly sterol SSTft- W* or sr^r &c
Why do we say "signifying much or little"? Observe irf ^H% **** Wltfhl
Why do we say "when it is a k&raka"? Observe ^^X ^rnft "lord of
many". Here the words are in genitive case and a genitive or 6th case is not a
<hKcfc or a case, dependent or related to a verb: and so the affix is not applied here.
By the word 'signifying', the synonyms of 95 and «T^f are also includ-
ed. Thus gfrot writ, ^TOlP Wft W 1
This affix is to be applied only when the action refers to an auspicious
act Thus *§*Jf ^n^-BP34Ui*H^*%; siFTOnreTfit-srftes «WS n Thus *&H
\f$ "Give much on auspicious occasions as sacrifices &c°. btftot sf| "give a
little on unauspicious, occasions as funeral feasts &c*.
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
BK. V. Ch. IV. § 45. ] *l* • 99*
fftn ii (winnow qmnf^%^ iwumhw ^l^inr tfcorar ^ratTO^ n«ifii umaihuv
43. The affix srac comes optionally after crude
forms denoting numbers, and words denoting units of a coin
in the singular number, when a distributive sense is to be ex*
pressed (and the word is a k&raka).
Thus ft ft HtT^t TOfif-fiFEifr *ft*«ft TO1% "He gives two sweet-meats to
each". So also Pro: II Similarly after words in the singular number as, ^ref-
VTOfr mfo "he gives a Karshftpa^a coin to each". So also iron, iTWr: M That
by which the sense of unit is expressed is called eka-vachana. The words
k&rsh&pana &c denote quantity, but their function in the sentence is to denote
one-ness i. e. one to each, though in fact many are given.
Why de we say "after Numerals and units of coin"? Observe *ik v&
TOI% "he gives a pot to each". Why do we say "when a distributive sense is
meant'? Observe if ^rfq "He gives two". *KTWTO> *^n% "he gives a kArsh-
ftpaQa".
This rule of ourse applies when the word is in relation with a verb
viz. when it is a k&raka, and not when it is in the genitive case governing ano-
ther noun, As ^frw : **r* "Lord of two each". *hnfmmHi 4»iflmmw wnft
"Possessor of a karshapanas each". In fact the work "k&rak&t" of the last sfitra
is understood here also. This sfitra is exception to VIII. I. 4.
qfftrere ii * nqm»<fr grrorftm ^Tfrsurwm
44. The affix arer comes after that Ablative case
which is ordained owing to the union with the Karma-prava-
chanlya word xfa R
This Ablative case is ordained by Sfitra II.3. 1 1. Thus qjg: *T3ftT?p qft,
mPiH»jti4'W ^W The anuvfitti of q? u optionally" runs here also: thus it b
an optional rule; we have the' regular forms 4lii44l<t &c, also.
Vdrt : — The affix 5rffc comes after the words Brrft &c : as, «nf^» *F*9h
qpfo'> T^if &c. This is an ftkptigana, no complete list being given.
fRn 11 mmtft 3T qs^tit ran <?>*nTr *r *Rp ro*t *rofifr 1 <rt<iiv«l <ta*|fc IrP*
45. The affix h^j comes after that Ablative case
which has the force of an Apddana Karaka, except when this
t
1.
ninitivo-H hw I -lOQO I P
999. <"%M [BK. V. CH.-IV.J 47.
apad&na relation arises owing to the union with the verbs ^far
(passive of *r) and ^^ n
Thus utto **pr«3l% or uniPfc so also *$mn or nfrtA flftfir, WOTHP or
*ra**mi<rcnra% II See Sfltras I. 4. 24, 25, and 26 &c. Not so when the verbs
4frl and ^r govern the ablative : as, *mrf^ *fa?t q^ns: «TTO?fir H The form tf*
is given in the sfltra to indicate that the verb jr whose present tense is *r?T% is
to be taken, and not faffiH W Thus we have ffiqr feferffifr or igreferffifr II How
do you explain the use of M tasi " in the following well-known verse: u *&£k.
#«f? CTCft **&tt *T" ? The words here are not in the ablative, but in the Ins-
trumental case I. e. **fc* qSfa m fai 11 r
uRd nwil h^Rt w ■%■ ***1R «f H^ft 1
46, The affix tasi comes after that Instrumental *
case which does not denote an agent, and is governed by a
verb having the sense of u to excel", "not to give way", and
"to blame",
Thus t3taifttycjlt or frr^tsf^ijw^ ^rft^r or ^rrfonftsfifipafr ll This
means when a person of good conduct surpasses, others through his conduct,
he is said 'to have excelled through his conduct and character". So also f^r
or frnfr * «W% J similarly *f fi >H or "qfrsrat &c, the sense being he does not
succumb or is not moved owing to his strength of conduct or character.
Similarly f%*c or frRf * finP, ^ft^^r or ■qfofcT: rem* "blamed owing to his bad
conduct".
Why do we say "when not denoting an agent'? Observe ^Tf^T fitlP
"blamed by Devadatta".
tCUiuMMmflnw II «* 11 t^rft II tO^iHH , qrr f ^tm% ^r, (sftr.) II
^jTrT: II *M thrift ^^Wl %$& I $raHf*PT <ri*R *T ^RT V&l Hlll*M* W4 1*411 3T Q<ft4f faf*
47. And the affix tasi comes optionally after a
word ending in the third case-affix, when such word is joined '
to the verb " htya ", or the noun "p&pa"; not denoting an
agent.
The words srerSft and fftftarar: are understood in this aphorism. Thus
f%?l ^f or f^mfr fare 11 ^rrft^f $Ni* or ^iR^cft ^WSr 11 So also in construction
with the word TO, as, frR <jp?: or ftffi: to : 11 ^rrft^T TO: or ^rfaRP TO* II This
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. IV. § so] Chvl n 1060
use of the affix is in places other than those where censure is meant: in other
words, it comes where no censure is implied but a simple fact is mentioned.
Where censure is implied, the affix tasi would come by force of the preceding
aphorism V. 4. 46.
The word *TC?fTft being understood here also, the affix does not come
when the 3rd case-affix has the force of an agent: as **f#f ft*H N
«**s*r 5*m*^ ll «* II *i^rfa U tow* *msfr, (aftr.) n
48. The affix tasi comes optionally after a word
ending in the sixth case, when the sense is that of a party-
name or faction.
Taking sides with one faction or another is called sqnTO M Thus 'far
mjnm «ws^-^f »4JH^ I ^H1< 11 • The Devas became Arjunites '. So also
*nF|3TTS <* u u?l^»HHL "The Adityas became Karnaites".
Why do we say "when it denotes a Party-name ?" Observe, 3$^
frrar " the branch of the tree ".
49. The affix tasi comes optionally after a word
denoting a disease, ending in the sixth case, when the heal-
ing of the same is denoted.
The word tpr means 4 disease ', and strict means 'healing', * curing *•
Thus jhit^rip utftasrt $5~ m i fH»<f : a?s ; so also fefann $* h
Why do we say 'when healing is meant? Observe EreifgqfTOP mfM^fr M
w^dditA *wfcwVi £<nre&ft fen n^o n q^n ^dd^i^ y,
50. The affix chvi comes after a word, when the
agent has attained to the new state expressed by the word,
what the thing previously was not, and when the verbs kji
1 to make ', ^ c to be *, and srac * to be ' are conjoined with it.
The words vpg&mfo are not words of P&nini, but of the V&rtika-Kflra,
and read into the sfltra by the author of K&$ik4. When something or some-
body has become that which is expressed by the stem, then this affix f%f
Digitized
by.G^O!gI(
iooi «?or * [ Bk. V, Ch. IV. § 53
Is added. When the cause of a thing arrives at the state of being that very
thing so produced, it is said to be abhfltatadbh&va — 'the state of that what
it was not*. The agent of the action of attaining is called sampadya karti.
ThussTOiP 535: ^xrorar, * 3^3-39^ ^rf?r "he whitens" — when some one
who is not white becomes whit? i. e. some one makes him so, then we say 5^
**rtmr U So also 5$r 'WW, 3J# s*nt- tftt snfr *rtftr ll The word 3J5^ is thus
formed :— 5T$+f^r-3FF5+f +(*« «T of Sukla is changed into f by VII. 4. 32,
and the whole affix is elided by VI. I. 67)^^ II Similarly qift ^fifa TOC
• he makes a jar of the clay ' : q# *T*fit, q^ m*l M
Why do we say « becoming that what it was not ' ? Observe 5* stftfa
f he makes white'. Here the thing that has been made white is not ex-
pressed, and hence no affixing takes place.
Why do we say "when conjoined with the verbs $,5 and j^h? w
Observe btui^ 3RBT 5IFW The verb here is sp* ' to produce ', and hence no
affixing. Why have we used the words sampadya kartari 4 the agent that has
attained \ for even without their use, the words abhOta-tadbhava 'becoming
what the thing previously was not \ would imply that the attainment was of
the agent ? The use of sampadya-kartari "shows that the attainment spoken
of here should be of the « agent \ and not of any other kAraka, as, sffcr^^fc
*TO% 'becoming in the temple what was not before in the temple; such as a tree
&c\ Here the kftraka is locative and not agent, and the becoming of what the
thing previously was not refers to location and not to agency. Hence no affix
is added here.
51. The affix chvi comes after the words arus f
man as, chakshus, chetas, rahas, and rajas, and there is elision
of their final consonant.
The affix f*| would have come after these words by force of the last
sfltra which is of universal application : the present sOtra is made in order
to teach the elision of the consonant Thus mm t *T*?*TO, # 3ftrf3«src?
^crfir, *HR **/*• *TO rar<l M So also &*tft zmft, iTOfic or fun*, so also TO^J,
fa*r#, facflr, and froft gftfRT or >rcfit or &m » The short ? of src and ^5 is
lengthened by VII. 4. 26, and the * of the other words is changed into i by
VII. 4. 3*.
ftm*r nrfcT <M<4r3 II <« ll q^rft 11 f^rnr, *nfcr sjr& »
tf»mntqtiw sjjftr %*t (mwi^Qflr s$*3*3% 1 *tfsrfSra% ^rr art?*: to* **ft
9*roSn«wf*i i-
Digitized by
Google
;BK.V.'C!L IV.5.S3J m($W ,7003
• 52. The affix sftti may be employed optionally in
the sense of chvi, when something is changed in all its parts
into something else.
The. whole phrase •'when the agent has attained to a state it pre-
viously had not and the verbs kri, bhft and asti are in conjunction*", is under*
sto9d here. The affix ^rrRr is employed when the original is changed In its
totality ($***). Thus srfirarr? **fir TO* M the whole weapon is in a blaze-
has become fire". We may also say snft H^fir TO* M So also **toh[ jNfif Vf
***** or *y$t *fl% fJT^ " The salt becomes all water ". /
Why do we say M .in its totality "? Observe f^ft 1* 3$ *T*fa "the
cloth whitens in part ".
The word " optionally* shows that the affix chvi also comes in the
same sense. While the optional affixing of these terminations chvi, s&ti &c
is governed by the MahA-vibh&shA of sfltra IV. i % 82 (see V. 3. i).
. ifrr? w Brf^ftfw9«nfft : • srfnftqfr «i*<4hiH faiRtrt ^rri%: sraqt *wl<r sput iti&t, n^
53. The affix s&ti comes after a word in the sens&
of chvi, when it is in construction with the verb sam-pad, and
the meaning is that all things of a kind are changed into some
thing else, though partially.
The word srftrcft: means 'pervasion*. The force of the word ^r in the
s&tra is that the same sense is expressed when the verbs $, 5 and spr are in
.construction as well. By drawing the anuvritti of the word vibh&shA into this
sfttra, we may, in the alternative, employ the affix f^j in the same sense of
abhividhi: but then it must be followed by. the verbs $, ^and W^onJy and
not by the verb SPTT II
Thus *rffcrcrni fcro% or *rffcreri *rcflr; ^rwhj *rra% or *im &c Or
*&ft H^fir or «T**ft mffir ii
What is the difference between the words abhividhi and kartsnya of
these two sutras? Where all things of similar origin get changed, though it*
Jt>e partially only, it is called abhividhivikara. As, wratf %TOPl4fim<ta *pfat
*re* biP«i^|c( q*rolr ; or *q% *r$t?CTPi3?3rernt swrror ll Here tfl has* the force
of JPffTCSRrasi namely, all things belonging to the kind of weapons such as
swords, lances and all things of the nature of salt, but not these things in-
dividually in its totality. While the word kArtsnya means that one thing
in all its parts assumes the form of another thing. In short, the difference
between these two words is this: when one object is changed in all its partsy
19* . 1
K
Digitized by-
r -™3 ]t>
*oQ3 «mr » [ Bk. V. Ch. iv. J. 55
it is k&rtsnya change, when many objects are changed in somi of their parts,
it is abhividhi change.
ipT: 1 3^jd^N^i?r f*¥&L autifUiiNMrii $jjfiE?rct*t fcro ^ *&* i qvtfi ajnnfr
*Ufd4TW^ , KM^I Spwft SftfcP S**F& *Frt% sgftcTfts fcw t *F*t I
54. The affix s&ti comes after a word expressing
. * a master or lord ', in the sense of * dependent upon this ',
when it is in conjunction with the above verbs kyl, bhti. asti, and
sam-pad.
The anuvptti of ?n$rffl3(nr ceases here, as a different sens.e altogether is
assigned to the affix. The anuvfitti of the four verbs Kp &c, however, runs
into the sfitra. The word ffftJH means ' under the supremacy or control of
that', 4 under the proprietorship of that*. Proprietor in general and the object
of rulership in general are indicated by the word tadadhina. . Thus *nir*fW
3i*rf§r = *nrar?l mhfix "he (a king) brings it (a kingdom) under his dominion".
Similarly um^I rafft or *nrfif or srroSf il So also ffTSPTOTt *TCfir, *raf?T, POq[ or
55. The affix tr& comes in the sense of l to be
given to that ', as well as the affix s&ti, in conjunction with
the above verbs kji, bhft, asti and sampad.
The phrase "dependent upon that" is understood here also. The
word \q qualifies the above phrase. When a thing which is known as a proper
gift for the Brahmanas, is put under their control by offering it to them, then
_ the affix trft is employed. Thus AWUt/M TO 3J&fir=fll(H u l^r or BrgFTOni *<lfil
41 He gives it to the Brahmanas, as it is an object which ought to be given to
them w . vrgTTOT *nfif u it becomes given to the Brahmans ". So also with wj
and otv& H Why do we say "when the sense is that of to be given'? Observe
3*r. s^> 5^t «<3w f flccrRT, «iu4t: *5*nr, ^rr n
56. After the words deva, mannsh) r a, purusha,
\ puru and martya ending in the 2nd or 7th case, the affix trft
*H
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. IV. I S7] W i ~ 1004-
is diversely employed, having the force of the accusative
or locative case. .
The anuvjritti of sAti ceases, that of trA continues. The verbs left
bhfl and asti also have no scope here. This is a general sfltra. Thus f*n
f TO5T%-'^T»n^fir, ^3TOl9-^irTO1<r M So also iscipfr, JWIT, SCTr, and
By using the word 'diversely' in the aphorism it is intended that the
affix comes in this sense after other words also ; as mpn Affair If * H
57. The affix ddch comes after the half of a word
denoting an imitation of an inarticulate sound, when such half
consists of at least two syllables, and when it is not followed
by the quotation-mark € iti \
The sound in which the letters *r «ff &c are not distinctly expressed
is called avyakta *un manifest* or ' inarticulate \ The imitation of such a*
sound is called avyaktft-anukarana. That whose half consists of at least two
syllables is called dvyajavar&rdha, that is a polysyllabic word of four syll-
ables or more when doubled, the smallest number of whose vowels are tw«v
not less, when halved. The phrase " when joined with kp\ bhft and asti" is
understood here. The affix comes after that word which when .reduplicated
is such that its half (ardha) is at least (avara) of two syllables (dvyach). When
the affix ^r^L is added there is reduplication of the word. That is first the
word is reduplicated and then the affix is added. Thus qsij is a sound imita-
tion word. By reduplicption it becomes qrqr^ (e. g. q^+qr^-qT^ qcij tHc
final n of the first word is changed in to the form of the next letter v, and
then for two * one is substituted by VI. I. 100). Thus qrrei 3Rmr<-q?^?r
chi i fa "he makes a sound like patat pa{at". So also with *T*|% and com N So also
vmt 3TCtf?T» *TOTO or mil U The final wi of q*q*n is elided by VI. 4. 143
before the affix qff!J having an indicatory ^, the real affix being nr W
Why do we say " when it is name of an imitative sound ? " Observe
CT^^rorfir "it makes or turns to stone". Why do we say "after that half
which consists of at least two vowels"? Observe vjTOfir 'he utters the^ex- '
clamation srat'. Why do we say "at least "? Observe CT?rct?r Wifir where
the half Consists of more than two syllables and the rule still applies. So
*
s4-by
Google
\
1005: *n*ir [ETk. V.CH-IV.g6o 'V
also *qCTn?i qrafH ll Why do we say " when f% does not follow n ? Observe
^ftfir ^fir (VI. 1. 98). The ^ of *P£ is for the sake of accent, It prevents
the circumflex (swarita) accent Thus, qzr^+tfflr H Here first the if of irflr
which was ud&tta, becomes anudAtta by VIII. 1. 28. Then by VIII. 2. 5, *ft
of sr and *£ of srflrlcoalesce into an ud&tta iJr, as qgqgn^ .11 But then comes in
rule VIII. 2. 6 which would make this stt optionally svarita, the indicatory ^
prevents it Some read gjmil^Urt, the «i however does not change the sense. "
ffip h ft<n^<fl<uR^ *%**•• g^prf^rot grec rarfr **ft yft frfr ^fw ii
58, The affix 4&ch comes after the words dvitiya,
tfitlya, Samba, and b!ja when connected with the verb kyi,
and meaning to plough in such away.
The repetition of the word $ in this sfltra indicates that the ^ and
srffcj are not to be taken. Thus ftrfar SR&fif-ffefW *>$ (-fi^srt ) Sfctfif /be
makes the second ploughing of the field '. So also fpffar 5ftrft, tT**T ^fif * he
makes the field ploughed contrariwise to what it was ploughed before =«T3P*T*
W$ W 3T* S mRww ^h ii So also ^rsft qtft% a 4U!«n£i<i fafi<£H «**iiGf u
Why do we' say when meaning "to plough " ? Observe ftrfrt mxfH
TOW
*ar M*wi u g u^*3^^i 1 HiCTT^nRnRRfiP^rrtPT^n'it 3T^iiui*i)r wfir ^t 'Sift 11
59, The affix <J&ch comes after a Numeral follow-
ed by the word gu$a, the sense being to plough so many
times.
The word $ is understood here. Thus ffcijgir or faquir *>ufir $*** he
ploughs the field twice or thrice " - ft&n r&Ktf 3*fir ft*** M
_ Why do we say " when meaning to plough " ? Observe fapti $*ffi|
tr^ w he doubles the rope."
timtu^wwi «i«wmwi ^mjj^wr *nfif j^St *n*t h .
60, The affix 4&ch comes after the word samaya
when ^ follows, when the sense is that of ' neglecting*.
The word $ . is understood here also. The anuvfitti of qq ceases.
The getting of leisure from the duties is called WW or € time ' ; the neglect or
|OSS of such time is meant by the word js^vn U Thus sn^r S^tf^-W^ *RfJfllr
Digitized by VjOOQiC
Jh*_
[Bk. V. Ch. IV § 63. J wnt m focrt
(«ro% <nrra, m: <reM* TC* OT* fnrt % WS5 ftros «tfHTO%, * ?*3«to) 'who
procrastinates'. Why do we say when the sense is that "neglecting"? Observe
OTW <hX \ Ta "he makes time".
gftp » g*r re? 1 umPtimmMiHuiiram^ *m*ren5r *rcfit gift gfr qfir m
' 61. The affix $&ch comes after the words sapatra,
and nishpatra followed by the verb kji, when the sense is'
that of causing intense pain.
The word $ is understood here also. The word ati-vyathana means
violent pain. Thus wmt *rcrm S*T «mp = smf m?m *rtfc JTCOTfa "the hunter
pierces the stag with the arrow so violently that the feathered part of the
arrow also enters the body". So also rr«T*T ^nm^qjfcpy UVWH I ^i ftM4H«Rf
"he pierces so voilently that the arrow entering one side comes out of the
other with its feathers ". Why do we say when meaning to cause violent
pain " ? Observe wri ftf 9*JRT ^T^^P, Pf«tf ftfc!* ^dfif JjfWt^P M
fi ^OTBr^KP^ II ^ II *F?Tf* II fa^l^ , ftuflMUl , (to) n
62* The affix d&ch comes after the word nishkula
followed by the verb ^, when the sense is 'to disembowel*.
The verb $ should be read into the sfltra. The word fiv^sm means
to bring the inner organs out, or to eviscerate. Thus ftt$t*| qrcrfr <HJ* "be
disembowels or guts the animals ". ftc$^r *«4jRr JlfiPW " he takes out the
kernel or seeds of the pomegranite ". Why do we say " when meaning to
disembowel or take out the kernel w ? Observe ft^l< SRufSr *r*£ " he makes
the enemies family-less ".
ti^fM^Ki^u) 11 <^ 11 qsrrft 11 ^r, foirac, «II4<M (ST^) H
^frf: 11 yi^A)^m^iHi^^i ^rf *fnrr^rt $*fr Hfit tpi m^«Ji ***<% i
63. The affix 4&ch comes after the words sukha
and priya, followed by kpi, when the meaning is ( c to con-
cede * ' gratify ') l to go with the grain \
The word m^m means ' agreeability *, ' to conform to^the wishes of
the object of adoration'. Thus g?HT ^rf?T, firar Wtf rerfiH*[=» Wimftffl V f «mor
TOftr " tries to please the heart of the master &c *\ This affix comes when,
while doing a pleasant or agreeable thing, the idea is to please another by
such an act Otherwise observe : gtf «**<lfa or tfrt *hQft ^PIH^ " the drink-
ing of medicines gives pleasure &c M .
> -y^R swRtfa l w> II \* II <??tfa II 5:*^ mfcreWi fen*) .» .
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
*«>7 *P*u [BK.V, Ch iy.%.67
\
tRt- m vt f^w 1 ?*^*i*!iwift<iitaiwiRf<4i*4 n*qrafH *m **** **fir ott **ni
64, The affix <J&ch comes after the wo?d dubkha
followed by kji, when meaning to do something against the
grain or " to contravene ".
The verb $ is understood and pr&tilomya means 'to oppose' or "to
act against another's wishes", "to pain the heart of one's master &c". As
5-^r «MJH *&*(* " the servant pains the master ".
Why do we say " when meaning to go against the grain " f Observe
^ftr* ii ^*? fSw 1 3TcWfc4i*ii«hRt|2| ^r^ nw*tr *Prt% $*fr 5t*r 11
65, The affix 4& c h comes after the word iula
followed by kyi, when the sense is that of roasting.
Thus ^py <T^Tf%«$MT chtlRr TOT* "he roasts the meat on a spit". Why
do we say " when meaning to roast " ? Observe 5* ^if^ er^ " the bad food
causes colic "•
«4tK*mik 1^1 q^ n *ram^, sr^nrir, (sr^r) n
^f- 11 $*r *^i* 1 «uHiMiwi3t Tpqtimrar *reft $*ft iinr 11
66. The affix d&ch comes after the \rord satya;
followed by kyi, when not meaning to swear.
The word *n* means • truth ' as opposed to « falsehood '. Sometimes
it means to swear, as in the sentence m #itoj ft^" 11 This latter sense
is prohibited. Thus ^qj *h<ift *Pr^*TF¥qi "the merchant concludes the bar-
gain of the goods i. e. he settles that he will purchase these wares ". Why do
we say 'when not meaning to swear'? Observe es* ?**&% vims "the Brah-
mana swears *
_ *4dLlc<4fl*INul II V* II q^lft II WSfraC, MRcjNut , (?F?) I
ftfrP II $*? fS^ I <UWMI«jri>ll<t3t OT^ Jn^wT vr^ ^ qft U
67. The affix d&ch comes after the word madra
followed by kji, in the sense of ' to shave \
The word qft^rmeans 'to shave' 'to raze '• The word hw means
•auspicious'. Thus^g^q^-TO^^H
Vdrt :— So also after the word **T ; as **t *faft mfatf $Hrt « the bar-
ber shaves the hair of the boy on the auspicious occasion *\
Why do we say when meaning ■ to shave'. Observe ** or ** *TO!t II
'"W"l""/ W J I UMJ I
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. IV. J. 69 J *r*rera 1008
68. The following affixes are added to the ends
of compounds without changing their sense.
This is an adhikftra or regulating sfttra : and governs all sfitras upto
the end of this chapter. All the affixes to be ordained here after become the
final part and integral portion of a compound, so that whenever a compound
is formed, these affixes must be added to complete the compound. These
affixes are useful in forming the Avyayf bh&va, the Dvigu, the Dvandva, the
Tatpurusha and the Bahu-vrthi compounds : in fact so long as these affixes
are not added, the compounds do not get the designation of Avyayibh^va &c.
Thus iFT + cnn^-^TO^P*: now before this word can be properly called an
AvyayibhAva, we must elide the final «Ft by adding the samAsAnta affix rv
(V. 4- 108), and we get the form 4MIM , to which smL is added by II. 4. 83 and
we have 3<HI4*, so also srfw^l II So also finjfr, fwjft the samisdnta «T being
added to 5^ by V. 4. 74, then the feminine affix #r^by IV. I. 21, the whole
word fiftc being called Dvigu. So also, tfcdciiwMI and ii^nsfofl II Here the
affix fffi (V: 2. 128) is added to the whole, sam&s4nta word ^rsq^y q &c which
gets the name of Dvandva. Similarly fi^c* (ft«TOt|JcO» 5$* Oimilv)- Here the
whole sam&santa (V.4.74) word gets the name of Tatpurusha, and hence thefirst
memberretainsitsaccent by VI. 2.2, namely ud&tta. (phi{ IV.i2andi3) Z^^Ot^F*-
§K: being Bahuvrihi, the first member retains its accent, namely acute on the final,
as 3%:, sft^: have been taught as antodAtta in the very list of Svar&di (I. 1. 37).
As a general rule all affixes come at the end of & word (II. 1. 2), what
is the use of employing the word " a nta * in this sfitra ? It means that when
words like avyaytbhAva &c are employed, they mean words having those affix-
es already at their end. Thus the Dvigu compound of ff + |JC-ftm+iT (V.
4* 74)~fira* : so *hat when rule IV. 1. 21 says that the feminine of Dvigu
compounds ending in it take {, it refers to Dvigu compounds which have
already taken the samasAnta affix «r» otherwise the rule IV f I. 21 would not
have applied, for strictly speaking fjg^ends in ^ r and not in it H Similarly
rule V. 2. 128 ordaining ffH after Dvandva compounds, means that the affix
comes after a Dvandva compound that has already taken the samasAnta affix
*^(V. 4. 106), as^ra+f^rft-^ra+f^T+^(V. 4- 106) ^rerPm, ^rePrefaft a
5i 4«Mici 11 ^ 11 q^r 11 5T, ^5irac fcramRip) n
fPfT: 11 «ir^^i^i^Hi«i sthujitu Rn^N^ uw* «RH^Hf^^Hifl<iro , ff^?ncnt^pR«
Digitized
1 by Google
:*ood . -.viramri' ' I bk..v. Ch, IV. § w
69. The sam&s&nta affixes are not applied to
those words, the first member of which is a word expressing
praise.
J Later on will be mentioned certain words* which when standing as
member in a compound take these sam&s&nta affixes. The present rule pro-
hibits the application of those affixes when such words are preceded* by a
word expressing praise. Thus V. 4. 91 ordains the affix rv when the wodr
*ra* enters a compound, as, *{fr + *T^~ W + JJ^+2^- W*nr:, and not ijff-
*mr tt But strar, grrererar, so also gift:, itfanp (V. 4. 92 prohibited).
Vdr£: — The word expressing praise must be 5 or sqrfir and not any
word expressing praise in general. Therefore, the prohibition does not apply
.in <TCOTir: and tot*: II
Vdrt : — This prohibition applies up to sfltra V. 4. 1 1 3 exclusive. Thus
SSfW, ujRm^q:, *W, s^Wf:, here the affix *•* (V. 4. 113) is not prohibited.
fair. #* 11 v3o 11 <i^Tft 11 fan:, sfa, (grererrer :, *) M
70. The samas&nta affix is not applied to a word
preceded by f^K in the sense of reproach.
Thus {k + *nn*=fiR?rsp* as ftyrcrai qfr ^ ^rf^ w He is no-king who does
not protect ". toctot ^rsfagsift, (k*n*$ i **rer 11 (V. 4. 91, V. 4. 92, II. 1. 64}
-The compounding here takes place by Rule II. 1. 64.
Why do we say 'when meaning reproach"? Observe 5ft3U5fr»fc|Rnf
.ftrcrcp, ftptft 11
w^w^Nidi 11 *S 11 <nofr 11 5fsr: f sracjjw**, fcnrroFa:, *t) n
ff5n u «ft 3$zwr»iT^ ii*HWM4Hixt^iHiwiMi> * w*ft i
71. The sam&santa affix does not come after &
Tatpurusha compound of words like r&jan &c, herein taught,
when the negative pariicle *T precedes them.
Thus stout, *to*HT, aprn (V. 4. 91 and 92 prohibited). Why do we
•say u after a Tatpurusha 'compound ? M The same words preceded by the
negative particle will take the sam&sAnta affix when forming compounds
other than Tatpurusha, as sn^ff HH*Hi" , *rg< TO^U (V. 4. 74 applied).
*n$r feumi 11 ns* 11 ^rfic 11 to, fWrr, (^wh ) n
^ff: II •IMW^NII?l'^^%l 5 ni: ^3 ^^♦^d^M^qi^HIUI^ f^RTH^I^H
. 72. The sani&s&nta affix does not optionally
come after a Tatpurusha compound of the word vfoz with
iP^II
Google
Digitized by LiOOQ
Bk. V, Ch. IV. |. 74 ] irn loto
This declares an option, where under the last sfltra the omission
would have been necessary. Thus irnn or vn?tft: M (See V. 4- 74 a °d If.
400).
73. The affix 4 ac h comes after a Bahuvrlhi com-
pound denoting numeral, except when the last term of such
compound is bahu and ga$a.
This Bahuvrlhi is formed by rule II. 2. 25. Thus-rrom, ^iflTOP,
rrf^TOT 5 , stoktop. srfjwr, *rfira>TOP, firo, ^nqrr, vroin m
Why do we say 'denoting a numeral 1 ? Observe fanRF, WTOf.
Why do we say * not after bahu and gana" ? Observe, ^JWfT., 5Fnn*T: U The
difference here is in the accent for had *^been added, it would have made
the final of ^nnr acute, but it not being so, the first member retains its accent,
namely acute on the first
Vdrt: — The Tatpurusha compouds of numerals like ftftra &c, take
also the affix T^r 11 Thus ftftmft flnnp - Prf%P0TPr TOfa Mw& ' Devadatta
is more than thirty years old' II fH^fbwmnif^»ftftre: *qp 'the sword is
more than thirty fingers long'.
3T*i^ £*ram P T$ iivwn w^ 11 *S*L,H:> **» *K t ^nHp«r f iR% R
74. The affix * comes after rik, pur, ap, dhflr and
pathin when finals in a compound, but not so when dhtUr
is iu conjunction with aksha.
The anuvritti of the word bahuvrihi does not enter here. It applies to
all compounds in general. The word^nw qualifies w,as it cannot qualify the
words 1&i &c.
Thus bt^t: wir:,^, p&r : as, tfrwain , *TFf*3W» ap as, <ta*- (ftfftff
«Trrr «rf^)-ft+^=ft+h:(Vi-3-97) =a **. wfrtw. **** u dk*r t as, <ropr,
*%V&X II pathin, as, *PSW U
Why do we say "when not in conjunction with •w?" Observe, tra*
g" - «m?s, Si^W II
The words *ry*: and w$^ apply to students of Rik: thus v^pr* means
"a boy who has not read the Rik". *\**i "a Brahmana who has read m*ny
20
K
Digitized by
Gx
/
X
ion •??> [ Bk. V. Ch. IV. §. 76
Rig verses". The affix ir is not applied when it refers to the Vedas, as *np$.
Wit *rf*( grot 11
¥y^ Mc^Hti4^ftMi^M : II >sMl <^ift n «^r sn$, *3, *n* f ^r^
^wpt, «m«m* 11 .'
ffrp u irftr *T3 m {uuty^ittuiiTf i&mtii'B *r*?raT^JiHratiro% 11
flnrojw tot* otsto ^* ift u
75. The affix ach comes after the words s&man
and loman, when prati, anu and ava precede them.
As smrOTPL *T33TTOt •ttotto II UfaSPl*, H^H*, «T*3tH* H
Vdrt: — The affix incomes after the word *Pr preceded by the words
V*i ^Wi» W$t and also after the words ftrerrtr and 5^ when preceded by a
numeral. As, 5*113*! qFypfc, S*«pr« H <rs*RTO qwiUmfr (see II, 1. 20).
Vdrt: — The affix iq^ is added to vjfn when preceded by a numeral.
As, flop 5 greny , flngV &c t ^PJ?r^ $* M This affix is added to words other
than those mentioned above: as <nHPT:, ^Hl^ , OTCHP, $KrcP*, *T*pn II Here the
affix «t^ is added to snf*c and uflr II All this can be done by dividing the
above stitra into two parts viz. (i).T( 2 ) JTOF* &c. That is incomes after
all compounds and (2) after orotand btt^ preceded by srft &c
*ne*fr v^hk II vs$ ll qrrnft n srapn, <hi4$?hi^ («w) R
lf*P II ufawW'ifa 1 1JHIWM * SffiilMMVriH^ irafr **fa H
76. The affix ach comes after the word akshi
when not meaning ' the eye \
The word *r^is understood here. Thus FCTTOPI, S^fSUOTL II These
are Tatpurusha metaphors formed by II. I. 56.
Why do we say M when not meaning the eye " ? Observe wnmiRf ll
How do you explain the forms qpRRP, *nT*p, which apparently contradict
this rule, because 3rora'.is a many-holed leather horse- veil through which the
horses can see, and so also «nrcr is a window through which men see ? This
is no fault The word $fa in the sfltra does not mean ' to see ', here, but i?
a synonym of ' eye \
• ( vwtiW : 5t^m^n^«rT: 11 \svs ll q^rfif ll srar|?v fk^p:, ^^3^,^^^,
\ ^+4-144, ms^uiii, TOEiffrer, *n%^ f ^rcnsr, sr^fa, q^fra, *& f^r,
I o&${*t sr?#r, ui^y t fir^m, 3^*13% ^ia^ i >^ia t| > ^ i| 4 q i ;i^ ^^■ ,
*>*^,f*>¥,*q^,iTte«tf:il
■•-Bigftizt
eWGoogle
Bjc V. Ch. IV. $. ;;] •r^r - iqu
• ^ftr h u*si4mi«fli ?% wfr Pmw-fl i ^reftr *w«4iPi ftiMniVi ift^wi. , „
77. # The following words are irregularly formed
by adding the affix ach : — achatura, vichatura, suchatura,
stri-punsau, dhenv-anaduhau, rik-s&me, v&fi-manase, akshi-
bhruvam, d&ra-gavam, ftrvash$hlvam, padagh^hivam, naktam-
divam, r&trim-divam, ahar-divam, sarajasam, nib-Sreyasam,
purushd-yusham, dvyd-yusham, tryft-ynsham, rig-yajusham,
j&to-kshab, maho-kshat, vriddho-kshab, upaSunam, and go-
Bh^hafiva^.
The first three of these words are Bahuvrthi: tr^jts » H WU*^ft*l-
*JHlPl *T ^r*rft TO ' that whose four are absent or non-existent *. f&fajo -f%-
tmiPf *rarft«TC* "whose four are gone". 5^51* -^RTft T^lftw* 'whose
four are good *
The next eleven words are Dvandva compounds. They are clear
Thus eft T yri*-«fli^f 'the man and woman' but not here ftran JHT^ (f%rif
Rfir 5PT^ Jff: ) - Wtym< " a brave towards women only n . $3* «nqpr - ^^T5fV
" cow and bull ". *&$ n OTT ^T-^RT% " the Rile and the Saman ". m*^
*nnsr»^r^R% " the speech and mind w . B?fir ^ ^ *r*»lfim**" the eye the
brow". The compound is singular as being parts of members of human
body, (II. 4-2). srp* *UW e **rc«T* l i "the wives and cows", fxfit T ff^T^T
- *rf%fm II **: + **#**& + *T^ - arcrfN* II Here the final syllable (called ft)
is elided: so also qTft+*T€ta5&-q*+*rtHf H7-<TOfrRUI*n**r farr *r-**ft#
' by night and day \ These are two indeclinables having the force of locative,
and this compounding is also irregular. The words i?f^ and fftf both mean 'day 9 :
the compound «Tff$TOtis not, however, a superfluous compound of two synonyms.
It is used here in a distributive sense »«T?aT?f% "day by day". The word OTTO*
is an AvyaytbhAva, meaning ' all \ as tH4U<jHHim<R| 11 The affix does not
come when it is a Bahuvrihi : as ^j + nraT s *€TnC ! ^pnc.11 The word pf: 4to
-Rp^T WP and is a Tatpurusha : but not so in fiftTOi: S^T: II Then is the
word ^m^MH> a Genitive Tatpurusha ■» 33TOT3 : U Not so when it is a
Dvandva, as 35** bttj^-J^TJ^ 11 The words EjTJ<p*and **rgro are Samft-
hAra Dvigu compounds. Therefore not here, fSTOIJi-OTJi, *mj: II The
word Hc'^H^ is a Dvandva. Therefore not here q^'ttgHU^'NUI ■» Mt 4 44<Hi*HS
(* HtMI3^fll <R?) II The three words ending in W are Karmadharaya. Not
so when these are Bahuvrihi : as JrmftfT »WIT J &c The word *i^ih. is an
Avyaylbhiva-^ frfta*!! Here the non-elision of the final syllable, and
k
(google
Digitized by VjOOQ
,T *4iJ «T*M [ Bk. V. Ch. IV. $ 81
the change of * of v* into * (samprasAraga) are Irregular. The word %*T*
is a Locative Tatpurusha, as n&svr: — «fiw W
rilr/.- — The affix «r? comes after ^3^ when preceded by fir and 5r* t
as A^gtp, 3*T*f$jtf: 11 .
mffRit ii qui^ra^ %f«r TfK«i? ii
78. The affix ach comes after the word varchas,
when preceded in a compound by the words Brahma or
hasti.
Thu wm«q»i , j fenqjn H Varchas means ' light \ • strength \
Vdrt: — So also when Varchas is preceded by the words pallya and
rftjan : as, SHwwqq* , *nrfTO* tt
*fa: ii *nr a* 3?** *^% n*. qrow: ^M4<iWiHiHim< ' ^ TO^r to% w
79. . The affix ach comes after the word tamas
when preceded by the words ava, sam and audha in a com-
pound.
Thus WRP«nr, cPtFrem, *t?vtto* »
80. The affix ach qomes after the words yaslyas
and Sreyas, when they follow the word Svas in a compound.
Thus * B«<fl«mt , V* WTCT* II These compounds belong to the class of
Mayftravyansakadi (II. I. 72) The word v* is usually employed in blessing
or praising the object expressed by the second term. Thus **: %ro^ * *nnj
-€pnt %*# *pni ll The word vrafhrcr? is a synonym of v* ^SfcTCPI II The
word **foc: is derived from q% meaning "praiseworthy", "rich", by adding the
affix fus*(V. 3. 57).
««MciHi4t«: 11 *\ ll q^rft 11 z^ 9 ^, anrac, **Fn, («t^) n
jfo n »T5 *re ww fSrera: qft fr wu^w^iiMHiqi^ raft *reft u 1
81. The affix ach comes after the word rahas,
when it follows ami, ava, and tapta in a compound.
Thus STji^, «m**w, inrcw* «
)QQiC
[Bk. V. Cw. IV 5 85. J «r*M IC14
82. The affix ach comes after the word urAs
when it follows the word prati in a compound, and it has the
sense of the locative.
Thus srtgrorct- *d% *nw U This Is an Avyaylbhava compound, the
Indeclinable having the force of a vibhakti (II. 1, 6),
Why do we say " when having the sense of the locative ? " Observe
ipgjtf—jrftT^nrm 11
3Tg*re*TPTTft II ^ II q^lft n JI^MH , *TRT&, (*l^) R
83. The word anugava is irregularly formed by
adding the affix ach, and has the sense of 4l suited to the
length of the cows ".
Thus *T3»r# *ift " the chariot suited to the length of the oxen w . This
compound Is formed by II. 1. 16. Why do we , say when meaning "the
length"? Observe, fnf^n^PC-iT55M .
Qlwm i RKdHi #^: 11 <& 11 q^nft ll fireirar, firerrer , %%: B
^fr i» Rrernrr firerrti3 flrcrenir < %ffo5ffrw *reifr 1 »r^ n wifoyii : wm* ftroit i
84. The words dvistava and trist&v& are irregu-
larly formed meaning a vedi or c altar\
The affix st? is added and the final syllable L e. \r Is elided. Thus
ft^rnrr^ffs "an altar twice as big as an ordinary one". pTCrlT*F%fft * thrice
as big as an altar ". The words are compounds of {$•* and pp plus wr* mean-
ing "as much". Why do we say "when applied to an altar"? Observe ft-
ff^p 11 4Hq*Ii<q ft % s wpffr^^rfnrn^Hran a^tro* *r*i% n
85. The affix ach comes after the word adhvan,
preceded by an iipasarga in a compound.
Thus UTTOTy^Pt - qr% HP, im** TO*, PrWS, PW? H
Why do we say " when preceded by an Upasarga n ? Observe qwwr,
itWW ll
dcjjv4^m^ii^".4*^4i^^i^ # . n *% ll *Kift R cicjjvivfi ^5^: f
86. The affix ach comes after a Tatpurusha com-
pound ending in the word anguli, when a Numeral or an In-
declinable precedes it.
•K
digitized by VjOO^IC
»oi5 •r^M [ Bk. V. Ch IV. I 81
Thus % •fgtft inir»RW-CTP^» **W*% M This compounding takes
place by II. i. 51. This is a TadhitArtha compound, the taddhita affix Hmf
being elided by the VArtika ifiiro m ftfllrtwi^ " there is always the elision of the
affix imf^ denoting measure when a Dvigu compound is formed ". See V. 2.
37 VArt). So also when an Indeclinable precedes it : as ftifcragfrrat»ftt9-
«5, «n*RF*w II Why do we say when a Tatpurusha compound ? Observe vq>
5W f *TORjf3: $sqp II The word u Tatpurusha n is understood in all the subse-
quent sutras up to V. 4. 106.
9L^m<ivi<i% tyro* h
87. The affix ach comes after the word r&tri,
when preceded by ah an, or sarva, or a word denoting a portion
of night, or saiikhy&ta or punya, when the compound is a Tat-
purusha, as well as when a Numeral or an Indeclinable pre-
cedes the word r&tri.
The anuvritti of ^wroft i is drawn In to this sfltra by force of the
word ^ "and " of the sAtra. The word v\m forms a Dvandva compound as
¥Tf^rri%W-^rfRnr: "day and night". So also tf&nn, 'jftnp 'the first part
of night': sttopp 'the latter part of night These are formed by II. 2. 1.
So also 4mKIMl qf?! q JraqHTCPP II This compound is formed by II. I. 57.
So also jwqr unP-JPTO'P II So also when compounded with a Numeral or
an Indeclinable : as, f tPft OTT5% =» ftjnr, Prepp,*rfiraF<ffr *rf%*i«»«tf<raxS|%*Pril
3*5^ h^pt: n « it q^rfa II bt^:, bt^:, hSw R
fftfs M cr3nvufia*wWui***ifiti h^t^l **S*fr m^Biftfiwi<H i^^nft^H ^rtlri i$**i *-n wti
88. For ahan is substituted ahna, when preceded
by the above words, (and taking the affix tach to be men-
tioned in V. 4. 91).
When the affix «^ follows *r^, and the latter is preceded by the
words ot &c, then ht^jt is substituted for snpl II By the term ipw M these
words n 9 is meant the numerals (with the exception of q^ff V. 4. 96) the In-
declinables, the words 3$, 9*53nf and words denoting a part of a day, for
these are the words mentioned in the last sfltra. The word «?7^ is also men-
tioned therein, but it is not taken here, for there can be no Tatpurusha com-
pound of «*tc with vt?^ it The word jpq is also excluded by V. 4. 90. Thus
tfrifriifl** -g^y, **rcgr*» *M*<fHfti*q *-greEgr-, flrc^p h So also *ris*r; (VIII.
4- 7)> SJCTS?^ trro^, *fararaHJf* (according to some ottor? V. 4- 90).
Digitized by VjOOQ
4
Bk. V. Ch. IV. §. 90 J **» *oi6
The ordaining of substitution is redundant according to the Virtlka-
k&ra. In his opinion, the s&tra tffjf: q%^ alone would have been enough.
The meaning then would have been " the affix «r? comes after the word «TO(~
when preceded by these; words *♦ &c M . The adding of *ny would produce^
the same result : as ffc + *l?*+*nj-ft + *tf£+*P^ (VI. 4. 134 the middle «f tit
•T** is elided) -gflpr: 11 The only specific result which v^ would have ' pitt*-'
duced was to make the feminine of these words end in lbri^f (IV/t/isX*
and the elision of the final Kf^of nfjr (VI. 4, 145). But the compounds of i
•T^t are masculine always (II. 4. 29), they can have no feminine : and as, the?
desired form is EJ^T:, the sfltra VI. 4. 145 cannot apply. The affix iry I» ?
therefore, the proper affix and the substitution of t^jf for vtf^is redundant." ^
89. This substitution of ahna for ahan, does not
take place after a Numeral, when it forms a Collective 1 no f tm
meaning a number of days taken as a unity.
This substitution is prohibited in the case of SamlhAra-Tatpurusha.
Thust tqp^ft OTT5%- W» so also sq*: 11 Here rule V. 4. 91 applies"
Why do we say "when meaning a collective noun?" Observe f*tafffr»
^of|^: 9 §5jfjr: 11 This is a Taddhitlrtha Dvigu compound formed by IL
1. 51 ; the affix sr^ denoting ipr *r*: (IV. 3. 53) is elided by IV. 1. 88: and
the final BT^of rr^is elided by VI. 4. 145.
*TiiUi* r! ^r 11 ^o 11 q^rrft u ^rnr, <wnprf ** N
fPf! II ^Ti^<*4IMI*«lf *T HWU^4 IWifllU T *TO% I 4TiH*IMl«x<n*M: S*TO«*HPffc ft
90. And also after the word that stands last in
the above list (i. e. yr) and eka, this substitution does not
take place.
The word TrtH means ' last ' ; and refers to 309 which is the last word
in V. 4. 87. The word ^PT 'last* is used instead of 3^ as a V*TJ u Thus
T'^Tf^ ^RT? S II Some include the penultimate word <£<KU<| also in the prohibi-
tion. According to them M^qiHl^ is the proper form and not gffwnrffjf* *
^ftr 11 tra^ar^^rRs i^iiHniiaiifcimn^ii^Tv spirit *ro% u
91. The affix tach is added to the words r&jan,
ahan, and sakhi, when standing at the end of a Tatpurusha
compound.
DTgitized by
Google
!££__J
\
no\7 r^ti [Bk. V. Cn. IW§ 93
Thus l^nnTt fTO"**. ivti*:, ?<PJNf : (VI. 4. 145) *Hf : ^TOT = flTO^:," M
VTgra^CT H Why not so here inrrnt U^-lff'CRft instead of qnnftll For
* according to the maxim "a pratipadika denotes, whenever it is employed in
Grammar, afeo such a nominal stem as is derived from it by the addition of
art affjx denoting gender \( «nfirnfo*qfo ftfffaftTOTirfa *f*!*0 ; the stem tnn*
. vrQuTd denote the feminine also. To this we reply, that the construction of
the sAtra shows that the feminine ?cnft is not to be taken. Because iTf^ being
a proSodially 'lighter word than urs^ ought to have been placed first in the
cotribouhd. Its not being so placed indicates that that form inn* only is to be
taken whose final vowel becomes lengthened into ?TT in compounding with
«^,lc rrar + BTf^- and not trft+sflRU
92. The affix tach comes after *ft stauding at the
end of a Tatpurusha compound, when no elision of a Tad-
dhita affix has taken place in forming such compound,
Thus<TC*nr*s, TtPPTC:, q^PT^, TO*TC* II Why do we say "when no
Taddhita affix has been elided in forming the compound ? " Observe, ^flr-
iHPP, q^:t.q^ij: (Here the affix. if? V. 1. 37 is elided by V. 1. 28 and hence
the sam&santa affix e^ is not added). So also rap M
Why do we say " when a Taddhita is elided " ? The prohibition does
not apply when a g* affix is elided : as limHlVaid " ^nprfoinr (III. 1. 8 and
II. 4.71).
Why do we say * when there is elision * ? Merely adding a Taddhita
affix in forming a Tatpurasha, will not debar the sam&sAnta affix: as <np% ifr^
vrnTrf =<N*»Tr + e? + 5«l (the tach is added by this sfltra, and the taddhita qcq to
denote 3* *n*nr: by IV. 3. 8i)=»sf^T^^w, ^j m*NH^h , W f Wq*l WIWWL M
93. The affix $ach comes after the word uras
standing at the end of a Tatpurusha compound, when it has
the sense of 4 the most excellent of its kind \ ,
The word *nr means 'the principal* : as the word *W is the principal
member of an animal, so by metonomy it has come to mean ' the principal '•
ThusiTOHT *C«=»*TOTC5* soalsof^KPl "the most excellent of horses or
elephants w .
Why do we s \y M when meaning the most excellent M . Observe ^ff!f-
tfnc* »^T^rt ; " the breast of Devadatta ".
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. IV. § 97 ] e* m 1018
*<Hlvm*4H<«i sdifi^qqh ivi a vuft n wr, an?r f «wn, waiih>
94, The affix {ach comes after anas, afiman, ayas,
and 8aras when at the end of a Tatpurusha compound, it
denotes a genus or a name.
Thus toto*, srwr^T-r ^ I H>I^^H » and H" jftmq^ are examples of *rf%
words, while 14MU«, f^rnpn, H)ftdI*Wi , and *rcraro^are examples of TOT N
Why do we say M when meaning a jAti or a saftjfta ? " Observe 3f*t,
^frr: u wfirer^iWRi Hi4*vui 1 nm<*?Uimf 4<i md^<viM w^M^mtM^^i *rcfl|i
95. The affix ^ach comes after taksha when pre-
ceded by gr&m and kauta, in a Tatpurusha compound.
The anuvritti of j4ti and sanjfta does not run into this s'fltra. Thus
HTTO1 TOT-HPTCTCP, WJjtf OT>lfW l the public carpenter of all \ gpqf TO -*&**;
W*« cTW=^«re: meaning Fra^T. qrfcfHt st q»H4fMmiEHm» 'and independent
artisan, not particularly bound under engagement to any one'.
*Rt: 5pn H M II q^r || sdfc, gpi :, (*^) II
96. The affix ^ach comes after the word 6van prece-
ded by ati, in a Tatpurusha compound.
Thus mft4iltt vnWL-=«TRT^ft TO?:"the boar that surpasses the dog" L e.
*mtH M very swifi w . So «Tnr*tfr %^IP " the dog-surpassing servant i. e. more
devoted to his master than a dog ". So also Slftptft OTT M service worse than
that of a dog"- nffrfr*naq i H
4Mmmi^miP)i^ ii vs II qscrfa II shwmm , srerfas » (^) *
ffir? ii 44tHii*ft v MVMiynPnji *%% w^rr*njwrT , n , raf *nftr *
97. The affix txich comes after the word fivan end--
ing in a Tatpurusha compound, when another thing not be-
ing a living object is compared with it.
Thus grrerfr ^-HHr^s 'a dog-like bow*. TO^TCf* "a dog-like
blade". This compounding takes place by II. I. 56.
' Why do we say "when something is likened to it"? Observe WMl-
iTOT STC5 " a clod of earth which is not a dog ". This is not a very happy
counter-example of Kaiika : for in the case of H^ Tatpurusha compound
21
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
JL
\
1019 r^M [ Bk. V. Ch. IVi 5 icb
•there is express prohibition taught in V, 4. 71. The proper example should
be fa :**raire* H Why do we say M when the thing compared is not a living
being"? Observe *ftc: %^-IPTCHT "a dog^like monkey "•
^^FV^fe «^r: II V n <i^rft II sttp:, ^,^rac, wqjk (s^) B
98. The affix \axih comes after sakthi when pre-
cqded by uttara, mj*iga, and pftrva in a Tatpurusha compound,
as well as when a thing is compared with it.
By the forcee of the word *r in the sfitra, we read in the word TFV-
qrnjalso. Thus 9m^MH r /^ra^n,^cn^n(ii Soalsoin^ut^ftt^Pr-qw-
5fr#r fgrft: n ^n ^rf^ n *& : $ fspih, (^) n .
99. The affix {ach comes after the word nan, when
at the end of a Dvigu compound,
Thusl[ TOT STORES* fiprnr*, so also prot H Thus fiHIQtMtf ^TOfTf-
fifa: are also formed. So also frof HWPnn^ - l*HH V-<U«l, fipWRl*, (IV. 3. 31).
Why do we say • when in a Dvigu compound ' ? Observe *npfc " the
king's ship ". The phrase <MHNm^Ni " when a Taddhita affix is not elided w
of sOtra V. 4. 92 applies here also. Therefore w does not apply in t*ff*pftPP
3r5fe.11 ?o* 11 ^r^ II ^ran^, % (z%) H
ff^r: 11 mjimml * ^ww^mqwiffm^Hii *mft 11
100. The affix t& c h comes after the word nau f
when preceded by the word ardha, in a Tatpurusha com-
pound.
Thus *t£ »lfy»» HJMWU I The compounding takes place by II. 2. 2.
The compound is of neuter gender, and does not take the gender of the
term as required by II. 4. 26 : for gender is regulated by usage more than any f
grammatical rules ( utaimw* fkror) M K
^pft: HMUL II ?•? H q^Tfa II *3T^: f UM I H , (z**) R
l^ffsrif *ro?t HdlHI*IR|Uli »!%^ II
101. To the word kh&ri, at the end of a Dvigu
compound, and to the same, when preceded by the word ardha,
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
-Bk. V. Ch. IV. 5 104. ] r^ » 1 020
»— — 1 — — — — — — — i— — ^— — p— ■— — — — — ^» 1 — — ^— — — — ■
in a Tatpurusha compound, the affix tach is added, according
to the opinion of the Eastern Grammarians.
The words ftiffrs and wrafcl are both understood here: Thus It OT& fRIlft
•"fTOTOor fcgrftu So also *r$ mt&*=*W*cm or mfenirU According to
Padamanjari this sAtra could be dispensed with: as ont is synonymous with
OTft, asffjjnfc fiTOTt II And it will be governed by the V&rtika n * 5 »4f SH t**fa
f5K fEnrntufa under V. 1. 57 and 58, in Mah&bhashya.
faflwwuA : n to* n q^rft n fir, fawn, «rs3i&: f ( *%)i
102. The affix {ach is. added to the word afijali,
when preceded by dvi or tri, in a Dvigu Tatpurusha com-
pound.
Thus vra*3T& GHtf&h' a ip : *&*t so also ^tib^ n The word r|iin is
understood here also, so that when the compound is not a Dvigu, the rule
does not apply. Thus j/?li>*lft* ; "gs^fe: M The phrase M when a Taddhita
is not elided (V. 4. 92)" is understood here also. Therefore the affix ry doe*
not apply here : frarrofc>qf *fof: - KJsufSp M So also sqssifc* (V, 1. 28.) The
phrase "according to the opinion of the Eastern Grammarians' 9 V. 4. ioi.
is to be read into this sfitra. Thus in the alternative we have qyyfefw M
103. In the Chhandas, the affix $ach comes after
a Tatpurusha compound in Neuter Gender ending in *RC 6r :
Thus tfteT+^r**~gferefatas in frerefr ggtfit, so also HtMH^^ft^R l
So also when a word ends in «r^ as, ^«3^m% ( f* +^^-^+0^+«^—
***3^p0 so also mp* «<*«i<jiiq II
Why do we say "when ending in WJ or*?q w ? Observe FTFTO*^-
frfir ll Why do we say " in the Neuter " ? Observe g^ffrt jf*v(t «U*HC<JHt *
V&rt .-—The word *r " optionally w should be read into the sOtrau
Therefore s? is optionally added, as vimr* or vgram, fT«3*T* or tyggnro^ ll
ugrfn srtHM<i^wiH 11 t*« it ifrfSi n 05m:, ^mm^i^i^iih, (e^, N
104. The affix $ach comes after the word brah-
mana in a Tatpurusha compound, when the compound denotes
a person belonging to a certain country.
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
1021 e^» [ Bic V. Ch. IV. | iojr
Thp word sjPTT^ = 1RTTO Wf* 'belonging to a country*. This affix
comes after that Tatpurusha the first member of which is a word denoting a
country. Thus 50$$ arWT^gugwgis, and mfaasr . "a Br&hmaga of Surastyra
or Avanti n . This is an example of Locative Tatpurusha compound.
Why do we say * when referring to the name of a country"? Observe
\*B&[ cfi^t ' Narada the bard of the gods 9 .
jftr- 11 $*fi?r»*if <rct ifr hot v^ircrM^iiiiH, v&m m^u4wwwu*iu
105. The affix \8L0h comes optionally after the
word brahmap preceded by the words ip and h^> ia a Tat-
purusha compound. .-.,..
Thus $pg& : or $agir» 1(TV(P or *t*tbot tt The word wjrcj is a synonym
of HTST* M a Br&hma^ta".
ff?F II fr<3*MifcftKb H4*d: I flHM^MIWJIl q«KlU»cU<t *HVUWU«l 5«t*w»tiW **£ SfKrtt
*rcfa s ■%! w wmt yfr* M<HHW*i ii
106. The affix tach comes after a Dvandva com*
pound ending in a palatal, or a 5 or a * or a ^ when the
compound is a Sam&hara DVandva (collective noun taken as
a unity.)
The anuvntti of Tatpurusha which commenced at V. 4. 86, ceases. The
rule applies to MHi^Kt+f "an aggregate Dvandva" which is always in Neuter
singular ; and not to {<R<uvt " or mutual conjunction ". Thus ^5 ^ *** ^j
-q^re*, so also tpgerar, Stents, ff^ f *rqfct *f*j3*n*» sfoftrot. in****
Why do we say w after a Dvandva n ? The affix will not come after
a Tatpurusha, as, q^ *ro *pn53P»4^niT7 II Why do we say "when ending
in a consonant of *r class, or *, *r and f '*? observe qi^qlHl U Why do we say
" in a Sam&h&ra Dvandva M ? Observe grj^^reft U
107. The affix tach comes after the words Sarat
&o, when forming an Avyaylbh&va compound.
Thus to: ^rttai-sTO^ nfirtitw, ?iftTOi «rf^mro*tt
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
BkV..Ch. IV..§. in ] tra» iom
Why do we say when forming an AvyaytbhAva compound ? Observe
qTOTCl II Those words of jrcirft class f which end in a 5^ consonant add in*
variably ( ft?r ) the affix tach in spite of V. 4. in. The anuvptti of avayayt-
bh&va extends upto V. 4. 113.
1 tot. 2 fironj. 3 *TT*J, 4 *Fr^ t 5 CTR^, 6 «R5*, 7 ft^, 8 T%H*^* 9 ftv*\
10 fit*, 11 «*•, 12 ft^ f . 13^, 14 fc^, 15 ^g^ t 16 ***•, 17 u*, 18 *fc 19 ft^i
20 srcrar ^c^^r (as srrsiwO, 21 jrfJrrows** ***•• C* 8 *wfc-**ftpf *w% and w^*
*p*. The second is Tatpursha) 22 qftpj, 23 3T€^fl
108. The affix tach comes after an Avayaylbh4va
compound ending in «nj, as the final of the compound.
Thus 4M<mi , «rar*P£, TOR** W The final «ri is elided by VI. 4. 144.
Cultural *Wl?i tinitnH"' M
109. The affix tach comes optionally after an
Avayaylbh&va compound, ending with a neuter word, whose
final syllable is «^C n
The word n^ is understood here also. The word - Neuter 1 qualifies,
the second i. e. last term of the compound. This allows option, where as the
previous sfttra had made it compulsory. Thus qfirqpfa» or *ftre4 9 34*4*t*i or
WW M
gfif: II *» ftfrftlft ^TpygT^ft taiHHI4^glH^K^diWI g**TO» *TCf» M
110. The affix tach comes optionally after an
Avayaytbh&va ending in nadi, paurpam&si, and ftgraMyani.
Thus top «rftal-*sro* or *<riff, yift*HHK or *rfh*nilr, ^injnn*
or 4m«wnfli w
era: n U? n ^n^iB^r. n
111. The affix tach comes optionally after an Avy-
aytbhftva compound ending in a letter of jhay class (a mute
letter). '
The |i? here means the pratyAhAra u^i. e. all the Mute consonants.
Thus ^Sfj*!*, or TO^ *
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
~ ^
!^
1023 Tl*~- I B*. V. Ch. IV. \ 1 14
Ti ' ' " " ' ' '
112. The affix tach comes after an Avyayibh&va
compound ending in ' giri \ according to the opinion of the
Grammarian Senaka.
Thus vretfroi or *ran*tffc*lFrc*or ctptR ll The name of Senaka
Is mentioned for the sake of respect (pujartha), for the anuvritti of the word
I+WWIHL ' M optionally " was understood here already,
wnpRi f ^^R ^ _^ ■■•
113. The affix shach comes after the words sakthi
and akshi, final in a Bahuvrihi compound and denoting a
portion of one's body.
Thus #$ fR&flr TO =#$*$*•% so also qrararcn, fSfftcmT, fiTOPTOT: U
The word fR & CTSpft 8 is genitive dual, while it ought to be ablative. Why do
we say a in a Bahuvrihi compound " ? Observe MWl*R r s , ITOTrcc* II Why do
we say u after sakthi and akshi ? w Observe $branj% Q*l£- M Why do we say
* when denoting a part of the body ? " Obsenre {tW^W *PK*, fOTOfcfcg* U
The new affix q^ is employed instead of tt for the sake of the.
accent Thus *n*H^ft sfr, #fa^*ft *ft M. By sfltra IV. i. 41 the feminine of
words ending in an . affix having an indicatory 3 is formed by 3^ an< ^ not
ti% N Had the affix here been s*r, then the feminine would have been form-
ed by jftv (IV. 1. 15), which is anud&tta (III. 1. 4). Now by rule VI. 2. 198
the second term 'saktha' has optionally ud&tta accent, on this final in a'
Bahuvrihi. When therefore, it is not oxytone, then by adding ^h^ the final
of 4)m<j^(A would have been anud&tta, so that the feminine in one case would
be oxytone, in the other not, which would be anomalous. But when *ftr is-
added, it is always ud&tta, which is desired : «ind removes the anomaly. The
anuvptti of Bahuvrihi extends up to the end of the chapter.
ffii 11 MuPumMi&sftlw m*»i wit mfa ^niraFSi frefw ^romnf i
114. The affix shach comes after a- Bahuvrihi
compound ending in the word aftguli, when the compound
means " a piece of wood ? \
Thus BfeA^TO, **Rjft*T$, so also 4iflj4 II This is the name of a wood-
en spoon or fork of the figure of a finger by which barley &c are scattered.
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. "IV. § 116 ] «rt « 1024
Why do we say M in a Bahuvrlhi H ? Observe gfrpsntffr: -% tflFft J
•RUT ll It is a Tatpurusha compound formed by V. 4. 86, by adding iny as
samasAnta affix, the afigult meaning here size and not figurt. Why do we say
u when meaning a wood " ? Observe frnfqfefW II
tfsf ii ftpcmr qfa ^r *jii <\w w*»*ia5#fa *p *i«wl H*fiir unmw t
115. The affix sha comes after a Bahuvrlhi com*
pound ending in mftrdhan, and preceded by dvi and tri.
Thus ff^: y Pf^jf 5 U The feminine is formed by ^h( and the accent
is regulated by VI. 2. 197. .
Why do we say M preceded by dvi and tri ? n Observe &*$[ II
3r*rcqfhnTprcft : ll \\\ n *rrft ■ «*S jpw* m»<mV . ■
fRr ll fWHWIH lP ^ffft^rr: *PE*P g^m^H jrfl^r « HmflRwvim<W 1 upvw
qrTtrapc u gyft rann^im^ grfowt w *t» ii ^fannrrtiww^ ii
*!• II IMfal *th£vi*hmmh»ii *!• ii IWI^Tf v«w s^ ^'Vft^ : *
116. The affix ap comes after a Bahuvrlhi com*
pound ending in a feminine ordinal Numeral or in the word
pram&yt.
The word wft means words in the feminine gender ending in an or-
dinal affix (V. 2. 48 &c). irarar means *a witness, a principal '• Thus spqrfr
^4lr trrarf <rtNt«-*r*U<4N*WI CHRP '•the nights, the fifth of which is auspici-
ous". 3i?qnrffopn *TTOi 4 So also ^ft irerfl yqi» »fl nHfmi * ggfiw meaning
«TRJhn?Rn M having a woman for authority * -
Vdrii — The affix «r% applies when the Ordinal Numeral is the prin-
cipal (pradhana) member in a compound. When the Ordinal enters fully
into another object, and is not merely wrapped up as it were in another ob-
ject in a secondary way, there the Ordinal is the principal. The prohibition
of puhvad-bhava — the change of feminine into masculine oidained by VI.
3. 24 — applies also to the Ordinal when it is pradhana. Therefore, the affix
is not added here. 4hPmui<i*t4tai: qqp 8 **^^ ^•fl Tftf^ W W • »
Vdrti — The -affix hi comes after %f when preceded by a word de-
noting asterism. As . 31TOT WOT • ^h TOT «TOT cNtaf u the night whose
leader is the asterism mriga" so also gctpniP M Why do we say "anaste-t
rism " ? Observe Vr^FP*3ff* *
Vdrti : — The affix *{% comes after %y in the Chhandas. As, fulfil
^pfT^m f spft*n w
Vdrt: — The affix ^j comes after the word urar when preceded by an
ordinal having an affix denoting wages of service. Thus T^Rr iriftat 1 ^
Google
Digitized by VjOOQ
io*s «r^M t Bk. V.Ch. I V. $ 1 19
•nft^P tfffatt* so also W*HifiM» : zAzft M Sfltra V. I. 56 gives the rule for
forming words denoting 'wages' by adding ^ (V. 1. 22). Therefore fTO-
qifiw means '* an artist whose monthly wages are ten coins "
srer^fopft ^t 3?fr?n listen m^iPi h stth, ^% &rni, ^ ^1*^,(315)
117. The affix ap comes after a Bahuvrihi end- m
ing in loman and preceded by antar and bahis.
Thus BwrfdlPi ^IHl^m - mH^f 1 !* iJTm* 'a cloak having the hairy sur-
face inside '. Similarly wf^fc q?* 11
mtfi+H w ia«d<i^ t >tc[ *rk«p 11
118. The affix ach is added to the word n*tsik&
final in a Bahuvrihi, when it expresses a Name, whereby nas
is substituted for nfi,sik&, but not so when the word sthAla
precedes the word n&sikft.
Thusjfrr HlRHilWI -yrap, *R>ft<TO* II The sf is changed tot* by
VIII. 4. 3 so also *ftro: II Why do we say' ° when it is a Name" ? Observe
ft«HlRw 11 Why do we say " not after qgs?" Observe «r*Wll%*V to* M
Vdrt : — After the words *«§* and *3TC, for snT^fT is substituted h^ but
no affix is added : as, gro, eiCTF II In the alternative, the affix it? is
added, as grTO* , mimq s II •
Ishti : — The forms fofiran, «T^CTi and gtf^TP are valid in the Revela-
tion (the Vedas).
*lf%*P*ll wf ****** II
119. The affix ach comes after the word nftsik&
final in a Bahuvrihi, when an upsarga precedes it, and *R3C is
substituted for scrreren H r
This rule applies where the word is not a saftjfift, as it was in the last.
Thus *5nn *n fiHi l Wl ~ reran, iTTO- Il The n is changed into «l by VIII. 4- 28.
Vdrt: — The it is substituted for snftRfl when f% precedes it As, ftn-
frnnRnKTS^i»f^-i so also ftaq: in the same sense.
iiMldti^ti^^H^^^5 ^ft ^M44M) aM < |: II \\o II ip&fa t) Q-
5ncTi Q",t&Q«r y snftf^r, ^rgwr, «*oftq^, 3ren*f f sffeq^: n
Google
Digitized by VJOOQ
Bk. V. Ch. IV. |. t*3 1 •*«*« loa6
120. The folio wing Bahuvrihis are irregularly
formed by adding ach : — su-pr&ta, su-Sva, su-diva, g&rikuksha,
chaturaSra, e?i-pada, aja-pada, and prosh$ha-pada.
In some of the above Compounds the {? (syllable) is elided, ffrrt
HI 311*: II
^SHJ'-fpfr ^«*wfR«^d<W4IH II HI H H%dk R *!*£, Jt, f£¥*n,
ff^rs ii *n? 5H g *SeNi* ^t & ^et^Pto^ ^^ras^ft^Rwwnny iiwti ^fit *rt-
121. The affix ach comes optionally after the
words hali and sakthi, final in a Bahuvrihi, when preceded
by a Negative particle or by the words dus and su.
Thus nfttWM i ffoTO-*T?c*: or sr?ft* f 5$*: or 5$Rfc, g^ or gtf?p 11
So also bto^T. *TO*fa*. g°*3^P or g*HRftp, g^*T: or go^fc* N
Some read the text as 9T«4^lTHi): 11 According to this reading we have
*TOf* or «T*R>'-, 5:^^: or yjn*: (frsTO liMiWl) , gtfw or g*F&: M
122. The affix asich (*nac) comes invariably after
praj& and medha,, final in a Bahuvrihi, when the above parti-
cles. *P?r, g and J** precede them*
Thus BTfiUHMI ijsrrsw wnr^ nom. s. ftpPCT, so also 5*JTSJT, gipsiT, *f*W,
5^far, SPtaT ll The word •• invariably " (fHm) shows that the anuvritti of the
word ."optionally" of the last sfltra does not run here. The word nitya also
indicates that the affix ach comes after praj4 and medhA even when preceded
by other words. As :
4lft4HN % il*M*fr*»*fllHfr W:
123. The form bahuprajas is valid in the Vedas.
Thus *5TOT ftPEHPflfiKTO ll In the secular literature, the form is *$-
TO:, as WgTOt VT9PP M
22
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
1027 r* H [ Bk. V. Ch. IV. § 127
v raHfr^frerer^ ii \vn\ q^rfo I) *refar, *tfk%, tkwm h
124. The affix anich (srqc) comes after the word
dharma, when it is the last member of a Bahuvrihi com-
pound, and is itself the only word without any other word
joined with it or when the first member is a single word.
Thus 5??qr^«Rf^ a ^4|uiqHii nom. sin. q>fr€umqnf so also ftrwtf II Why
do we say %3<TO[ " when it alone is the last member" ? Observe W. &t *ritst9
■liiwrf* II The word %^HT?t according to Kasika qualifies the word jjbr*
understood. That is, the first member must be o: i word though a compound
word, according to Kaumudi, and it explains such forms as ^fH^TCTWW, TJ-
fHifrlN^TT (e. g. 9TCTtnft m riiW» l <HlS«t fe d fr ri *pn) II According to Prasadakara
3ftt7<l qualifies both the words ypfai and <$TO?fc II
125. The word jambhan stands at the ending of
a Bahuvrihi, when preceded by su, harita, tjina, and soma.
The ^*H*t is a word that has already taken the samasanta affix 9T^
irregularly, and means' food' or* tooth'. Thus ffsrwnj, as Oetpwshmi^), Ijpi**!
f*FrF so also 3ftcT5T**r, $*rsfwnr,(?<* H**i V&i) ^V \* ** X ll When it means • tooth',
the compound should be analysed as, iprrar or ?sfrePre H*hts^t ii If su &c do
not precede it, we have mhmm*H » n
^fgutifir <&*vi4tfi 11 t^5 11 m^iPi 11 «cfi$ , 5frift l ^spjjfSt n
ff% •• 11 ffiwWrr $<i*iHmiT?i fcm<u<t *§*fttt srei% g«^4nt 11
126. The form dakshinerman is an irregularly
formed Bahuvrihi, when used in conjunction with a -hunter.
The word ^sq means «w? or a fowler, a hunter. Thus 5fCT v rfft Y TO( t *
jftrjptf ipx: • a stag wounded by the hunter on the right flank \ But in the
following verse:— *j& gKIMH l< ft iprf^rfWipm^WcTir tf§T»WT, it denotes merely hunt-
ing. The word f^means'a wound*. Why do we say 'in reference to a hunter*?
Observe qravrf* TOi?*. II j
^ g> fio<4pKft 11 *^s 11 q^Tw n r% ^Ao^Yct^ 11
127. The affix ich comes after a Bahuvrihi when
the compound denotes the reciprocity of an action.
The compound denoting reciprocity of action is formed by II. 2. 27.
•fhus sparc*?* ~^fP&3 ^toj 'tftaT ft 5* *T* « So also ^^r^Pr, s^rerggnS , *«it-
Goagle
>QQ
[Bk. V. Ch. IV 5 131/] «nnr r 1028
a
^f"T II The affix f^j forms also avyaylbhava compounds, as it occurs in the
list of faam words II. 1. 17. '
*******
128. The words dvidaricji &e are valid forms in ich.
The word i\q*vuif *»q: is in the dative case, and not the Ablative case.
The dative here has the force of " for the purpose of that n (II. 1. 36). This
word is therefore equal to ftyngirqPW Rwwlr H^T "the affix f^ comes for the
sake of the words dvidan^i &c w , i. e. it comes in such a way as to form the
words dvidan£t &c. These words arc used in fixed senses. Thus fftf&T
WHrt. ftg^TI% 7^. but not here, ft^TT nm « Though the context is that of
Bahuvrlhi, yet some of these words are Tatpurusha : as fH$*4 Mi^MNUf^ft-
$**reOT W?c 11 vnorqrilrfft^'nw^-Rt^rmf tffcrr *r**Rr m The compound-
ing takes place by II. 1. 72.
1 fi?f*T, 2 nranf^ t 3 g >i i *»Mft , 4 gy gretffr , 5 ctt*£?. 6 evrarcftr, 7 ?*to%,
8 sw*Rtr, 9 ^Hr^fSr, 10 wirarf*. 11 wnfa, 12 winrf**, 13 ctiwti, H ^roRTTf ,
15 qW*. 16 jfrmft. 17 *TRaqf*. («n**r?ft), 18 *H* t 19 f^n*f6r, 20 ^rsf%^ 21
sr%qn% 11
snETOPrf 5fT3%g: II t*\ II <*rrft II *, *ni wpi, W£4t; 5: B
129. After the words pra and sam, there is the
substitution of jfiu for j&nu, when forming the Bahuvrihi
compound.
Thus *$fc *nrft *re*=U3:. So also &F ll
ff%5 II gflft w i gt i m ^I^AmHT fWTqT fftnjfwfWt **ft H
130. The substitution of j&u for j&nu is optional,
when the word firdhva precedes it.
Thus *tf KT3^t«TO = 3ki?5IT3: orajvfo: M
3wnr s^ ll \%\ 11 q^ 11 spot:, *r*^ ■
ff%r* II 3W*I«!F*rc* *5*ftf Cf^T^ft **ffi OTTORP M
131. The syllable anan is the substitute of the
final of 3^snac in a Bahtivrlhi.
As^HTf^^r^^i-^iret.^SnftH The feminine is formed by add-
ing yfv (IV. 1. 25) ; and these words are always used in this form for the
feminine only ; no substitution takes place in the masculine, as Hfrw TO**;
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
io2Q %n tt [ Bk, V. Ch. IV. { 136
iJwr^P^" WH- **-***( VI - 4. 148). sre^+tffic-ap^+iO* being elided
by VI. 4. I34)-«4M*
132. The anafi. is the substitute of the final of
dhanus in a Bahuvrihi.
As irrjf >*3Wl"-*rjp*^ nom. s. *njfa**r ll So also «u«mmM i , S*fiF*T,
^t item* « ?^ n q^int n *rr, <fawin f (wrf) 1.
j ffo H ^ ^MMIA$siitkH*l3*ft 3T *rem ^TOT fofil I ffi* f^THP syr&T W^q^T It
133. The substitution of srsf does not optionally
1 * take place when the Bahuvrihi is a Name.
This declares an option, where the last sdtra had made the substitu-
tion compulsory. As thiMg; or ^>q^r, £*>T!P or 9^T H
dNim R^ll \Vi n ^TFT II Mii^Wi :, F^F II
^frv 11 MmiMMiTfw* ^i^Wfer^fr *roi% 11
j 134. For the final of 51RT is substituted fk& in a
Bahuvrihi.
Thus 3*ftT3rraT «r^-3^ttk: (^rar+f^p«=»^T«+f%?=»^r+R, the ^ be-
| Ing elided by VI. 1. 66). So also fsrsrrFF » There is punvad-bhava also.
?irV4 4$ £<<ij ki^ti^^nw. II \\<\ II M^lfa II I^IFT, ^ f ^ ^fcT, ^J f
^Rr ii s*t 2f% g g*P* f$i%HT: tos mh^i^w t«hKiiATi *nrW OTfrarefr *f?ftfk nnfy 1
j 135. For the final of n^r is substituted * when
preceded by s% vfik, ^ and ^ft in a Bahuvrihi.
Thus the it of irvt is replaced by f , as 4t«uW : , MfiMfiy , girfcT*, g*Pr-
«tf«P II Why after these only ? See iflgjM-q r qnn M
Vdrt : — The word ir*T is a material noun as *UM«ftHlg, and an adjective
as ^f^tip^j 'having the scent of sandal'. The rule of substitution applies when
it is used as an attribute. 'Therefore, not here,^nRT T^TT *TO=giT5qr uml^KE*
" a shop-keeper having many sweet perfumes for sale ".
^gqr^TPTTC II \\\ II q^rfa II *U?'4I<^N!H, faO H (
ff^s II m*4HWI*H 3T *l«*l4|Ittri£l4iKftd *T*1^ U*il*Un?l *£cft$t *RI% II
; 136. The ^ is substituted for the final 3r of T*vr at
the end of a Bahuvrihi compound, when *fvj means ' a little \
Thus wqTS?qtsR^» gjHTfHr HWTO " food with a little broth n . So yr-
itf?^ "food with a little — a mere scent— of ghee \ So tfcnfaf u Here «R*f is
a synonym of wff^ 11
K
Digitized by CjOOQ 16
Bk. V. Ch. IV. §. 139 ] ft* ■ ~ 1030
137. The $ is substituted for the final a* of *i*sr
at the end of Bahuvrlhi, when preceded by a word denoting
/< a thing with which it is compared.
f^wr. n
138. The final zf of qr^ is elided when it is at the
end of a Bahuvj-ihi compound, preceded by a word denoting
a thing with which it is compared, but not so when such
word is $fer &c.
The word 4qHIHH t is understood here. The vfa substitution is a
sam&sAnta affix in a way. Thus cqrtTCOT WlPI=«innnii fkfWl II But fftf-
W i t** , 10 gq <ta* , 11 qr»#n^i*, 12 «?**. 13 qmrar , 14 *!?*•, 15 if* # , 16 qfa,
( hR^i ), 17 sn&r, 18 upRir, id $g<*. n
grafts ^ 11 t^ n *vft n $ukpOs, % (»ta) ■
139. The words kumbhapadi &c, have been form-
ed by the similar elision of the a? of *n^ |
The forms g p rnt &c, are formed by eliding the final if of *r*» and
then substituting q^ for <wi before the feminine affix f by IV. 4. 13a This
substitution takes place only before the feminine affix 3^, and no where else,
as $MMfl, TOITft H Those words in the list, the first members of which denote
an object of comparison or a numeral, would have elided «T by V. 4. 138 or V,
V 4.140. In their case, this stitra teaches the invariable affixing of -&% to such
words ; so that the optional rule IV. 1. 8 does not apply to them.
1 $»rnfh 2 ^mit, 3 *iHMfl, 4 $*q#, # 5 sfsrqft, 6 ipnQ* 7 *nr qfr 8 fnrrft,
9 firorefl, lo^wrfhrtt, 11 farft* 12 yirrtv^ 13 firrft 14 flnriP, 15 **&*, 16 *rftoft
17 fin%q*t*,/i8 ft*^*, 19 gxrfr, 20 Fr*?#, 21 smMfc 22 $fl*t#, ($*rr#), 23 $«*-
<rtt, 24 5f^t # f 25 H*rtft, (*WWt), 26yrfr, 27 qft<M<fl, 28 *n*rft 29 B?m#, SO
*pmft, tap***), 31 BTtrt»*. 32 «j*Mh 33 inHTlft 34 nrrfV, 35 ^w^ f 36 gif^V, 37
q**n<t, 38 im*, 39 *rrrtt, 40 n^sft 41 ftq*fft ||
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
1081 *? w . [ BK. V. Ch IV. §. 144
ffrf: II (HWI^Sw 9l4HI ^T 1^4V? s 4IWMMW %^T H^fif *WWIW|« II
140. The final sr of qr^f is elided also when a
Numeral or the word ^ precedes it, in a BahuvTlhi.
Thus Jf TTCnTFl-ftWl. frnn, so also <$v*$t TRr^^-gpTT^ H
spjfa ^tft ^[ 11 «t 11 q^fc 11 *r^, f^cTOT, ^ 11 .
•WfFf I
141. For ^r is substituted ^ in a Bahuvrlhi, when
a Numeral or fj precedes it, and the whole word expresses
a stage of life i. e. an age.
The Ht of 1% is indicatory, making Rule VII. 1. 70 applicable, by
which a nasal is added before cj in decKning these words in saryanamasthana
cases: and rule IV. 1. 6 also applies to them. All rules relating to sfr* apply
to these. Thus $T *??nTOl=ftf5* "a child of the age in which two teeth have
appeared M . So also nmt; *T3f* H OTHTT^rTmra Wtm *imr: - 5^ W^ ; " a ho Y
of the age in which all his teeth have appeared beautifully". Why do we say
denoting ' age ' ? Observe fi^tf. ffSTC* II
a^fc r ^r II *«^ II wfa B ^*fai ^> (^)J*
142. For danta is substituted dat in the Vedas,
when final in a Bahuvrlhi.
Thus q^WHH**H, sf*WJ btih^ M
fan ^rnrrac n v*\ n <^ft H fenrnc, ^rnrro, (^) n
. ^: 11 firappmrif trvrar faro ^ni«ff 1 *? iwwfttfi *rci% 11
143. For danta is substituted dat when in the
feminine gender deuoting a name.
Thus sraMI, <KTO*ft M Why do we say when denoting a Name ?
Observe OTtnft, ft** *ft »
ftram viNKi^i^iW Wii q^ilf^^ f «^r^ f ^^^wni(^r) II
ff^r: i vm mrar rstsror toi www *? wwfrt **rf% 11
144. Optionally dat is substituted for danta, in a
Bahuvrlhi compound, when it is preceded by the words fiy&va
and aroka. v
Thus >«irr^rT: or >*m*, «TOl«*r- or srfftrcM «TU^ means •dark'
• non-luminous \ The word ?fttrar* of the last sfttra governs this also, so that
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Bk. V. Ch. IV. §. 14;} *&* 11 1032
when the compound is not a Name, the substitution does not take place ; as
j<u*iHft*ir *rei% wmi*tft wjzftlt €pn% n
145. The substitution of dat for danta is optional
in a Bahuvrihi, when it is preceded by a word ending in «nr
or by gsc, g* , ** and srj* I
The word " optionally " is understood here also. Thus $<£H<*[il4< t or
§FPram^:, so also ^r^r» or ?j*re^, ^^n or 5pnni, i****: or^ro, tows*
or ^TR^II
The t of the stitra indicates that the substitution optionally takes
place 2n other cases not enumerated : as vrft??tp or *tft?q[, «ft<M< or *l%3ft*ep,
it^h^s or «t|h^ ftHSW^P or ftrcrc?^ A
ff% : I <*i$<W«1MW 44*tfi$4T<it T^t HHKII«rft SPIRIT *W1MI4IH, • *WlfWII f*3~
146. The final letter of kakuda is dropped in a
Bahuvrihi, when, it denotes age or condition of animals.
The word *nre*rr means the changes which things undergo by lapse
of time, such as age &c. Thus «Tqf^3^?TO a 3TOiTr33^Fl--Yn?* "the young
of an animal". ^f7^ a *^WTOT "middle — aged animal" : 4Md*$4i»1>KTO
" old ". ftn^r^(» * pm% • strong \ nft^^=- *nfite^% tiRiwp 11
Why do we say when denoting a condition ? Observe *H<j»^ M
fa*h$<M4c* II \W II M^lft II fa^cJL, q^ H
147. The Bahuvrihi word Tyikakud, formed by
the elision of the final st of kakuda, is the name of a moun-
tain.
qftftEKgftrereq » firer$fr " a three-peaked hill, the peaks having the shape
of a hump ". All three-peaked hills are not so called it is the name of a
particular hill. When not denoting a hill we have fr4t${: H
*fk*A « m » < w n V** n <rrn^ 11 ^r f fownc, ^ijhw , ( sfrr. )
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
\
103s m>* ' [Bk.v. en. iv; 1 isi
148. After ut and vi, the final of k&kuda is elided
in a Bahuvrihi compound.
Thus 44<t*l$mt*l n ?3CT$<( so alsofofiT^n The word qRflfj means
•palate 1 .
149. After pftr^a, the final of k&kuda is option-
ally elided in a Bahuvrihi compound.
Thus s^w^^-T^lSftor T^RT^r* It
twt&m fawrffcnfh « V\* n ^ri^ 11 ^s^, ji^ f for, *fa*nft: n
150. The words suhjit and durhjit are irregularly
formed Bahuvrihi compounds, denoting " a friend " and " a
foe " respectively.
The word 55^ is derived from t?+fp(, the *pj of f*n being elided in
the Bahuvrihi. It means one whose heart is favourably disposed towards
another. So also 55^ is derived from 5^+ gfit, he whose heart is eviL
Why do we say "whin meaning a friend and a foe respectively"?
Observe f35?q: *t>U*fiich* ' the kind-hearted, merciful \ $j&v5ttt u the evil heart-
ed thief.
151. The affix ^ comes after uras &c final in a"
Bahuvrihi compound.
Thus tggfreqp - sg^gfrst* II So also R4MhF , nmftthWift H
The words yin*, *T3|T5fc TO, $t* and <*vfH are exhibited in the list of
urasadi words as nominative singular, and not in their crude-forms as is the
case with other words. The reason of this is, that the singular number of
these words take the affix 3*7, and not their dual and plural numbers. With
regard to the dual and plural of these, the affix ^ is optionally added by
force of sOtra V. 4. 154. Thus ftjRT^or fi^tf, *<£1H\* or *s*^: H
1 TO$, 2 tfffa, 3 tJHMf, 4 3HPJ, 5 SFtfT^* 6 <ra*r f 7 iffr:, 8 Bfft:, 9 *pT f
10 i^fc 11 firffy, 12 3T^f^r: II (The affix 3R^ is added to 9f4 when preceded by the
Negative particle tf?*, as WR^T* )
Dignfee
.ifeyX^OQgk
BK. V. Ch. IV. § 155 ] «*« 1084
fftr: II f 9RinnvAJ|: *?V S|?rat **fa ftwf (W% II
152. The affix wj is added to a Bahuvrihi the
last member of which ends in %%> when a feminine word is
denoted.
Thus *f?r tf>*«uwil mrti^i =w^ft^ir ism u So also jfsnrar; qguiPtai
*prfh Wg^rfarai &n ll Why do we say when denoting a feminine ? Observe
WgTrsft tnrr or vstf*ror. ll The latter form is derived by adding *s* optionally
under V. 4. 154.
dvpnr n fit I <i^n% II isfir, ss*n, ^, («*)»
^f^f: II 4i«4«rill^4*>fl3'it«ttl<J«ril*l 9i^l|<H*ll *MW W
153. The affix Wi* is added to a Bahuvrihi the
last member of which is a feminine word ending in long t
or 3; defined as nadl words, or which ends in a short 5J H
The word *% is defined in I. 4. 3. Thus i*g$mCI*t>*P C*f**P JTJfs
^T%tt)t ggggreg ip ll M*j* : ll The if in ^ is for the sake of euphony.
ffin 11 qwgrgflfo «HiuinJl Tftft«rs ^ OmscHHiflMmi *^?reral *nl% 11
154. After all other Bahuvrihi compounds not
covered by the foregoing rules, may optionally be added the
affix 5j*r n
Thus (gur^ or *5tq*niF or ^5*35*, «g<il<44|! or ^fmnrap or qgims,
VI^Nsffs or *5?ftup or *5#JrTCi: &c. The word \w denotes all those Bahuvrihi
about which no special rule has been given above. How do you explain the
forms sr^pr *TPT, W*ftf apfc in which the affix ^ is added, though these words
are governed by the general rule V. 4. 74, and ought to have taken the sama-
s*nta affix n? The affix iris added to q?$ when the compound has a
special meaning such as s^T*: means 'a boy ', *f$n* *a chara^a*.
Why do we say " after the rest " ? Observe fcrnr:, flftgc* *
5f <mwm ll V\\ ll ^dk 11 5f ^rnmc, ( «f<0 I
155. The affix *ni does not come after a Bahu-
vrihi when a Name is meant.
This debars ^ ordained by the last Thus ft**^*r *TC*-ft*l*V, fa-
23
Digitized by LiOOQ 16
\
*03! Viii [ Bk. V.CH. IV. $ 159
156. The affix sw does not come after a Bahu-
vrihi the last member of which ends in the affix fcj^ n
This debars all the previous rules. Thus m*t sfafcftsw -Wg^nipfr
here rule V. 4. 154 is debarred, w^rk ^^tspr«^ni#, here rule V. 4. 153
is prohibited. By rule I. 2. 48 the long final i ought to have been shortened,
but this is not done by considering it as a masculine " faff vgrfflr J^ w See
VArtika under I. 2. 48.
*fed* BIS- II *H* n Tptffrt II *ft^, «T3t (!T «^) >
fffir* 11 *^sJf 4t WTrofr rt% uwimgflftt ** ipn% «r unfa 11
157. The affix 57*1 does not come after a Bahu-
vrihi ending in the word bhr&t|j, when it means ' praised '.
The word qfar. means • praised •/• respected • &c. Thus ift*m war
S**-fiP*n?T f one having a good brother'. Why do we say when it means
"praised"? Observe gftffpp, S*W** U
158. The affix w^ does not come after a Bahu-
vrlhi ending in short 55 in the Veda.
Thus jprr ifinsw- j^rar, taftm;, ^tf*ht, sjftar 11
ir^tcFarqtt ^t# 11 IH^ 11 1141ft 11 5»rfr, d*uit: 9 ^t^ (qs* f sr) R
159. The affix *^ does not come after the words
n&4t an( i tantrl final in a Bahuvrihi, when they mean organs
of body.
Thus wK^lr HnQlMW-Wfnfir* *rnp, *5<<*414f<ir ll The word n^ft means
•artery'. Why do we $ay meaning "parts of body"? Observe, 4fsn*Np r
^cTWi 4£<V*4tal *frfT II The word mzft is a feminine word formed by ^« that
comes after j*ti; ipsft is formed by the un*di affix f (un III. 158). In *&m&
the long | is shortened as being an upasarjana (I. 2. 48); but the f of tfwft Is
not shortened, as f here is not a feminine affix, but a kpt affix ($i(ftrar. *flr-
^V; See I. 2. 48 also).
Digitized by VjOOQLC
BkV.Ch.IV.I.»6o]
«*.«
1036
if" 2hT 2£wi . though the tot word is a Nadt
without adding the aftw «%. w« e
W ° rd \ he word demeans either «M ^^^"of SjK
added to the root ft 'to ^-^^^t^-m^^ "»-'
^shuttle'. ^^^-^-^KTshuttlehasnotyetbeenex.
unbleached cloth or b anket • ^ W ^ t0 ^ by VIII. 4. *»
tracted, fresh from the loom. TheHiscnag
<;«- .
w
Printed by Trttmn
UCo.U,*****™**""*"*"*'
(google
Digitized by VjOOQ
\
v
* V
• RATES OF SUBSCRIPTION-
Payable in advance for the complete work, including **stage.
Indian ... r s , 20 0,"
Foreign ... ' ... £ 2
Price per set of 4 parts, i. e., one Book or Adhydya, bound in one
volume — excluding postage and* V. P. commission — Ss. 3 (Indian),
6s. (Foreign).: ,
Intending Subscribers are requested to apply with remittances
to the .
MANAGER,'
Panini Office,
Benares.
N. W. Provinces, India.
NOTICE.
The Sixth Book is in the Press, and will be out in April 1897. We
hope to finish the publication of the complete work before the end of this year, <
Manager.
Printed by Freeman & Co., Ld., at the Tar* Printing Works, Benares.
Digitized by VjQOQLC
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Digitized by VjOOQLC
Digitized by VjOOQLC
. r i :U" v.
~s4crne
Bookbinding Co., Inc.
300 Summer Street
Boston 10, Mass.
Digitized by
Google
muff
WIDENER LIBRARY
Harvard College, Cambridge, MA 02138: (617)495-2413
If the Item b recalled, the borrower will be notified of
the need for an earlier return. (Non-receipt of overdue
notices does not exempt the borrower from overdue fines.)
[WIDENER
Thank you for helping us to preserve our coUedionl
r
Digitized by
Google
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11